JP7552804B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A pachinko machine is one type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, a gaming ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on a gaming board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-271480 A

However, in pachinko machines equipped with variable display means, many players continue playing the game by simply continuing to look at the variable display means. This raises concerns that players may quickly become bored with the game.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a game area to which the game ball launched by the launching means is guided;
A specific area means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific area means is
A special ball entry section into which a game ball moving in the specific area can enter;
A special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special ball entry section,
The gaming machine includes:
A special game state advantageous to the player is given based on at least the detection by the special ball detection means;
The specific area means is configured to allow the game ball to enter the specific area based on the establishment of a specific condition, and to allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry section;
A specific effect means is provided for generating a specific effect during a predetermined period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the special ball entry detection means detects the ball,
The specific performance is ended before the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection means in the specific performance means, and the visibility of the specific area is increased, and the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area is made visible;
A first situation can be derived in which the performance executed in the situation and a performance instructing the occurrence of the special game state can be derived based on the game ball entering the special ball entry section, and a second situation can be derived in which the specific performance by the specific performance means can be continuously executed until the performance instructing the occurrence of the special game state is executed,
The specific presentation when the presentation in the first situation is executed, and the specific presentation that continues to be executed until the presentation instructing the occurrence of the special game state in the second situation is executed, are characterized in that they can derive a common pattern during a specific period from the start to the middle of the specific presentation .

The present invention can increase interest.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. An oblique view showing the inner frame and front frame set in an open state. A front view showing the configuration of the inner frame and game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view showing the inner frame, rear pack unit, etc. in an open state. 2 is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used in game control. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process. A flowchart showing the start winning processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the correct/incorrect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a type determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reach determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a launch permission command setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing variable winning device control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a termination setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal display control process. 13 is a flowchart showing the general map change setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a general map discrimination information setting process. A flowchart showing the start winning device control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used to determine decorative patterns, etc. 13 is a flowchart showing a counter update process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold information storage process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold process. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process. 1 is a front view showing a decorative pattern display device and a pseudo-ball performance device. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pseudo-ball effect device. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pseudo-ball effect device. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pseudo-ball effect device. A front view showing the visual appearance of the decorative pattern display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a guidance display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a guidance display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a guidance display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a guidance display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-ball effect (handover effect). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition effect (handover effect). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-ball effect (handover effect). 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a takeover performance execution process. FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a pseudo-ball effect device in a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a storage member in a second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic side view showing a mechanism for transporting a pseudo-ball in the second embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the procedure for deriving pseudo balls of the same color in the order of an upward moving type reel movement area → a downward moving type reel movement area. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the procedure for deriving different colored pseudo balls in the order of an upward moving type reel moving area → a downward moving type reel moving area. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the procedure for deriving different colored pseudo balls in the order of a downward-moving feature movement area → an upward-moving feature movement area. A schematic front view showing a variable display device unit (decorative pattern display device and specific prize unit) in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a handover performance in another embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a handover performance in another embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rendering error process in another embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in Fig. 3 and other figures, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 as a game board mounting frame is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. For convenience, Fig. 3 omits game members (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the game board 30 surface, a glass unit 137 attached to a front frame set 14 as a front frame, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6, the outer frame 11 is made up of an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy extrusion material, and these frame components 11a to 11d are assembled together into a rectangular frame shape by removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see Figure 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, allowing the inner frame 12 to be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and other components are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

The right frame component 11d also has an extending wall 83 formed near its rear end in the width direction that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the front side of the extending wall 83 is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is engaged. The lower receiving portion 85 also has a pressing portion 86 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 and abuts against the inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later.

In addition, a resin trim panel 87 is attached to the lower frame component 11b. A rib 88 that protrudes upward is integrally formed on the innermost part of the top surface of the trim panel 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to form between the trim panel and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward around this opening/closing axis. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 with a rectangular outer shape, and a roughly elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 is designed to be able to be opened forward around an opening and closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame set 14 may also be configured so that it can be opened and closed directly on the outer frame 11, rather than via the inner frame 12.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 when closed. A roughly elliptical window 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. This makes it possible to view the game board 30 (play area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed structure of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a lower tray 15 is provided at the center of the lower part of the front side of the front frame set 14, and game balls paid out from the lower payout outlet 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. In addition, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower tray 15 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 15.

On the right side of the lower tray 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") is provided as an operating means (launching operating means) protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a rotatable rotating operating body 18a, and is provided with a touch sensor that can detect the touch of a human hand on the handle 18 and a variable resistor for detecting the operation amount of the operating part of the handle 18 at a position not shown. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the launching device 60 launches game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. The handle 18 is also provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the stop lever 18b is pressed, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching game balls even if the handle 18 is being held. Therefore, the handle 18 can be rotated while prohibiting the launching of game balls, or the launching of game balls can be temporarily stopped while holding the handle 18.

As shown in FIG. 2, an upper tray 19 capable of storing game balls dispensed from the upper payout opening 17 is provided above the lower tray 15. The upper tray 19 also guides the game balls (temporarily) stored in the upper tray 19 in a line toward the launching device 60, which serves as a launching means, described below. When the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be dispensed are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray connecting passage 71 and the lower payout opening 16, described below.

On the top surface of the upper tray 19, there are provided a loan switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124. In an amusement hall or the like, when a gaming card with a balance is inserted into the CR unit located on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, the loan switch 121 is operated and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted into the CR unit. The balance display unit 124 also displays the remaining balance of the card inserted into the CR unit.

Furthermore, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to protrude from and retract into the top surface of the upper tray 19, and is always biased in a direction that causes it to protrude upward from the top surface of the upper tray 19 by a biasing means (not shown). When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. In other words, the player can move the game balls in the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, the top surface of the upper tray 19 is provided with a performance button 125 and a cross button 126 as operation means and performance operation means. The performance button 125 has an LED built in that can change the light color as needed, and pressing the performance button 125 or the cross button 126 switches the display on the decorative pattern display device 42 (described later) or determines a specific selection item.

In addition, various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. The light-emitting modes of these light-emitting means are changed and controlled in response to changes in the game state, etc., and serve to enhance the presentation effects during play. For example, a circular illumination section 102 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs is provided around the periphery of the window section 101. Also, error display lamps 104 that light up when a specified error occurs are provided on both sides of the circular illumination section 102. Note that a number of fine through-holes are formed in the upper part of each error display lamp 104 of the circular illumination section 102 in correspondence with the speakers SP (see Figure 3) provided on the rear of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a pair of rectangular glass panes attached separately as in the conventional method, but is round overall and is assembled and then attached.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 behind the window hole 39 in a state where it abuts against the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, approximately the center part of the front of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Attached to the lower front part of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39, are a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after it is launched by the launching device 60. In this embodiment, a solenoid-type launching device is used as the launching device 60. Furthermore, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 to the launch position of the launching device 60 one ball at a time by driving a built-in driving means (e.g. a solenoid).

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. The game board 30 is provided with a general winning device 31, a variable winning device 32 as a variable winning means, a starting winning means, a first starting winning device 33a and a second starting winning device 33b as specific means, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like. As is well known, the game ball launched by the launching device 60 is guided to the front side of the game board 30, that is, to the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137, and when the game ball enters (wins) various winning holes such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the number of prize balls corresponding to the various winning holes is paid out to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15.

In this embodiment, three game balls are dispensed when the starting winning device 33a or 33b is entered, ten game balls are dispensed when the general winning device 31 is entered, and fifteen game balls are dispensed when the variable winning device 32 is entered. In addition, even if a game ball passes through the through gate 34, which only allows the game ball to pass through (it is not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not dispensed. In addition, the first starting winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that game balls moving through the game area can always enter (pass through), whereas the second starting winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the bottom of the game area, and game balls that do not enter the various winning ports such as the general winning device 31 are discharged outside the game area through this outlet 36. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails (game nails) to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged.

The game board 30 of this embodiment is made of a transparent resin such as acrylic resin or polycarbonate. Furthermore, the front and back of the game board 30 are directly printed (stickers are attached) or decorative features are placed at the back of the game board 30, and decorations are applied to the inner circumference of the window hole 39 (visible range of the game board 30).

A variable display unit 35 is disposed in approximately the center of the play area. The variable display unit 35 includes a decorative pattern display device 42, which will be described in detail later, and a center frame 47 that is arranged to surround the decorative pattern display device 42, and is configured so that game balls cannot enter the inner circumference of the center frame 47.

A first start winning device 33a is provided below the variable display unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front of the game board 30, and a winning hole (start winning hole) through which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side. Note that the first start winning device 33a of this embodiment is not provided with an opening/closing member that changes the ease with which game balls can enter the first start winning device 33a.

The second start winning device 33b is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The second start winning device 33b is provided with a pair of rotatably displaceable blade members 37 adjacent to both the left and right sides of the winning opening (start winning opening) of the second start winning device 33b through which the game ball can enter. In this embodiment, when the blade members 37 are in a closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip of the blade member 37 and the first start winning device 33a, and the second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible for the game ball to enter. Meanwhile, by changing the blade member 37 to an open position that opens outward, a gap is created between the blade member 37 and the first start-up winning device 33a through which the game ball can pass, and the second start-up winning device 33b is in an open state in which the game ball is permitted to enter and the blade member 37 guides the game ball moving to the side of the second start-up winning device 33b to the start-up winning port of the second start-up winning device 33b.

The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b, which act as a condition satisfaction detection means, a start winning ball detection means, and a specific detection means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, a winning/losing lottery is held to determine whether or not a jackpot state will be generated as a special game state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened, and a variable display is performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42, which will be described later. If the winning/losing lottery is won, the jackpot state will be granted.

A variable winning device 32 is provided below the second start winning device 33b. The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening that leads to the rear of the game board 30, a shutter that opens and closes the large winning opening, a large winning opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a count switch 223 that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. By controlling the drive of the large winning opening solenoid and opening and closing the shutter, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot enter, and in the event of a jackpot, is in an open state where game balls can enter. In this embodiment, the large prize shutter of the variable winning device 32 is pivotally supported at its lower edge along the lower edge of the large prize opening, and when the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state, the large prize shutter extends up and down to block the large prize opening, allowing game balls to pass in front of the large prize shutter. On the other hand, when the variable winning device 32 is in an open state, the large prize shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly inclined downward toward the rear), and game balls that have flowed down in front of the large prize opening are received by the back surface (upper surface) of the large prize shutter and guided to the large prize opening.

Within the game area, a through gate 34 is disposed in an area located to the left of the variable display unit 35 (when viewing the game board 30 from the front of the game machine 10) (hereinafter referred to as the "left area") and an area located to the right of the variable display unit 35 (hereinafter referred to as the "right area"). The through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through it one by one. As will be described in more detail later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing through the through gate 34.

In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) is held to determine whether or not the second start winning device 33b will be opened, and a variable display is displayed on the normal pattern display device 41 to inform the player of the result of the ball entry support lottery. Then, if the ball entry support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified period of time after the variable display ends.

In this embodiment, there is a "low probability state" in which the jackpot is won at a predetermined probability in a win/lose lottery, and a "high probability state" in which the jackpot is won at a higher probability than in the low probability state in a win/lose lottery. In addition, there is a "high ball entry state" as a second ball entry state in which the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33c, and a "low ball entry state" as a first ball entry state in which the blade member 37 is opened for a shorter period of time than in the high ball entry state. Hereinafter, the state in which the low probability state and the low ball entry state are both referred to as the "normal mode", the state in which the low probability state and the high ball entry state are both referred to as the "time-saving mode", and the state in which the high probability state and the high ball entry state are both referred to as the "probability mode". It is also possible to configure the state in which the high probability state and the low ball entry state (latent mode) are both set.

In addition, examples of the high ball entry state include (1) a state in which the variable display time in the normal pattern display device 41 is shorter than in the low ball entry state, (2) a state in which the opening time (prescribed time) of the second start winning device 33b is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is greater than in the low ball entry state, (4) a state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is greater than in the low ball entry state, and (5) a state in which the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment adopts the above configurations (1), (2), (4), and (5). Of course, the high ball entry state is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5), or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". This makes it easier for game balls to win the second start winning device 33b more frequently, increasing the number of times the winning/losing lottery is held, and creating a good ball holding state in which the reduction in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode continue until a jackpot state occurs, whereas the time-saving mode ends when the variable display on the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed a preset number of times (100 times in this example) even if a jackpot state does not occur, and the mode transitions to the normal mode.

The types of jackpots in this embodiment include a 10-round variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "10RS"), a 10-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "10RN"), and a 4-round variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "4RS"). One round is when the variable winning device 32 is open for 30 seconds, or when 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. For "10RS" and "10RN", this is repeated 10 times, and for "4RS", this is repeated 4 times before the jackpot state ends. In addition, after the jackpot state of "10RS" and "4RS" ends, a "variable mode" is granted, and after the jackpot state of "10RN" ends, a "time-saving mode" (100 variable displays in this example) is granted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a "small win" may be won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. If a small win occurs in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 1.8 seconds (once) to indicate a small win state. The game mode does not change before and after the small win state occurs.

In addition, adjacent to the upper right corner of the approximately elliptical game area, there is a first special display device 43a as a special display means, which displays a variable display to inform the result of the winning/losing lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start winning device 33a, and a second special display device 43b as a special display means, which displays a variable display to inform the result of the winning/losing lottery that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start winning device 33b, and when a game ball enters the start winning devices 33a, 33b during the variable display on the special display devices 43a, 43b, The first reserved display device 46a and the second reserved display device 46b as reserved display means for indicating that the variable display corresponding to the ball entry has been reserved and stored, the normal pattern display device 41 as normal display means for displaying a variable display to inform the result of the ball entry support lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34, and the normal reserved display device 44 for indicating that the variable display corresponding to the passage has been reserved and stored when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 are provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first reserved display device 46a, the second reserved display device 46b, the normal pattern display device 41, and the normal reserved display device 44 are directly display-controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control device described later.

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special lamps). When a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the first special display device 43a switches the display (varies) of the first special lamp.

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special lamps). When a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the second special display device 43b switches the display (varies) of the second special lamp.

After the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b display the change for a predetermined period of time, the change will be stopped based on the result of the win/lose lottery. In other words, the lighting state when the change display stops (the combination of the illuminated special lamps) corresponds to various results of the win/lose lottery, and the result of the win/lose lottery, i.e., "big win", "small win", or "miss", is definitively displayed depending on the lighting state when the change display stops.

Furthermore, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b also indicate the type of big win, i.e., "10RS", "10RN", or "4RS", depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) at which they are stopped. Also, there are not just one but multiple stop modes for the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that indicate various big win types, small wins, and misses, and one of these is selected and displayed as a stop mode.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start winning device 33a does not have the possibility of winning a "small prize", but it may be configured so that there is a possibility of winning. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the winning/losing lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second start winning device 33b so that there is no possibility of winning a "small prize".

The stopped display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next variable display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the variable interval). Furthermore, if the next variable display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed after the stopped display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b is configured to switch from the lighting state indicating the result of the win/lose lottery to a lighting state indicating that the variable display is in a standby state where no variable display is being performed. Note that the lighting state indicating the result of the win/lose lottery may be configured to be maintained as is.

The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b are each composed of two LEDs (first hold lamp, second hold lamp). In this embodiment, the device is configured to be able to hold and store up to four display changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as the "first display change"). Furthermore, the device is also configured to be able to hold and store up to four display changes based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning device 33b (hereinafter referred to as the "second display change").

For example, if one first change display is reserved, the first reserved lamp on the left side (inner circumference of the game area) lights up, if two first change displays are reserved, the first reserved lamps on the left and right sides light up, if three first change displays are reserved, the first reserved lamp on the left side flashes and the first reserved lamp on the right side lights up, and if four first change displays are reserved, the first reserved lamps on the left and right sides flash. Furthermore, if a new game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b during a jackpot state, the corresponding change display is also reserved.

In this embodiment, the reserved variable display is basically consumed in the order in which it was reserved, but if both the first variable display and the second variable display are reserved, the second variable display is consumed preferentially. In other words, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first start winning device 33a is not performed unless all second variable displays triggered by a ball entering the second start winning device 33b have been consumed. For example, when one first reserved lamp is lit, if a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second reserved lamp is lit, the first variable display is postponed and the second variable display is performed first. However, if the second variable display is reserved and stored while the first variable display is changing, the second variable display is performed after the first variable display that is changing.

The normal pattern display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal pattern lamps). In addition, in the normal pattern display device 41, for example, the normal pattern lamp on the right side (outer circumference of the game area) is flashed (displayed in a variable manner) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. After the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal pattern display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the ball entry support lottery. In other words, the lighting state (combination of lit normal pattern lamps) when the variable display is stopped corresponds to various results of the ball entry support lottery, and the result of the ball entry support lottery is definitively displayed depending on the lighting state when the variable display is stopped. For example, lighting both the left and right normal pattern lamps indicates a "win," and lighting only the left normal pattern lamp indicates a "lose."

The normal reserve display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal reserve lamps). In this embodiment, the device is configured to be able to reserve and store up to four display variations of the normal pattern display device 41, which are performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34. For example, when one display variation of the normal pattern display device 41 is reserved, the normal reserve lamp on the left side (inner circumference of the game area) lights up, when two displays are reserved, the normal reserve lamps on the left and right sides light up, when three displays are reserved, the normal reserve lamp on the left side flashes and the normal reserve lamp on the right side lights up, and when four displays are reserved, the normal reserve lamps on the left and right sides flash. In addition, when a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during a jackpot state, the display variation for that display is also reserved.

The variable display unit 35 is also provided with a decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device and serves as a performance display means and variable display means capable of displaying decorative patterns. The decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to variably display decorative patterns in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Furthermore, the display content of the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, auxiliary display content is determined by the sub-control device 262 based on a command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is provided with, for example, three pattern display areas, upper, middle, and lower (upper pattern display area, middle pattern display area, lower pattern display area), and multiple types of decorative patterns (for example, number patterns with numbers 1 to 9) are displayed (variably displayed) in each pattern display area in sequence, and then the decorative patterns are displayed in order for each pattern display area (for example, in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle pattern display area). For example, when the occurrence of a jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43a, 43b, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot on the decorative pattern display device 42 (for example, the same decorative patterns are displayed so as to be lined up on a predetermined effective line in the upper pattern display area, middle pattern display area, and lower pattern display area), and the jackpot state is started.

Also, when decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, the first step is, for example, to display the same decorative symbols on a specified active line in the upper and lower symbol display areas. This state in which the same symbols are displayed on a specified active line in the upper and lower symbol display areas, while the middle symbol display area is still displaying a variable number of symbols, is the "reach state." Of course, the occurrence of a reach state does not necessarily mean that a jackpot will result, and there are cases in which it will not result in a jackpot.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, if the same decorative pattern as the decorative pattern (reach pattern) displayed in the upper and lower pattern display areas is displayed stopped on the same active line in the middle pattern display area (if a double number is displayed stopped), a jackpot state is awarded. In addition, if an odd number is displayed, either "10RS" or "4RS" occurs, and if an even number is displayed, either "10RS", "4RS" or "10RN" occurs.

In addition, while combinations of decorative symbols other than the doublets basically indicate a "miss," in the case of a "small win," the decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination (a chance symbol combination, or so-called chance symbol) on the pay line instead of a doublet. In this embodiment, for example, a chance symbol combination is when "3," "4," and "1" are displayed in the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas.

In this embodiment, multiple presentation stages (with different backgrounds, etc.) are prepared in the decorative pattern display device 42 as presentations that teach or suggest the game mode in which the player is currently playing. More specifically, there is a "probability stage" where it is confirmed that the player is currently playing in the probability mode, a "normal stage" where it is confirmed that the player is currently playing in the normal mode, and a "pullback stage" where the player is currently playing in either the time-saving mode or the probability mode. In other words, if "4RS" is won, the player will move to the "probability stage" after the jackpot state ends. Also, if "10RN" is won, the player will move to the "pullback stage" after the jackpot state ends, and if the variable display is performed 100 times in the pullback stage, the player will move to the "normal stage". In addition, if "10RS" is won, the player will move to either the "probability stage" or the "pullback stage" after the jackpot ends.

In other words, if "10RN" is won in the high probability mode, the mode will transition to normal mode after a time-saving mode. In this regard, by configuring the decorative pattern display device 42, etc. to be able to produce the same effect as in the case of "10RN" even when "10RS" is won in the high probability mode (for example, there is a 1/15 probability when "10RS" is won in the high probability mode, and no instruction is given that the high probability mode is being granted, and no instruction is given that the mode is in high probability mode), it is possible to create the expectation that the mode may actually be in high probability mode, even if the game transitions to the return stage.

In this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 is also instructed that the variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning device 33a, 33b is on hold (the right to execute the variable display has been obtained). As shown in FIG. 43, a hold display area 462 is provided in the lower right of the decorative pattern display device 42, which displays a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is on hold. In this embodiment, the hold icon 461 is a figure imitating a "game ball". The hold display area 462 can display up to four hold icons 461 corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold areas of the hold information storage area (first and second hold information storage areas). The hold icons 461 are displayed side by side, and the hold icon 461 located on the left corresponds to the variable display that will be consumed first.

In this embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the hold information stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area is not displayed in the hold display area 462. Even if there are five or more hold memories including the first and second change displays, only four hold icons 461 are displayed in the hold display area 462.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the reserved icon 461 corresponding to the first variable display and the reserved icon 461 corresponding to the second variable display have a common form, and it is not possible to distinguish whether the reserved icon 461 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display just by visually checking the reserved icon 461. In addition, the reserved icon 461 may be derived in a form that suggests the jackpot expectation of the corresponding variable display based on the information stored in the storage area of the reserved information storage area. A plurality of types of reserved icons 461 of such a form are prepared, and the pattern (type) of the reserved icon 461 is associated with the winning expectation (jackpot expectation) for the occurrence of a jackpot state. In this embodiment, in addition to the default silver (gray) ball, blue and red balls can be displayed as the reserved icon 461, and the jackpot expectation is basically increased in the order of silver (gray) → blue → red. In addition, the pattern of the hold icon 461 may change (a hold change effect may be derived) between the time the hold icon 461 is derived and the time the variable display corresponding to that hold icon 461 is consumed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 35 of this embodiment is provided in the center of the upper edge of the center frame 47 and includes a sub-display device 48 made of a liquid crystal display device, a movable role-playing device that protrudes laterally and downward from the rear side of the decorative pattern display device 42, and a pseudo-ball presentation device 49 that serves as a handover presentation means (pseudo-ball presentation means).

In this embodiment, the sub-display device 48 has a display section that is generally circular when viewed from the front. A pair of left and right light-emitting performance sections 47a, which extend along the upper edge of the variable display device unit 35 (center frame 47) and have built-in LEDs, are provided on both sides of the sub-display device 48. Inside each light-emitting performance section 47a, multiple LEDs are arranged along the extension direction of the light-emitting performance section 47a (upper edge of the center frame 47), and are configured to be able to be individually controlled to be turned on and off. In this embodiment, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the sub-display device 48 and the display section of the decorative pattern display device 42 are arranged close to each other vertically. Furthermore, each light-emitting performance section 47a is connected to the sub-display device 48 and extends to both side edges (or nearby areas) of the variable display device unit 35 (center frame 47).

Now, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 39 to FIG. 42, the pseudo ball performance device 49 includes a left unit 401, a right unit 402, and a lower unit 403. The left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 each include a movable role moving area 404 (pseudo ball moving area) in which a pseudo ball FB (see FIG. 39, etc.) as a movable role is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy. Then, a "pseudo ball performance" is performed as a movable role performance means that gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction (for example, whether or not it is a big win) by the behavior of the pseudo ball FB moving in the movable role moving area 404. In addition, the pseudo ball FB (diameter) is configured to be slightly larger (for example, about 1 mm) than the game ball, making it relatively easy to see. The size of the pseudo ball FB may be changed depending on the color (expanding color, contracting color) of the pseudo ball FB.

The left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are basically of the same configuration (they are arranged facing each other, facing upside down, and the mounting position of some components (the starting solenoid 413 described later) has been changed, but the same parts are used). In this embodiment, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 are each mounted on the rear side of the game board 30 (separately attachable). However, a mounting plate on which the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 can be mounted may be provided, and the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403, which are attached to the mounting plate and positioned, may be mounted together on the rear side of the game board 30 (separately attachable to the mounting plate). Also, each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 corresponds to a movable role moving area unit.

As shown in Figures 40 and 41, the left unit 401 is equipped with a main body 405 that is a generally rectangular cylinder extending vertically, a performance passage member 406 that is generally U-shaped and has both ends connected to the main body 405, and a storage member 408 that is configured to be slidable along the longitudinal direction of the main body 405 when stored inside the main body 405, and serves as a mobile prop storage means for storing unused pseudo-balls FB.

39 and 40, the performance passage member 406 has a passage (hereinafter referred to as the "connecting passage 406a") through which the pseudo ball FB can pass between the upper end and the lower end connected to the main body 405. The performance passage member 406 is made of a transparent material and is disposed behind the decorative pattern display device 42 and the transparent game board 30, protruding laterally from the side edge of the center frame 47, so that the pseudo ball FB moving through the connecting passage 406a can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the game board 30. In other words, the pseudo ball performance is performed by allowing the user to see the pseudo ball FB moving between the upper end of the pair of ends of the performance passage member 406 and the lower end. In this embodiment, the vicinity of both ends of the performance passage member 406 is located behind the decorative pattern display device 42, and the main body portion 405 etc. connected to the ends of the performance passage member 406 are also located behind the decorative pattern display device 42, and are not (or are difficult to) see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 40, the storage member 408 of this embodiment is open on one side and has a rectangular box shape that is long vertically, and has four storage chambers 408 with the inner space divided vertically into four stages. Each storage chamber 408 is configured to be able to store one pseudo ball FB, and in this embodiment, which storage chamber 408 stores which type of pseudo ball FB. In this embodiment, the top storage chamber 408 and the second storage chamber 408 from the top each store a silver (gray) pseudo ball FB, the third storage chamber 408 from the top stores a blue pseudo ball FB, and the fourth storage chamber 408 from the top (bottom) stores a red pseudo ball FB. Note that a pair of silver pseudo balls FB are basically used alternately.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41, a rack-shaped portion 409 having a sawtooth portion extending up and down is connected to the side of the storage member 408. As shown in FIG. 42, a pinion member 410 is engaged with the sawtooth portion of the rack-shaped portion 409, and the rack-shaped portion 409 is configured to be slidable up and down based on the drive of a pseudo-ball performance motor 411 composed of a stepping motor connected to the pinion member 410 (either directly or indirectly). The pseudo-ball performance motor 411 is driven and controlled by the sub-control device 262. That is, for example, a special shape portion is provided in the rack-shaped portion 409, and a sensor capable of determining the passage of the special shape portion is provided, so that the height position of the rack-shaped portion 409 and therefore the storage member 408 can be grasped, and the height position of the storage member 408 is adjusted and controlled according to the determined content. In addition, when the pseudo-ball performance is not being performed or when the power is turned on, the storage member 408 is placed at the upper limit position or the lower limit position, and the position information of the storage member 408 is initialized. In this embodiment, the rack-shaped portion 409, the pinion member 410, the pseudo-ball performance motor 411, and the sub-control device 262 constitute the displacement means. The position of the storage member 408 may be determined by the amount of rotation of the pseudo-ball performance motor 411, etc.

As shown in FIG. 40 etc., in this embodiment, two performance passage members 406 are provided in one left unit 401, and the performance passage members 406 are connected in pairs above and below to one main body 405. In contrast, the left unit 401 is provided with only one storage member 408 and one pseudo-ball performance motor 411. In this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 is configured to drive and control the pseudo-ball performance motor 411 based on the position information of the storage member 408, and to match the position (height position) of each storage room 408 of the storage member 408 with the upper end position and lower end position of each performance passage member 406.

In other words, when the blue pseudo-ball FB is to be passed through the upper performance passage member 406 of the pair of upper and lower performance passage members 406 in the left unit 401, the height position of the upper end of the upper performance passage member 406 is made to match the height position of the third storage room 408 from the top of the storage member 408. On the other hand, by matching the height position of the lower end of the performance passage member 406 used in the pseudo-ball performance with the height position of the storage room 408 in which the pseudo-ball FB used in the pseudo-ball performance was stored before being used in the pseudo-ball performance, the pseudo-ball FB used in the pseudo-ball performance is stored in the original storage room 408.

In this embodiment, the movable prop movement area 404 is formed by the storage room 408 (space) that is aligned with the upper end of the performance passage member 406, the storage room 408 that is aligned with the lower end of the performance passage member 406, and the connecting passage 406a of the performance passage member 406. In other words, the storage room 408 (space) that is aligned with the upper end of the performance passage member 406 corresponds to the start point of the movable prop movement area 404, and the storage room 408 (space) that is aligned with the lower end of the performance passage member 406 corresponds to the end point of the movable prop movement area 404.

In addition, after the pseudo ball FB used in the pseudo ball performance is led out from the storage room 408 (based on detection by the start point detection switch 415 described below), the storage member 408 may be displaced so that the height position of the lower end of the corresponding performance passage member 406 and the height position of the storage room 408 from which the pseudo ball FB was led out are immediately matched. Furthermore, basically, the corresponding storage room 408 may reach the lower end of the connecting passage 406a of the performance passage member 406 before the pseudo ball FB led out from the storage room 408 reaches the lower end of the connecting passage 406a of the performance passage member 406.

As shown in Figures 40 and 41, the storage member 408 is provided with an auxiliary plate portion 412 as a stop means that protrudes downward or upward along the lower surface and the front edge of the upper surface. Therefore, even if the lowest storage room 408 of the storage member 408 and the upper end of the specified performance passage member 406 are aligned, at least a part of the lower end of the specified performance passage member 406 (connecting passage 406a) can be blocked by the auxiliary plate portion 412. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo ball FB that reaches the lower end of the performance passage member 406 (connecting passage 406a) is discharged to the end side of the movable prop moving area 404 where the storage member 408 is not present, making it impossible for the pseudo ball FB to be stored in the storage member 408.

In addition, since the pseudo ball FB is stored in the storage chamber 408 that stores the pseudo ball FB that was not used in the pseudo ball performance, when the storage member 408 is displaced to store the pseudo ball FB that has reached the lower end of the performance passage member 406 in the corresponding storage chamber 408, even if the height position of the lower end of the performance passage member 406 coincides with the height position of the other storage chambers 408, the pseudo ball FB that has reached the lower end of the performance passage member 406 will not be stored in the storage chamber 408.

As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, a start solenoid 413 is provided as a start assist means at a position opposite the upper end of each performance passage member 406 across the main body 405. Furthermore, in each storage chamber 408 of the storage member 408, an extrusion hole 408a is provided in the wall portion opposite the opening side (performance passage member 406 side) of the storage member 408, approximately in the center of the wall portion, penetrating the wall portion.

Then, the height position of the predetermined storage room 408 of the storage member 408 is matched with the height position of the upper end of the predetermined performance passage member 406, and the plunger (not shown) of the starting solenoid 413 corresponding to the predetermined performance passage member 406 is protruded, so that the plunger is inserted into the extrusion hole 408a of the predetermined storage room 408 and the pseudo-ball FB stored in the predetermined storage room 408 is extruded toward the performance passage member 406. Note that the performance passage member 406 (connecting passage 406a) may have a portion that extends horizontally, or the performance passage member 406 may be formed into an approximately U-shape that opens slightly toward the end side (the distance between a pair of straight parts gradually widens toward the end side), and the connecting passage 406a may be inclined downward toward the downstream side at any part.

As shown in FIG. 41 etc., the upper and lower ends of the performance passage member 406 of this embodiment are connected to the main body 405 via a ball detection switch that detects the passage of the pseudo-ball FB. That is, the ball detection switch (hereinafter referred to as the "start point detection switch 415") connected to the upper end of the performance passage member 406 can detect that the pseudo-ball FB has been pushed to the upper end of the performance passage member 406 (connecting passage 406a). Furthermore, the ball detection switch (hereinafter referred to as the "end point detection switch 416") connected to the lower end of the performance passage member 406 as an end point detection means can detect that the pseudo-ball FB has reached the lower end of the performance passage member 406.

As shown in FIG. 40 etc., the right unit 402 is basically the same as the left unit 401, but installed upside down, and as the performance passage member 406 is upside down, the starting solenoid 413 is attached to correspond to the upper end of the performance passage member 406. And with regard to the right unit 402, the upper end of the performance passage member 406 is set as the starting point of the movable prop movement area 404, and electrical wiring is performed in the same way as the left unit 401, so that it can function (operate) in the same way as the left unit 401.

Also, as shown in Figure 39 etc., in this embodiment, the upper edge portion of the upper performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 is located below the upper edge portion of the display portion of the decorative pattern display device 42, and as shown in Figure 4, the upper end portion of the upper performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 partially overlaps with the lower end portion of the left side light-emitting performance portion 47a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 39, the lower edge portion of the upper performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 is at approximately the same height as the upper edge portion of the upper performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402, the lower edge portion of the upper performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402 and the upper edge portion of the lower performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 are at approximately the same height, the lower edge portion of the lower performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 and the upper edge portion of the upper performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402 are at the same height, and the lower edge portion of the lower performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402 is located above the lower edge of the display portion of the decorative pattern display device 42. Hereinafter, the upper performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 will also be referred to as the "first performance passage 421", the upper performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402 will also be referred to as the "second performance passage 422", the lower performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 will also be referred to as the "third performance passage 423", and the lower performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402 will also be referred to as the "fourth performance passage 424".

In this embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 store the same combination of pseudo ball FBs, but different combinations (for example, the right unit 402 stores one each of silver, green, red, and gold pseudo ball FBs) may be used. Also, in FIG. 39, the pseudo ball performance motor 411 is provided so as to protrude laterally beyond the left and right side edges of the decorative pattern display device 42, but the pseudo ball performance motor 411 is positioned behind a decorative plate (not shown) (the performance passage member 406 is positioned in front of the decorative plate), so that it cannot be seen from the front.

In this embodiment, a first movable prop movement area (of means C described later) is formed by the connecting passage 406a of the upper performance passage member 406, of the pair of performance passage members 406 provided in each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, and the upper end and (space of) the storage room 408 of the storage member 408 aligned horizontally with the upper end and lower end of the upper performance passage member 406, and a second movable prop movement area (of means C described later) is formed by the connecting passage 406a of the lower performance passage member 406 and the upper end and (space of) the storage room 408 of the storage member 408 aligned horizontally with the lower end of the lower performance passage member 406. Furthermore, the preparation assistance means and storage assistance means are constituted by the storage member 408 that slides up and down, the rack-shaped portion 409 that displaces the storage member 408, the pinion member 410, the pseudo-ball performance motor 411, and the sub-control device 262. Also, in the means A-3, etc., the left unit 401 corresponds to the first movable role movement area, and the right unit 402 corresponds to the second movable role movement area.

As shown in Figures 40 to 42, the lower unit 403 is equipped with a lower unit storage section 431 that stores silver (gray), blue, and red pseudo balls FB individually and can take out the selected type of pseudo ball FB as needed, push-up devices 432 that are provided on both sides of the lower unit storage section 431 and extend vertically, and a distribution member 433 that is provided below the lower unit storage section 431 and guides the pseudo ball FB discharged from the lower unit storage section 431 to one of the pair of push-up devices 432.

In this embodiment, the lower unit storage section 431 is disposed behind the decorative pattern display device 42 (see FIG. 39) and is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The first communication passage 434, which guides the pseudo ball FB led out from the lower unit storage section 431 to the distribution member 433, is located at least at its lower portion below the decorative pattern display device 42 and is visible from the front, and is made of a translucent material that makes it difficult to distinguish the color of the pseudo ball FB passing through it. The first communication passage 434 may be configured so that the pseudo ball FB passing through it is relatively difficult to see, and may be configured so that a relatively narrow visible range is provided in a scattered manner, be made of a material to which a highly reflective material is added, be colored in a psychedelic tone, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 40, the distribution member 433 includes an entrance 435 for receiving the pseudo ball FB led out from the lower unit storage section 431, a left guide section 436 for guiding the pseudo ball FB flowing into the entrance 435 to the left push-up device 432, a right guide section 437 for guiding the pseudo ball FB flowing into the entrance 435 to the right push-up device 432, and a branching device 438 provided at the branching point of the left guide section 436 and the right guide section 437, and these are housed in an opaque case body 439 (see FIG. 41, etc.). The branching device 438 in this embodiment is driven and controlled by the sub-controller 262, and guides the pseudo ball FB to the selected one of the left guide section 436 and the right guide section 437.

As shown in Figures 40 and 41, the second communication passage 440, which guides the pseudo-ball FB led out from the left guide portion 436 and the right guide portion 437 of the distribution member 433 to the pair of left and right push-up devices 432, is made of an opaque material.

As shown in FIG. 40, the push-up device 432 includes a cylindrical body 441 extending vertically, a rod-shaped rotating shaft extending vertically inside the cylindrical body 441, and a helical rotating body 442 having a helical portion provided on the outer periphery of the rotating shaft and capable of rotating. A gap is formed between the inner surface of the cylindrical body 441 and the helical rotating body 442, and a protrusion portion (not shown) extending vertically is provided on the inner surface of the cylindrical body 441. The second communication passage 440 is connected to the lower end of the cylindrical body 441, and the pseudo-sphere FB that flows into the lower part of the cylindrical body 441 through the second communication passage 440 is pushed upward by the helical rotating body 442 while abutting against the inner surface of the cylindrical body 441 and the protrusion portion.

The cylinder 441 is semi-transparent from the bottom end to the vertical middle position, and the closer to the bottom end, the lower the visibility becomes. In addition, the part above the vertical middle position of the cylinder 441 is transparent, and the upper end of the cylinder 441 is located behind the decorative pattern display device 42 (see FIG. 39). There is an outlet (not shown) near the upper end of the cylinder 441, and as shown in FIGS. 40 and 42, the third communication passage 443 that guides the pseudo ball FB discharged from the outlet to the lower unit storage section 431 is made of an opaque material. In addition, although not shown, the lower unit 403 also has an end point detection switch that detects the pseudo ball FB pushed up to a height hidden behind the decorative pattern display device 42 by the push-up device 432. In the lower unit 403, the part of the lower unit storage section 431 facing the entrance of the first communication passage 434, the first communication passage 434, the distribution member 433, the second communication passage 440, the push-up device 432, the third communication passage 443, and the part of the lower unit storage section 431 facing the exit of the third communication passage 443 constitute the movable role moving area 404. In this embodiment, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403 (each performance passage member 406 for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402) constitute the first performance means and the second performance means, and the pseudo-ball performance performed there corresponds to the first performance and the second performance. In addition, one of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403 (or each performance passage member 406 for the left unit 401 and right unit 402) constitutes the A performance means, and the other constitutes the B performance means, and the display performance or pseudo-ball performance performed there corresponds to the A performance or the B performance.

In this embodiment, the pseudo ball presentation using the pseudo ball presentation device 49 is performed as part of a takeover presentation that takes over the behavior of the game ball that entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b as specific ball entry means. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 42 as a transition presentation means (display means) is capable of executing a transition presentation (pseudo ball display presentation) that derives the virtual movement mode (pseudo ball display) of the pseudo ball FB between the left unit 401, the right unit 402, and the lower unit 403. In this embodiment, the pseudo ball presentation device 49, the decorative pattern display device 42, and the sub display device 48 constitute the transition presentation means (of means D-1).

The basic pattern of the takeover performance is that when a game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b (based on detection by the start winning switch 224a, 224b as a specific ball entry detection means) when there is no pending variable display, and the takeover performance is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 44, the light emitting means built into the start winning device 33a, 33b emits light, and a display 464 (pseudo ball display) is performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 as if the game ball is being launched into the air. On the other hand, when the takeover performance is to be executed at the stage when the pending variable display is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 45, a launch device 465 is displayed in the center of the lower part of the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42, and a pending icon 461 (pseudo ball display imitating a game ball) corresponding to the variable display to be executed is set in the launch device 465, and a launching display 464 is performed.

As described above, the reserved icon 461 is configured to be able to change its display mode (color in this example), and the performance that follows the reserved icon 461 will take over the display mode of the reserved icon 461 (it may change along the way). That is, for example, when a takeover performance is performed in response to a variable display corresponding to a blue reserved icon 461, the decorative pattern display device 42 displays a display of a blue pseudo ball being launched, and the sub-display device 48 also displays a performance display in which a blue pseudo ball is derived. The LEDs built into the start winning devices 33a and 33b are also three-color LEDs, and when it is decided to perform a takeover performance at the time of the start winning, the LEDs are illuminated in the corresponding color based on a lottery or the like as to which color they will be illuminated, and the illumination mode (illumination color) is taken over in the subsequent performance (it may change along the way).

As shown in FIG. 46, the launched game ball (pseudo ball display) is caught by a character 466 displayed on the sub display device 48. There are multiple types of characters 466, and each character 466 corresponds to a success expectation degree of the handover performance. The decorative pattern display device 42 displays an explanatory display such as "If the ball thrown by the character reaches the goal, it is a win."

As shown in FIG. 47, when the character 466 displayed on the sub-display device 48 throws the pseudo ball, the multiple LEDs 467 (which have a circular shape of about the same size as the pseudo ball FB or the game ball when viewed from the front) built into one of the pair of left and right light-emitting performance parts 47a extending along the upper edge of the center frame 47 (the left light-emitting performance part 47a when the character 466 throws the pseudo ball facing left) turn on and off in sequence, shifting from the one on the sub-display device 48 side to the one on the performance passage member 406 side.

When the light emission mode of the light emission performance unit 47a reaches the performance passage member 406, as shown in FIG. 48, the pseudo-ball performance using the pseudo-ball FB by the pseudo-ball performance device 49 is started. The basic successful pattern of the pseudo-ball performance is that the pseudo-ball FB passes through the first performance passage 421 at the upper left → the second performance passage 422 at the upper right → the third performance passage 423 at the lower left → the fourth performance passage 424 at the lower right → the lower unit 403 in that order. Also, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, between each pseudo-ball performance, the performance (the entire handover performance) is connected by deriving a pseudo-ball display 468 (connection performance) that imitates the pseudo-ball FB in the decorative pattern display device 42 located between the performance passage member 406 of the left unit 401 and the performance passage member 406 of the right unit 402. Furthermore, the color of the pseudo ball FB passing through the performance passage member 406 and the color of the pseudo ball display 468 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 indicate the expected success rate of the handover performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pseudo ball FB reaches the lower unit 403 (when the pseudo ball FB is guided to a position where it can be seen in the lower unit 403), the handover performance is successful, and the occurrence of a jackpot state is indicated. In addition, the lower unit 403 performs a performance (pseudo ball performance) that indicates and suggests the type of jackpot state. For example, the color of the pseudo ball FB moving through the lower unit 403 and which of the pair of left and right push-up devices 432 of the lower unit 403 it passes through indicate the expectation of a guaranteed jackpot. After that, the character 469 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 receives the pseudo ball FB pushed up by the push-up device 432, and the mode of fitting the pseudo ball display 468 into the recess of the door to open the door is derived, and the type of jackpot is taught and suggested by the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 displayed subsequently (the decorative patterns are displayed in a corresponding combination).

The pattern of the pseudo ball performance is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a pattern in which the pseudo ball FB passes through the sub display device 48 → the second performance passage 422 in the upper right → the first performance passage 421 in the upper left → the fourth performance passage 424 in the lower right → the lower unit 403, or a pattern in which the pseudo ball FB passes through the sub display device 48 → the first performance passage 421 in the upper left → the lower unit 403, or a pattern in which the pseudo ball FB passes through the sub display device 48 → the decorative pattern display device 42 → the third performance passage 423 → the fourth performance passage 424 → the lower unit 403. It is possible to appropriately connect the pseudo ball performance and the pseudo ball performance with the pseudo ball display (connection performance) of the decorative pattern display device 42. Also, during the handover performance, the decorative pattern may be displayed (small) somewhere on the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42, or the decorative pattern may not be displayed.

In this embodiment, the guidance display means is composed of the light emitting means built into the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the decorative pattern display device 42 (which has the function of displaying the launch of a game ball or a pseudo ball display), the sub-display device 48, and the light emitting performance unit 47a. The manner in which the LED 467 built into the start winning devices 33a and 33b emits light, the display of the game ball or the reserved icon 461 (pseudo ball display) being launched in the decorative pattern display device 42, the display of the character throwing the pseudo ball in the sub-display device 48, and the light emitting manner of the light emitting performance unit 47a are guidance displays and are also attentional parts. However, since the guidance display in this embodiment is performed in a form that is easy to associate with a game ball or a pseudo ball FB, the guidance display may also be included in the handover performance. In this embodiment, the guidance display and the handover performance constitute the change-responsive performance and the period-responsive performance.

As shown in FIG. 4, general winning devices 31 are disposed along the periphery of the left side area and the lower right side area of the play area. The general winning devices 31 protrude forward from the front of the play board 30, and have a winning hole on the upper side through which game balls can always win.

The game board 30 is also fitted with a rail 50, which is made up of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 and guides the game balls launched from the launching device 60 to the top of the game board 30. As a result, the game balls launched in response to the rotation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents a game ball that has been guided from the rail 50 into the play area from returning back into the rail 50. In addition, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. A game ball that is launched with a force greater than a predetermined value will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned, for example, toward approximately the center of the game board 30.

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the top right of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 ends at the bottom right of the game board 30. Therefore, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner circumferential surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball shot out by the launching device 60 may flow back up the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51, 52 is excluded from the play area.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14, below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 (described later) to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 is formed with a foul ball passage 72 that guides game balls that fall through the gap to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball launched from the launch device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns up the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, a launched ball passage 74 is provided that connects the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63. Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the ball feeding device 63 is provided with a ball jamming detection switch 75 that can detect game balls near the entrance of the game balls to the ball feeding device 63. In other words, the ball feeding device 63 is equipped with a feed valve (not shown) that sends game balls one by one to the launch position where they are shot by the launch device 60, and if balls get stuck in the feed valve, there is a risk of ball jamming. In this embodiment, when the ball jamming detection switch 75 continues to detect game balls for a predetermined period of time or more while the handle 18 is being operated, it is configured to detect that ball jamming has occurred in the corresponding area.

In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower tray communication passage 71 is formed in the ball launch passage 74 (which may be downstream of the upper tray 19), and a first shutter (not shown) is provided to open and close the communication hole. The first shutter is always biased toward a closed position that closes the communication hole by a biasing means (not shown). Furthermore, the first shutter is configured to work in conjunction with the ball removal button 123, and to be displaced to an open position that opens the communication hole when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the lower tray 15 is formed with an outlet 15a through which game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and is provided with a second shutter 15b for opening and closing the outlet 15a. The second shutter 15b is always biased toward a closed position that closes the outlet 15a by a biasing means (not shown). Furthermore, the second shutter 15b is configured to work in conjunction with the ball removal lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and is configured to be displaced to an open position that opens the outlet 15a when the ball removal lever 25 is pressed (to the left).

In addition, the lower tray 15 is equipped with a holding means (not shown) capable of holding the second shutter 15b in the open position, so that the ejection port 15a can be held in the open position even if the player does not continue to press the ball removal lever 25. The holding means can be configured, for example, so that the ball removal lever 25 is fully pressed toward the open position to engage with a predetermined portion of the ball removal lever 25 and the second shutter 15b, and the ball removal lever 25 is then fully pressed toward the open position again from this engaged state to release the engaged state.

3 and 4, the reference numeral 67 denotes a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and is divided into a passage leading to the upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by the biasing force of a spring or the like, so as to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end of the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71. The inlets (ball inlet portions) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and when the front frame set 14 is closed, the inlets and the payout passage 67 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance, allowing the game balls to pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray connecting passage 73 become full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out flow into the lower tray connecting passage 71 (overflowing into the entrance side of the lower tray connecting passage 71) and are paid out through the lower tray connecting passage 71 to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray connecting passage 71. The presence of the full detection switch makes it possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and game balls are stuck in the lower tray connecting passage 71). In this embodiment, based on the full detection switch continuously detecting game balls for a predetermined period of time, an error notification is controlled to inform the player that the lower tray 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative pattern display device 42. When the retention of game balls in the lower tray connecting passage 71 is resolved and game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are not detected continuously for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is released.

Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. On the rear of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some parts overlapping front to back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) that supplies game balls, a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. The payout mechanism and protective cover are integrated into one unit, and since the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as the back pack, this unit will be referred to here as the "back pack unit 203".

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, and protrudes rearward. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 42, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 that face forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are detachably attached in a stacked state from front to back on the rear side of the frame cover 213. The sub-display device 48 is embedded in the upper center of the center frame 47 and is provided so as to be exposed forward. The light-emitting performance section 47a provided on both sides of the sub-display device 48 may be formed by the upper part of the center frame 47, or may be formed as a separate body from the center frame 47 and attached to the center frame 47.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is accommodated in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. The display control device 45 is accommodated in a board box 45a and is fixed to the rear side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in a board box 262a and is fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). An LED control board that drives LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 (light-emitting performance unit 47a, etc.) is disposed inside the frame cover 213. The storage box 42a and board boxes 45a, 262a are made of a transparent resin material, etc., and the insides are visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning device 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won in the various winning ports. The game balls recovered by this ball recovery mechanism are guided to the discharge passage section 217 described below, and are discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215 and can be opened to the rear.

The main control device 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 comprises a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a specified trace is left behind. This makes it easy to discover whether the board box 263 has been tampered with.

The game board 30 is also provided with ball entry detection switches that detect game balls that have entered various winning ports, such as the general winning device 31, in correspondence with the various winning ports. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and a count switch 223 is provided at the variable winning device 32. A first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b are provided at the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, respectively. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown in the figure, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221, etc., and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. In contrast, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are input into the main control device 261. The main control device 261 then transmits a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status at each time to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the output signal from the payout control device 311 (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, the back surface of the game board 30 is provided with a large prize opening solenoid that opens the large prize opening of the variable prize device 32, and a solenoid that opens and closes the blade member 37 of the second start prize device 33b. Furthermore, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward around an opening/closing axis that extends vertically. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left side (upper right side in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is provided with multiple external connection terminals for relaying various information transmissions to the hall computer of the gaming hall, etc., and is not labeled for convenience. For example, terminals are provided for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, guaranteed bonus mode, etc.), terminals for outputting information regarding the opening of the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91, 92 described below, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball in the tank error, and payout error, and terminals for outputting information regarding the number of winning balls paid out from the payout control device 311.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to also cover the top and right portions (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered.

The payout mechanism 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, above the protective cover 354, a tank 355 is provided with an opening on the top side, and the tank 355 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are then supplied to the upper tray 19, etc.

The dispensing mechanism unit 352 is also provided with a dispensing relay board 381 that relays dispensing command signals from the dispensing control device 311 to the dispensing device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. The power switch board 382 is supplied with main power, for example, 24 V AC, via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (base box 263), a lower frame set 251 is provided, which is supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened to the rear. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow, and a discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed at the most downstream part of the discharge passage section 217. In other words, the game balls that have won in each winning port of the general winning device 31, etc. are collected through the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any winning port are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 may also be formed integrally.

As shown in FIG. 5, the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked manner on the back side of the lower frame set 251. The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

The dispensing control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and is fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 housing the main control device 261 described above, so that evidence that the board box 311a has been opened remains.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in board box 314a and fixed to the back side of board box 313a (power supply and launch control device 310). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside can be seen.

The payout control device 311 is also provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the base box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returning to the normal state).

The power supply circuit 313 is further provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the circuit board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when power is restored after the power outage, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. Therefore, since the state before the power outage is stored and retained when the power is turned off in the normal manner (for example, when the game hall closes), if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323.

As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. The inner frame 12 can be unlocked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it in one direction, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 has an extended wall 83 formed thereon that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). This makes it difficult to insert a wire or the like from the rear side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defensive performance. Furthermore, the extended wall 83 is configured to cover the right end (the left end in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and when the inner frame 12 is in a closed state, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (to the right of the launching device 60), and as shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right side of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can be inserted and removed from the switch main body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward, and the inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces backward. When the detection unit is in a state where it protrudes from the switch main body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is inserted into the switch main body, it outputs an OFF signal to the main control device 261. In other words, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14, turning it to the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the detection part of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing part 86 integrally formed with the receiving part 85 of the outer frame 11, turning it to the OFF state, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and turns it to the ON state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Figure 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261, which serves as the main control means and lottery means, is equipped with a CPU 501, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 contains a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 502 are executed, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, and each function may be integrated into a chip.

RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of CPU 501 and the return addresses of control programs executed by CPU 501 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, working area, and backup area 503a is backed up.

The backup area 503a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off (including the time of power off; the same applies below) so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was off when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on (including the time when the power is turned on after the power is cleared; the same applies below). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 (described later) when the power is turned off due to a power outage or the like, and power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed when a power outage occurs.

Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the working area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus, a data bus, etc. The input/output port 505 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a, 43b, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43a, 43b, and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

For convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input/output port 505 is connected to various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, the start winning switch 224a, 224b, the through gate switch 225, various boards such as the power supply/launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, the sub-control device 262, and various electrical components such as the reserve display devices 46a, 46b, the normal reserve display device 44, the solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and the motor for opening and closing the second start winning device 33b (wing member 37). In other words, the main control device 261 is provided with multiple terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means comprises a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, a RAM 553 which is a memory which temporarily stores various data etc. when the control programs stored in the ROM 552 are executed, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and also various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory which temporarily stores work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 551.

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 via the bus line 555, and is also connected to the display control device 45. In addition, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the light-emitting performance unit 47a, the performance button 125, the cross button 126, the light-emitting means built into the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the circular illumination unit 102, and the error display lamp 104, etc.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (e.g., a variation pattern command) sent from the main control device 261, for example, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43a, 43b controlled by the main control device 261 are configured to inform the player that a jackpot has been won, and the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays a variation of the decorative pattern as a performance display in accordance with the variation of the special pattern on the special display devices 43a, 43b. Furthermore, the display control device 45 of this embodiment is configured to also execute display control of the sub-display device 48. In this embodiment, the display control device 45, along with the sub-control device 262, is also included in the sub-control means.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is a calculation device, is equipped with a ROM 512 that stores the control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the CPU 511 are stored, a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored, and a backup area 513a.

RAM 513 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313, and all data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a is backed up. Note that as long as data stored in at least the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a may be backed up, and data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a is an area for storing values such as the stack pointer, each register, and I/O at the time of power off, so that when the power is turned back on in the event that the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to this backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is performed by the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, like the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SK1 is input to the CPU 511, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The working area is provided with a payout permission flag that sets permission for the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag that is set when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received, and a command buffer in which commands sent from the main control device 261 are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out prize balls; a specific command to permit the payout of prize balls is sent from the main control unit 261, and the flag is turned on when the specific command is received, and turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state before the power was cut off is restored. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initial process of the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a payout return command that is sent when power is restored to the main control unit 261.

The command reception flag is a flag that checks whether the dispensing control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Like the dispensing permission flag, it is turned off when the initial setting process is performed or the state is restored to before the power was cut off, and is also turned off when the received command is judged by the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored in a regular pattern from the beginning to the end of the memory area. When commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the command is updated by returning to the beginning of the memory area. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

The CPU 511, which incorporates the ROM 512 and RAM 513, is connected to an input/output port 515 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control unit 261, the power supply/launch control unit 310 (launch control circuit 312), the payout device 358, the CR unit connection board 314, and the like. In this embodiment, the ball jam detection switch 75 for detecting ball jams in the ball feeding device 63 is also connected to the input/output port 515 of the payout control device 311.

The CR unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit (lending switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, the CR unit control device of the CR unit (card reader unit, ball lending unit) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall, etc., and the payout control device 311. Although the lending switch 121, return switch 122, and balance display unit 124 are mounted on the pachinko machine 10, they are essentially included in the CR unit because they are components related to the operation of lending game balls by the CR unit. Also, although the CR unit connection board 314 is mounted on the pachinko machine 10, they are essentially included in the CR unit because they electrically connect between the CR unit control device and the lending switch 121, return switch 122, and balance display unit 124, and between the CR unit control device and the payout control device 311.

When information regarding the player's ball lending operation using the ball lending operation unit or a button on the main body of the CR unit is input to the CR unit control device, and the game value balance is stored on a card, which is a recording medium (game value medium) inserted in the CR unit, the balance on the card is subtracted and a signal requesting the lending of a number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to a card type, and may be a coin type or stick type.

The CR unit is equipped with a money reader capable of reading the amount inserted into the cash slot, and a card control unit capable of reading the balance stored on the card inserted into the card insertion slot. In addition, the unit is equipped with a card available lamp (which flashes when an error occurs) indicating that the CR unit is available for use, a card inserted lamp indicating that a card is inserted, a card balance display showing the card balance, and a loan switch LED indicating that game balls are available for loan.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CR unit outputs a loan request signal to the pachinko machine 10, and the function of the pachinko machine 10 to pay out game balls is used to loan game balls to the player (to the upper tray 19, etc.); however, for example, the CR unit may be configured to have a function capable of paying out game balls, and when the loan switch 121 is operated, game balls may be loaned to the upper tray 19 through a guide tube extending from the CR unit.

The payout control device 311 is also configured to periodically (e.g., every 2 msec) output a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310.

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of game balls by the launch device 60. The handle 18, the payout control device 311, and the main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the handle 18 a dial position signal from a variable resistor indicating the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation control body 18a), a touch signal from a touch sensor indicating that the player is touching the handle 18, and a launch switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. The launch control circuit 312 is also configured to be able to input from the payout control device 311 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

Then, the launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch status signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, launch switch signal, and CR unit connection signal are input, and the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal and a ball feed signal to the launch control circuit 312 on condition that the launch status signal is input. When the launch status signal is input, the main control device 261 outputs a launch permission signal at 0.6 second intervals.

The launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball delivery device 63 and deliver the game ball to the launch position when a ball delivery signal is input. The ball delivery device 63 may be provided with a preparation ball detection sensor capable of detecting whether or not a game ball is present at the launch position, and the ball delivery device 63 may be configured not to drive (not to deliver the game ball to the launch position even if a ball delivery signal is received) when the preparation ball detection sensor detects that a game ball is already present at the launch position.

Furthermore, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on the condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and a launch permission signal are input. This causes the game ball set in the launch position to be shot out by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

The power supply circuit 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruptions due to power outages, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control unit 261, the dispensing control unit 311, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in 24V AC power supplied from an external source, generates a +12V power supply to drive various switches and motors, a +5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supplies to the main control unit 261, the dispensing control unit 311, etc. Note that operating power is supplied to the various switches, motors, etc. via the control devices to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SK1 to the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing).

The power supply unit 541 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the power outage processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 261 and the dispensing control unit 311 can execute and complete the power outage processing normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM clear switch 323 and clears the backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 depending on the state of the switch 323. When the RAM clear switch 323 is pressed, the RAM clear switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM clear signal SK2 to the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 323 pressed (including powering on after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAMs 503, 513 of the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311 are cleared.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 according to instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. The input port 527 is connected to an input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262. The input port 527 is also connected to the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 via the bus line 530. The VDP 526 is also connected to an output port 529 via the bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command sent from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 (generates internal commands for the VDP 526) by analyzing the received command or performing a predetermined calculation process based on the received command. This controls the display in the decorative pattern display device 42.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on decorative pattern display device 42, and the display content of decorative pattern display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524. Character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as patterns to be displayed on decorative pattern display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the decorative pattern display device 42. The VDP 526 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of the CPU 521, video RAM 524, etc., and mediates the reading and writing of data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a specified timing and displays it on the decorative pattern display device 42.

In this embodiment, a sub-display device 48 consisting of a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529. The display control device 45 also derives a performance display for the sub-display device 48 based on instructions from the sub-control device 262.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during a game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win/loss random number counter C1 as a win/loss random number generating means used for a win/loss lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot state is generated, a type determination counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot (type lottery), a variable selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative pattern display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the win/loss random number counter C1, a first variable type counter CS1 and a second variable type counter CS2 used for determining the variable display time of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative pattern display device 42), and a normal pattern random number counter C4 used for a ball entry support lottery to determine whether or not the second start winning device 33b is opened are used. The variation selection counter C3 is also used to select the reach pattern when the decorative pattern display device 42 is changed. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used to select the variation pattern (performance pattern selection) of the decorative pattern display device 42.

Counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters that add 1 to the previous value each time they are updated, and return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

RAM 503 is provided with a special variable reserve area as a reserve storage means in which the values of the win/lose random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variable selection counter C3 are stored, and a normal variable reserve area in which the value of the normal pattern random number counter C4 is stored. The normal variable reserve area has four reserve areas (reserve areas 1 to 4) and one execution area. In each reserve area of the normal variable reserve area, the values of the normal pattern random number counter C4 are stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball through the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 up to four times.

The special variable reserve area also includes a first special variable reserve area and a second special variable storage area, each of which has four reserve areas (reservation 1 to reserve 4), and one execution area. In each reserve area of the first special variable reserve area, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variable selection counter C3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history of the game balls in the first start winning device 33a. In each reserve area of the second special variable reserve area, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variable selection counter C3 are stored in chronological order according to the winning history of the game balls in the second start winning device 33b. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve the variable display (first variable display and second variable display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b up to four times each.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 637, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (i.e. 637), it returns to the lower limit value of 0 as the opening value. Normally, when the win/no-win random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the win/no-win random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the win/no-win random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 637), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of normal processing. Meanwhile, the win/no-win random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/no-win random number counter C1 is stored in the win/no-win random number counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the win/loss random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of values of the hit/miss random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state (normal mode, time-saving mode) is two, the value being "7, 307", and the number of values of the hit/miss random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a high probability state (high probability mode) is 20, the value being "7-11, 307-311". In this embodiment, ROM 502 is provided with two hit/miss determination tables as winning value storage means that are referenced when determining whether the value of the hit/miss random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot, a first hit/miss determination table that stores "7, 307" as a jackpot value, and a second hit/miss determination table that stores "8-11, 308-311" as a jackpot value.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and to return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 19). In addition, the ROM 502 is provided with two type determination tables that are referenced when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. There is a first type determination table that is referenced when a jackpot corresponding to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and a second type determination table that is referenced when a jackpot corresponding to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. When a jackpot is won in the win/lose lottery, the type of jackpot state to be granted is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (a type lottery is held), and the determined type of jackpot state is granted. Note that the allocation of jackpot types may be the same for jackpots corresponding to balls entering either the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, and one type determination table may be used.

The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variable reserve area of the RAM 503.

The variable selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 238). In this embodiment, the variable selection counter C3 is configured to select one of three possibilities: a "reach before or after miss" in which the final stopping pattern stops just one space before or after the reaching pattern after a reaching state occurs for the decorative pattern; a "reach other than a miss before or after" in which the final stopping pattern stops other than before or after the reaching pattern after the reaching state occurs; and a "complete miss" in which no reaching state occurs. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 has one reach judgment table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter C3 and the reach pattern, but for example, a first reach judgment table that is referenced when determining a reach pattern (when a jackpot does not occur) based on the value of the variable selection counter C3 obtained as a result of a game ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and a second reach judgment table that is referenced when determining a reach pattern (when a jackpot does not occur) based on the value of the variable selection counter C3 obtained as a result of a game ball entering the second start winning device 33b may be provided. Furthermore, for example, the first reach judgment table may be referenced in a low ball entry state, and the second reach judgment table may be referenced in a high ball entry state, or the first reach judgment table may be referenced in a normal mode, the second reach judgment table may be referenced in a time-saving mode, and the third reach judgment table may be referenced in a probability mode.

The variable selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt), and the value of the variable selection counter C3 is stored in the variable selection counter buffer. Then, when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the variable selection counter C3 stored in the variable selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area of RAM 503.

Furthermore, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 255, and to return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 255), while the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 31, and to return to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 31). In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with the rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the decorative pattern display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach), and once the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the decorative pattern display device 42 is also determined (a fluctuation pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 that fits just within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is selected).

The counters used to determine the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern are not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate for each model. For example, it is possible to determine the reach pattern of the decorative pattern using only the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, the table that determines the reach pattern is not particularly limited, and the number, association with the game state, content, etc. are set as appropriate for each model.

The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and are repeatedly updated during the remaining time of the normal processing. The buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 42.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed as desired. However, it is desirable to use different prime numbers for the sizes of the win/lose random number counter C1, type determination counter C2, variation selection counter C3, and variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and to use numbers that are not synchronized under any circumstances.

The normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 232, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 232). The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random numbers that are winning in a low ball entry state is 1, and the range is "1". On the other hand, the number of random numbers that are winning in a high ball entry state is 232, and the range is "1 to 232". In other words, in this embodiment, a low ball entry support judgment table that is referenced in the entry support lottery in a low ball entry state and a high ball entry support judgment table that is referenced in the entry support lottery in a high ball entry state are prepared in the ROM 502. Then, when a winning value is obtained from the normal symbol random number counter C4, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display for a predetermined period of time (after the normal symbol lamps that make up the normal symbol display device 41 flash alternately), and then displays a static display in a manner (combination of lights) that corresponds to a win, and the second start-up winning device 33b opens in a pattern that corresponds to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processes of the CPU 501 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For ease of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, followed by the main processing.

Figure 11 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, a process for reading the various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of the various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control unit 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds directly to the next process.

When there is detection information from various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is incremented. In addition, in the external output process of the normal processing described below, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are awarded (game balls are paid out) based on the prize ball command. Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step S303, a random number update process is executed. Specifically, the win/lose random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variable selection counter C3, and the normal pattern random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, a start winning process is executed in response to a win in the start winning device 33, and in step S305, a through gate passing process is executed in response to the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34. In the following step S306, a launch permission command setting process is executed to perform processes such as sending a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310. After that, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process of step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 13. The RAM 503 is provided with a first pending counter Na that counts the number of pending first variable displays triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a second pending counter Nb that counts the number of pending second variable displays triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b. A total pending counter may also be provided that counts the total number of pending variable displays (the total number of pending first variable displays and the number of pending second variable displays).

In addition, the execution area of the special variable pending area and each pending area are provided with a win/lose random number memory area that stores the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 as win/lose related information, a win type random number memory area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, and a reach random number memory area that stores the value of the variable selection counter C3.

Furthermore, the execution area of the special change pending area is provided with a change memory area in which information is stored indicating whether the first change display is based on a ball entering the first start winning device 33a or the second change display is based on a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, "information indicating the first change display is stored in the change memory area" is also referred to as "the first change flag is set on," and "information indicating the second change display is stored in the change memory area" is also referred to as "the second change flag is set on."

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If a positive determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second pending counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, where the second pending counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the next step S504, an additive display process is performed on the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the second variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are off, the left second hold lamp is turned on, if the left second hold lamp is on and the right second hold lamp is off, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, if both the left and right second hold lamps are on, the left second hold lamp is made to blink while the right second hold lamp is kept on, and if the left second hold lamp is blinking and the right second hold lamp is on, a process is performed to make both the left and right second hold lamps blink.

After step S504, in step S505, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variable selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above (the values stored in the win/lose random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variable selection counter buffer) are stored in the first empty reserved area of the second special variable reserved area (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, reach random number memory area). After step S505, proceed to step S506.

In step S506, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area corresponds to a big win or a small win. The details of the win/loss determination process will be described later.

In the next step S507, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reserve area. The type determination process will be described in detail later.

In the next step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit/miss random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach at the time of a miss variation based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reserve area. The reach determination process will be described in detail later.

Here, the details of the pass/fail determination process in step S506 are explained with reference to FIG. 14.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area matches either of the values "7" or "307" stored in the first win/lose determination table. Incidentally, "7" and "307" are values that result in a jackpot in both low and high probability states.

Note that for the sake of convenience, FIG. 14 shows the processing of step S5101 in a simplified manner, but in reality, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 is "7" or not, and if the result of this determination is negative, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 is "307" or not. If either of these determinations is positive, a positive determination is made in step S5101, and if both determinations are negative, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

If the result of step S5101 is positive, the first win/loss flag is turned on in step S5102, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S5101 is negative, the process determines in step S5103 whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area is one of the values stored in the second win/loss determination table, "8 to 11, 308 to 311." Incidentally, "8 to 11, 308 to 311" are values that result in a jackpot only in a high probability state (high probability mode). Note that even during this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to a jackpot, as described above.

If the result of step S5103 is positive, the second win/lose flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S5103 is negative, that is, if the result is a "lose" even in a high probability state, then in step S5105, it is determined whether the newly stored variable information is in the second special variable pending area (corresponding to the second variable display). If the result of step S5105 is positive, then in step S5106, it is determined whether the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches the value "101 to 210" stored in the small win determination table.

If the result of step S5106 is positive, the small win flag is turned on in step S5107, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S5106 is negative, the process is terminated. In this embodiment, the first win/loss flag, the second win/loss flag, and the small win flag are configured to be turned on by overwriting information corresponding to the first win/loss flag, the second win/loss flag, and the small win flag in the win/loss random number storage area of the corresponding reserved area of the special variable reserved area.

If the result of step S5105 is negative, the process is terminated. In other words, the lottery for winning or losing based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a is configured so that there is no possibility of winning a small prize. The lottery for winning or losing based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a may also be configured so that there is a possibility of winning a small prize (with a lower probability than the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery for winning or losing based on the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b).

Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b). First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second win/loss flag was set to on in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (i.e., there is no possibility of a jackpot occurring), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5301 is positive (there is a possibility of a big win state occurring), then in step S5302, the second type determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reserve area matches the value "14-19" corresponding to "10RS". If the result of step S5302 is positive, then in step S5303, the 10RS flag is turned on and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5302 is negative, then in step S5304, the second type determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches the value "8 to 13" corresponding to "4RS". If the result of step S5304 is positive, then in step S5305 the 4RS flag is turned on and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5304 is negative, the 10RN flag is turned on in step S5306, and then the process is terminated. In this embodiment, the 10RS flag, 4RS flag, and 10RN flag are configured to be turned on by overwriting the information corresponding to the first win/lose flag, second win/lose flag, and small win flag in the winning type random number storage area of the corresponding reserved area of the special variable reserved area.

Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. 16. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first hit/miss flag was set in the hit/miss determination process performed immediately before. If the determination is affirmative in step S5401, that is, if a jackpot occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state (if a jackpot state always occurs), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5401 is negative, i.e., if a jackpot state will not occur (there is a possibility of a miss) at least in the low probability state, then in step S5402, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches either the value "0" or "1" corresponding to a "front or rear miss reach." If the result of step S5402 is positive, then in step S5403, the front or rear flag indicating the occurrence of a front or rear miss reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5402 is negative, then in step S5404, the reach determination table is referred to and it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation pending area matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to a "reach other than a miss before or after". If the result of step S5404 is positive, then in step S5405, the non-front or back flag is turned on, and the process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step S5404 is negative, i.e., if the variable display ends without going through a reach state and it is a "complete miss," the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a starting command setting process is performed. The starting command includes variable information (information used to determine the content of the variable display) indicating the results of the win/lose determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process, as well as information indicating whether the variable information was triggered by the ball entering the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

After the processing of step S509, or if a negative judgment is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S510, it is judged whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If a negative judgment is made in step S510, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made, in step S511, it is judged whether or not the value of the first pending counter Na, which counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative judgment is made in step S511, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S511, the processing proceeds to step S512, where the first pending counter Na is incremented by one.

In the next step S513, an additive display process is performed on the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase of the hold number in the first variable display by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are off, the left first hold lamp is turned on, if the left first hold lamp is on and the right first hold lamp is off, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, if both the left and right first hold lamps are on, the left first hold lamp is made to blink while the right first hold lamp is kept on, and if the left first hold lamp is blinking and the right first hold lamp is on, a process is performed to make both the left and right first hold lamps blink.

After step S513, in step S514, the values of the win/lose random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variable selection counter C3 are stored in the empty reserved areas (win/lose random number memory area, win type random number memory area, and reach random number memory area) of the first special variable reserved area. After step S514, the process proceeds to step S515.

In step S515, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable reserve area corresponds to a jackpot. The details of the win/loss determination process are described above.

In the following step S516, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, a first type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reserve area.

Here, the first type determination process in step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second win/loss flag was set to ON in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (i.e., there is no possibility of a jackpot occurring), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5201 is positive (there is a possibility of a big win state occurring), then in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to and it is determined whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reserve area matches the value "19" corresponding to "10RS". If the result of step S5202 is positive, then in step S5203 the 10RS flag is turned on and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S5202 is negative, then in step S5204, the type determination table is consulted to determine whether the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable pending area matches the value "8 to 18" corresponding to "4RS." If the result of step S5204 is positive, then in step S5205, the 4RS flag is turned on, and the process is terminated.

If the result of step S5204 is negative, the 10RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and the process is terminated. In this embodiment, the rate at which the high probability state is granted is the same regardless of whether the jackpot state is won by a ball entering the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. However, when the jackpot state is won by a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, the rate at which the "10RS" is won is 5%, and the rate at which the "4RS" is won is 55% (the rate at which the "10RN" is won is 40%), whereas when the jackpot state is won by a ball entering the second start winning device 33b, the rate at which the "10RS" is won is 30%, and the rate at which the "4RS" is won is 30% (the rate at which the "10RN" is won is 40%).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the variable selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variable reserve area. The details of the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) are described above.

After step S517, in step S518, the starting command is set and the process is terminated. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 and the like are directly stored in the special variable reserve area, and then the win/lose determination process, type determination process, and reach determination process are executed, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a temporary storage area may be provided to temporarily store the counter values when the win/lose random number counter C1 and the like are acquired, and the information stored in the temporary storage area may be stored in the reserve area of the corresponding special variable reserve area after the win/lose determination process, type determination process, and reach determination process are executed.

The process of extracting the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes the discrimination value extraction process, and the process of storing the extracted win/loss random number counter C1 value in the special variable reserve area in steps S505 and S514 constitutes the discrimination value storage process, and the function of performing this process corresponds to the win/loss related information acquisition means. Furthermore, the function of extracting and storing the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 constitutes the information acquisition means. Also, the process of determining whether the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S515 (steps S5101 and S5103) is a value corresponding to a win constitutes the first win/loss discrimination process, and the process of storing the discrimination result (setting the corresponding flag) in steps S5102 and S5104 constitutes the result storage process.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17. In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc, which counts the number of reserved variable displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the answer is NO, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is < 4, then the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal hold counter Nc is incremented by 1.

In the next step S604, an addition display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) corresponding to the increase of the hold number of the variable display on the normal pattern display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps 406 are off, the left normal hold lamp 406 is turned on, if the left normal hold lamp 406 is on and the right normal hold lamp 406 is off, both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned on, if both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are on, the left normal hold lamp 406 is made to blink while the right normal hold lamp 406 is kept on, and if the left normal hold lamp 406 is blinking and the right normal hold lamp 406 is on, both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are made to blink.

After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to the win or loss is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process in step S303 above is stored in the first free memory area of the normal variable pending area of RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is terminated.

Next, the launch permission command setting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. 18.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag, which indicates that a firing status signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312, is set to on. The firing status signal is sent from the firing control circuit 312 to the main control unit 261 when the firing control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a firing switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311.

If the answer is YES in step S701, then in step S702, it is determined whether or not a launch state signal has been received. If the answer is NO in step S702, then in step S703, the launch permission flag is turned off and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S702, then in step S704, it is determined whether the value of the launch timer used to measure the interval between launches of the game ball is "0". If the answer is NO in step S704, then in step S707, the value of the launch timer is decremented by 1, and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S704, then in step S705, the main control unit 261 sends a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312. In the following step S706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step S706, this process ends.

If the result of step S701 is negative, then in step S708 it is determined whether or not a launch state signal has been received. If the result of step S708 is negative, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S708 is positive, then in step S709 the launch permission flag is set to ON.

In the next step S710, a ball feed signal is sent to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step S711, the launch timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. This ensures that the game ball is set securely at the launch position by the ball feed device 63 before being shot out by the launch device 60, and while the main control device 261 continues to receive a launch state signal from the launch control circuit 312, a launch permission signal is sent from the main control device 261 at 0.6 second intervals, causing the game ball to be launched by the launch device 60 at 0.6 second intervals. After step S711, this process ends.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a launch permission signal from the main control device 261, it determines whether or not it has received all of the touch signal, launch switch signal, and CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the payout control device 311, and if a positive determination is made, it drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) and performs a launch process to launch the game ball. The launch control circuit 312 adjusts and controls the launch device 60 with respect to the launch strength (launch speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. This allows the game ball to be shot out by the launch device 60 with the adjusted strength.

When the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main control device 261, it checks the preparation ball detection sensor that detects whether a game ball is set at the launch position on the launch rail 61 where the game ball will be launched by the launch device 60, and if it is confirmed that a game ball is not set at the launch position, it drives the ball feed device 63 and performs a ball feed process to set the game ball at the launch position.

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main control device 261 at the time of the power outage to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. The CPU 501 then suspends the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power outage occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the power outage occurrence information setting, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311, and this NMI interrupt causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12. The contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 9. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-controllers (sub-controller 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Then, data backup processing is performed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power circuit 313 of the power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the process proceeds to the next step S104 to determine whether power outage information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112. If power outage information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the next step S106, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, that is, the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case too, proceed to step S112.

In the processing of step S112, an initialization command is sent to initialize the sub-control device 262 and the dispensing control device 311, etc. Then, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a specified area of RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process proceeds to RAM 503 initialization processing (step S113, etc.). That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), the process at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed on the condition that the power outage occurrence information has been set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power outage is restored, and in step S108, the power outage occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command is sent to restore the sub-control device to the gaming state it was in when the power was turned off. In step S110, the usage registers are restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set and the process moves to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 10. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, external output processing is performed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the start winning device 33, etc., updated in the previous normal processing, and to transmit output data such as commands to each control device on the sub side.

For example, when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays a changing decorative pattern, a change pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are sent to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the change pattern command and the pattern command are commands that are output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43a, 43b. In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the change pattern command, the pattern command, etc. determines the change mode (change time, performance mode, etc.) of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on such various commands, and issues an instruction to the display control device 45 to display (change display) the change mode on the decorative pattern display device 42.

The variation pattern command includes information that specifies the variation type of the decorative pattern, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Meanwhile, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative patterns in a table. Then, based on the variation pattern command, the sub-control device 262 determines the presentation pattern of the variation display, and controls the display control device 45, sound, etc.

Here, we will explain the types of decorative pattern changes. A "normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the change in the decorative pattern. In the sure-win mode and time-saving mode, the time of the change display is shortened compared to the normal mode, even when various reaches are reached. For example, the time of the change display from which a normal reach is derived (change time) is "12 seconds" or "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "9 seconds" or "12 seconds" in the sure-win mode and time-saving mode. In the normal mode, the first change display that starts with four first change displays pending is also temporarily in a time-saving state, and if it is a normal reach, the change time of the first change display is set to "9 seconds" or "12 seconds".

"Super Reach" is a reach pattern in which, in addition to the decorative pattern, characters and the like are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 during the decorative pattern change display (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player. In this embodiment, the change time of the change display from which a Super Reach is derived is "13 seconds," "16 seconds," "20 seconds," "25 seconds," or "30 seconds" in normal mode, and "13 seconds," "16 seconds," "20 seconds," "22 seconds," "25 seconds," "27 seconds," or "30 seconds" in high probability mode and time-saving mode. Note that the change time of the change display when a Super Reach occurs may be configured to be a common change time in all game modes.

"Premium Reach" is a presentation mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and is performed in a manner in which characters and the like of a different pattern from the Super Reach are displayed in addition to the decorative patterns while the decorative patterns are changing (after the reach state is established), which is a reach pattern that creates a sense of anticipation in the player. In this embodiment, the changing display that leads to the Premium Reach has a longer changing time than the changing display that leads to the Super Reach, and is the same length (for example, 60 seconds) in both high and low ball entry states.

In addition, the time it takes for the display to change to a "complete miss" state, which does not result in any of the reach states, is set to "10 seconds" in normal mode, and "6 seconds" in special mode and time-saving mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a "small win" is won, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of chance symbols. In this example, a variable display is performed in which "3", "4", and "1" are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As described above, a "small win" can only be won if the player wins the win/lose lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, and the variable display in which "3", "4", and "1" are displayed in a variable display for a period of "6 seconds" regardless of the game mode.

The sub-controller 262 also determines the stopping patterns (combinations of stopping patterns) based on the pattern command, and displays the corresponding stopping patterns after the variation time has elapsed. The pattern command is a command that causes the sub-controller 262 to determine the stopping patterns, and specifies six categories: combinations of sure-variant jackpot patterns, combinations of normal jackpot patterns, combinations of chance patterns, combinations of patterns that are either missing before or after, combinations of patterns that are not missing before or after, and combinations of patterns that are complete misses. Meanwhile, the sub-controller 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stopping patterns in a table. The sub-controller 262 then stops and displays the combinations of patterns that correspond to the pattern commands.

When a jackpot is won (either "10RS", "4RS", or "10RN"), the decorative pattern display device 42 displays decorative patterns with numbers in a combination that is a repeat number. In this embodiment, in the case of a "probable jackpot (either "10RS" or "4RS")", the variable display is displayed as either a "probable jackpot pattern" which is a decorative pattern combination of the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, or 9", or a "normal jackpot pattern" which is a decorative pattern combination of the even numbers "2, 4, 6, or 8", and in the case of a "normal jackpot ("10RN")", the variable display is displayed as a "normal jackpot pattern" combination.

When the sub-control device 262 receives a symbol command for a special jackpot, it determines one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the repeated numbers "1 to 9" as the symbol to be stopped, and when it receives a symbol command for a normal jackpot, it determines one of the combinations of symbols consisting of the repeated numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" as the symbol to be stopped.

In addition, when a small jackpot is won, the combination of chance symbols consisting of "3", "4", and "1" from the top is displayed stationary on the decorative symbol display device 42. In this embodiment, there is one type of chance symbol combination. Note that the pattern and number of types of chance symbol combinations are not particularly limited, and multiple types may be provided.

The combination of front and rear miss patterns corresponds to a "reach before and after" where the final stopping pattern stops just one pattern before or after the reach pattern after the reach state occurs. The combination of patterns other than front and rear misses corresponds to a "reach other than front and rear miss" where the final stopping pattern stops other than before or after the reach pattern after the reach occurs. The combination of complete miss patterns corresponds to a "complete miss" where no reach even occurs. In this embodiment, if a combination of front and rear miss patterns, a combination of patterns other than front and rear misses, or a combination of complete miss patterns is displayed stopped on the decorative pattern display device 42, it is a "miss".

The display on the decorative pattern display device 42 is for presentation purposes and can be changed as appropriate for each model. In other words, for example, during a probability change mode or time-saving mode, the pattern display area may be divided into left, middle, and right instead of top, middle, and bottom, or three pattern display areas may be displayed in the right half of the decorative pattern display device 42 or in a very small area in the upper left.

When the sub-controller 262 receives these losing symbol commands, it determines the combination of symbols stored in the corresponding counter buffer of the RAM 553 as the stopping symbol, as will be described in more detail later. In this embodiment, three symbols are provided as losing symbol commands, but this is not limiting, and for example, there may be only one type of losing symbol command, and the sub-controller 262 may determine the combination of decorative symbols.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

In the next step S203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the first and second special display devices 43a, 43b, and a jackpot is determined, and variable display settings are made on the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a variable prize-winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the variable prize-winning device 32. The details of the variable prize-winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, normal display control processing is executed. In this processing, control is performed regarding the normal pattern display device 41. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step S208, the start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control is performed on the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37). The details of this start winning device control process will be described later.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information has been set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power failure occurrence information has not been set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has passed since the start of the previous normal process. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the timing of the next normal processing execution (steps S211 and S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (637 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

In addition, in step S212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0. The changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 503.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S209 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next normal process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the win/lose random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

If power outage information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S213 onwards is carried out as power outage processing when the power is out. The power outage processing first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S214, and stores the value of the stack pointer in the backup area 503a in step S215.

After that, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (such as the dispensing control device 311). Then, in step S217, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of the RAM 503. After that, in step S218, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

The processing of step S209 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to changes in the game state performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of processing in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle, and storage can be facilitated. In addition, when returning to the state before the power interruption, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so recovery can be easily performed, and the processing burden on the main control device 261 can be reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data at the time of the power interruption from being changed, and the state before the power interruption can be reliably stored.

Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19. First, in step S801, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval set after the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the variable interval, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then this process is terminated. In other words, for example, if the variable interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if step S802 is configured to be performed before step S801), in this process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the variable interval timer every 4 msec, and after 1 second it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the result of step S801 is positive, i.e., if the interval is not a variable interval, then in step S803, the system refers to the win status storage area, which will be described in detail later, and determines whether the current state is other than a big win or a small win.

During the jackpot state, there is an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is frozen on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened, a round period during which the variable winning device 32 is in an open state, an interval period during which the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b can start.

During the small win state, there is an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small win is displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened, a round period during which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and an ending period until the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b can start. Note that the number of rounds in the small win state may be multiple, in which case there will be an interval period even during the small win state.

In this embodiment, the hit status memory area stores "0" when in a state other than a big hit state or a small hit state, and when in a big hit state or a small hit state, stores "1" during the opening period and interval period, "2" during the round period, and "3" during the ending period. In other words, in this step S803, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the hit status memory area to determine whether the state is a big hit state or a small hit state.

If the result of step S803 is negative, that is, if the player is in a big win or small win state, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of step S803 is positive, in step S804, the setting status of the special display flag, which will be described in detail later, is referenced to determine whether or not the first or second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) is displaying a change. In detail, if the special display flag is in an on state, the change is considered to be displayed, and if the special display flag is in an off state, the change is considered to be displayed in a stopped state, which corresponds to a stopped state. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the special display flag is turned on when the first and second special display devices 43a, 43b start displaying a change, and is turned off when the first and second special display devices 43a, 43b display a stopped change.

If the result of step S804 is negative, i.e., if the ball is not in a big win or small win state and is not displaying a change, the process proceeds to step S805, where it is determined whether the value of the second pending counter Nb, which counts the number of pending second display changes triggered by a ball entering the second start winning device 33b, is greater than "0".

If the answer is yes in step S805, that is, if at least one second variable display is stored as pending, then in step S806, 1 is subtracted from the second pending counter Nb. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is stored as pending due to the determination process in step S805, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is stored as pending earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is consumed preferentially (the first variable display is postponed).

In the next step S807, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second special variable reserved area. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second special variable reserved area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3.

After step S807, in step S808, the second change flag of the execution area of the special change hold area is set to ON. In the following step S809, a subtraction display process is performed on the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the hold number of the second change display being reduced by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right second hold lamps are in a blinking state, the left second hold lamp is kept blinking while the right second hold lamp is lit, if the left second hold lamp is in a blinking state and the right second hold lamp is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, if both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the right second hold lamp is turned off while the left second hold lamp is lit, and if the left second hold lamp is lit and the right second hold lamp is turned off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right second hold lamps.

After step S809, in step S810, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

Also, if the result of step S805 is negative, i.e., if no second variable display is stored in reserve, then in step S811, it is determined whether the first reserved counter Na, which counts the number of reserved first variable displays triggered by a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, is greater than 0.

If the result of step S811 is negative, the process proceeds to step S812, where a standby display setting is performed to derive a display mode corresponding to a standby state in which no fluctuation display is being performed in both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b (for example, a mode in which only the first and second first special display lamps from the right in the lower row or the second special display lamp is lit). In other words, after the fluctuation stops, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of this embodiment maintain the stopped mode (in a mode showing the result of the win/lose lottery) during the fluctuation interval, but when the fluctuation interval ends, the display mode is switched to one indicating that the fluctuation is standby. After step S812, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the answer is positive in step S811, then in step S813, 1 is subtracted from the first reserved counter Na. In the following step S814, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first special variable reserved area. This data shift process is a process in which the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special variable reserved area is shifted sequentially to the execution area, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3.

After step S814, in step S815, the first change flag of the execution area of the special change hold area is set to ON. In the following step S816, a subtraction display process is performed on the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the hold number of the first change display being reduced by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right first hold lamps are in a blinking state, the right first hold lamp is turned on while the left first hold lamp is blinking, if the left first hold lamp is in a blinking state and the right first hold lamp is turned on, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, if both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, the right first hold lamp is turned off while the left first hold lamp is turned on, and if the left first hold lamp is turned on and the right first hold lamp is turned off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right first hold lamps.

After step S816, a variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process is terminated. Note that in this embodiment, there is one execution area for the special variable pending area, and the data stored in the first special variable pending area and the second special variable pending area are shifted to a common execution area when a variable display based on that data is performed.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S810 are explained with reference to FIG. 20.

First, in step S901, the mode memory area, which will be described in detail later, is referenced to determine whether or not the game is in a high probability state (high probability mode). The mode memory area stores determination information for determining the game mode. In this embodiment, the mode memory area stores one of the values "11", "12", or "21", with "11" corresponding to normal mode, "12" corresponding to time-saving mode, and "21" corresponding to high probability mode. In other words, in step S901, the high probability state is determined by determining whether or not "21" is stored in the mode memory area.

If the result of step S901 is positive, i.e., if the player is in a high probability state (high probability mode), then in step S902, the system determines whether or not either the first or second win/loss flag (see the win/loss determination process in FIG. 14) is set to on, taking into consideration the win/loss random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable pending area. If the result of step S902 is positive, i.e., if the player is in a high probability state and it is determined that the player has won the jackpot in the win/loss lottery, then the system proceeds to step S904.

If the result of step S901 is negative, i.e., if the player is in a low probability state (normal mode, time-saving mode), then in step S903, the system refers to the win/lose random number storage area and determines whether the first win/lose flag is on or not. If the result of step S903 is positive, i.e., if the player is in a low probability state and it is determined that the player has won the jackpot in the win/lose lottery, then the system proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag is set to ON, indicating that the occurrence of a jackpot state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot state in the win/lose random number storage area is referred to as setting the jackpot confirmation flag to ON.

In the next step S905, the execution area of the special variable pending area is taken into consideration to determine whether the 10RS flag (see the type determination process in Figures 15(a) and 15(b)) is set to on.

If the result of step S905 is positive, i.e., if it is "10RS", then 10RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S906. The 10RS pattern setting processing is a processing for executing a variable display to teach the occurrence of "10RS", and determines the variable display pattern (variable display time, stopping mode of the variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42, presentation pattern of the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42, etc.) of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the values of the variable type counters CS1, CS2 stored in the counter buffer of RAM 503, and sets the variable pattern command and the pattern command based on the determination and various flags, etc. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S919 described later.

The relationship between the values of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation pattern and the variation time is predefined by a table or the like. That is, in the 10RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from among normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and the variation time in the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined based on the determined reach pattern and the determination result of whether or not the time is shortened (probability change mode, time shortening mode, or a state in which there are four reserved first variation displays). Then, information including the fact that it is 10RS, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and information that allows the variation time to be grasped is stored in the corresponding memory area. Also, it is determined which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 10RS should be stopped, and stored in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, it is determined whether the type of the stopping pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42 will be an odd number or an even number, and the determined stopping pattern information is set in the pattern command. Note that the stopping patterns of the decorative patterns may be determined by the sub-controller 262, rather than by the main controller 261.

If the result of step S905 is negative, then in step S907, the process refers to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable pending area to determine whether the 4RS flag is set to on. If the result of step S907 is positive, i.e., if the result is "4RS," then the process proceeds to step S919 after performing a 4RS pattern setting process in step S908.

In addition, in the 4RS pattern setting process, information including 4RS and the fluctuation time of 4RS is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and information that allows the fluctuation time to be understood is stored in the corresponding memory area. Also, which of the stopping modes of the special display devices 43a, 43b corresponding to 4RS should be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, the stopping pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined to be a chance pattern corresponding to 4RS, and the stopping pattern information is set in the pattern command.

On the other hand, if the result of step S907 is negative, a 10RN pattern setting process is performed in step S909, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the 10RN pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from among normal reach and super reach, and the variation time in the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined based on the determined reach pattern and the result of the determination of whether or not the time is shortened (probability change mode, time shortening mode, or a state in which there are four reserved first variation displays). Then, information including the fact that it is 10RN, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and information that allows the variation time to be grasped is stored in the corresponding memory area. In addition, a decision is made as to which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 10RN should be stopped, and the decision is stored in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, the type of the stop pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined to be an even number, and the stop pattern information is set in the pattern command.

If the result of step S902 is negative, i.e., if a jackpot is not won in a high probability state, or if the result of step S903 is negative, i.e., if a jackpot is not won in a low probability state, then in step S911, the execution area of the special variable reserve area is taken into consideration and it is determined whether or not the small win flag is set to on. If the result of step S911 is negative, i.e., if the jackpot is neither a jackpot nor a small win, then in step S912, the execution area of the special variable reserve area is taken into consideration and it is determined whether or not the front and rear flags (see reach determination process in FIG. 16) are on. If the result of step S912 is positive, i.e., if the jackpot is a "front and rear miss reach," then the front and rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S919.

In the front and rear reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from normal reach and super reach, and the variation time in the special display devices 43a, 43b and decorative pattern display device 42 is determined based on the determined reach pattern and the determination result of whether or not it is in a time-saving state (probable change mode, time-saving mode, or a state in which there are four reserved first variation displays). Then, information including the fact that it is a front and rear miss reach, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and information that allows the variation time to be understood is stored in the corresponding memory area. Also, it is determined which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a, 43b corresponding to the miss is to be stopped, and stored in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, the type of the stop pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined to be a front and rear miss pattern, and the determined stop pattern information is set in the pattern command.

Furthermore, if the result of step S912 is negative, in step S914, the execution area of the special variable reserve area is taken into consideration to determine whether the non-front and rear flag is on. If the result of step S914 is positive, that is, if it is a "reach other than front and rear miss", a non-front and rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S915, and then the process proceeds to step S919. In the non-front and rear reach pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined to be a normal reach, and the fluctuation time in the special display device 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined based on the determined reach pattern and the determination result of whether or not it is in a time-saving state (probability change mode, time-saving mode, or a state in which there are four reserved first variable displays). Then, information including the fact that it is a reach other than front and rear miss, the determined reach pattern, and the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and information that allows the fluctuation time to be grasped is stored in the corresponding memory area. In addition, it determines which of the stop patterns of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the miss will be stopped, and stores the determined pattern in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, it determines the type of the stop pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 to be a pattern other than the front and rear miss, and sets the determined stop pattern information in the pattern command.

In addition, if the result of the negative judgment in step S914, that is, if the result is a "complete miss", the process proceeds to step S919 after performing a miss variation pattern setting process in step S916. In the miss variation pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined to be "no reach occurs", and the variation time in the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined based on the determined reach pattern and the judgment result of whether or not the time is shortened (probability change mode, time shortening mode, or a state in which there are four reserved first variation displays). Then, information including the fact that the variation is a complete miss, the determined reach pattern (no reach occurs), and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command, and information that allows the variation time to be grasped is stored in the corresponding memory area. In addition, it is determined which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a, 43b corresponding to the miss is to be stopped, and stored in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, the type of the stop pattern in the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined to be a miss pattern, and the determined stop pattern information is set in the pattern command.

Also, if the result of step S911 is positive, that is, if it is determined that a small win has been won, a small win confirmation flag is set to ON in step S917, indicating that the occurrence of a small win state has been confirmed. After that, in step S918, a small win pattern setting process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S919. In the small win pattern setting process, information including the fact that it is a small win and the fluctuation time of the small win is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and information that allows the fluctuation time to be understood is stored in the corresponding memory area. In addition, it is determined which of the stop patterns of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to the small win should be stopped, and stored in the corresponding memory area. Furthermore, the stop pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined to be a chance pattern corresponding to a small win, and the stop pattern information is set in the pattern command.

In step S919, a special chart display flag, which indicates whether or not a variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a, 43b, is set to on. This indicates that the conditions for switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a, 43b have been met. In the following step S920, a special chart display timer is set to measure the variable time (remaining time of variable display) on the special display devices 43a, 43b. The special chart display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the above-mentioned fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of such a special display timer, when a control signal to start switching display (fluctuation display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing of the next normal processing, switching display (fluctuation display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that has received the fluctuation pattern command and the pattern command starts the fluctuation display on the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the fluctuation pattern command at the same time as the fluctuation start of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and stops the fluctuation display on the decorative pattern display device 42 with a combination of patterns based on the pattern command at the same time as the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. After the end of step S920, the fluctuation display setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery is made up of the process in the start winning process, which obtains the value of the winning/losing random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 and stores it in the special variable pending area, the winning/losing determination process in steps S506 and S513, and the process in the variable display setting process, which includes steps S901 to S903, which determine whether the winning/losing is based on the winning/losing flag and the small winning flag and the situation at that time. The process in steps S901 to S903, etc. constitutes the second winning/losing determination process, and the process in steps S906, S908, S909, S913, S915, S916, S918, etc. constitutes the variable display setting process.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, if the result of step S804 is positive, i.e., if the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S817, where the decrement process of the special chart display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special chart display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 12 seconds (12,000 msec), the special chart display timer is set to "3,000", and is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Then, the process proceeds to step S818, where the value of the special chart display timer after the subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the predetermined variable time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, i.e., when the value of the special chart display timer becomes "0", step S818 is judged to be positive.

If the result of step S818 is negative, then in step S824, a display switching setting is performed to continue the display switching (variable display) of the special display devices 43a, 43b. Based on the settings of the display switching setting, a control signal to switch the display to the special display devices 43a, 43b is output in the external output process of the next normal process. This allows the display switching (variable display) of the special display devices 43a, 43b to be performed at the timing of the special display control process, i.e., every 4 ms. After step S824, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of step S818 is affirmative, the special display flag is turned off in step S819, and the stop display setting is performed in step S820 to display the stop on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Based on the contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to display the stop is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output process in the next normal process. In other words, the special display devices 43a and 43b will display the stop corresponding to each jackpot type, miss, etc., set in the variable display setting process.

Furthermore, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to stop displaying. This ensures that the stop timing of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42 is synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the pattern command and variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 again. Also, to reiterate, the stop display by the special display devices 43a, 43b is the main display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 42 is merely auxiliary (for performance purposes).

Next, in step S822, a discrimination information setting process is performed to set the initial winning state and the game mode switching setting, and in step S823, a value equivalent to the variable interval (e.g., 1 second) is set to the variable interval timer, and then this process is terminated.

In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the decorative pattern variable display is basically stopped at the timing when the special display devices 43a and 43b stop displaying the variable display of the special pattern. Also, when the variable interval ends and the variable display is reserved and stored, the variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the variable display in the decorative pattern display device 42 start simultaneously. On the other hand, when the variable interval ends but the variable display is not reserved and stored, the display mode in which the decorative patterns are completely stopped is derived as it is (it may be switched to a mode corresponding to the stop). Also, when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in an even-numbered double-digit combination in the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42, a re-draw performance may be performed during the variable interval period in which the decorative pattern combination may be converted to an odd-numbered double-digit combination (it may be configured to always be converted).

Here, the discrimination information setting process of step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S1001, the execution area of the special variable reserve area is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, the execution area of the special variable reserve area is referenced to determine whether or not the 4RS flag is set to ON.

If the result of step S1002 is negative, i.e., if the jackpot is a "10RS" or "10RN", then in step S1003, the round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is set to "10". On the other hand, if the result of step S1002 is positive, i.e., if the jackpot is a "4RS", then in step S1019, the round number counter is set to "4".

After step S1003 or step S1019, the process proceeds to step S1004, where "1" is set in the winning status memory area. Furthermore, in step S1005, a value "2000", which corresponds to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds, is set in the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening and closing control of the variable winning device 32). Next, in step S1006, "10", which indicates the maximum number of balls that enter the variable winning device 32 per round, is set in the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that enter the variable winning device 32. Note that the value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11), as to whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32, and is decremented by 1 if it is determined that a ball has entered the variable winning device 32.

Then, in step S1007, an opening command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the start of the winning state. The opening command includes information on the type of winning, etc., so that the sub-controller 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the winning state, etc. After step S1007, this process ends.

In addition, during a jackpot state, it is also possible to perform a visual display of an upgrade in the type of jackpot (for example, when an even number of repeated numbers is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, it is possible to inform the player that a "10RS" has been won during the immediately following jackpot state, or when an odd number of repeated numbers is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, it is possible to inform the player that a "10RS" has been won during the immediately following jackpot state).

If the result of step S1001 is affirmative, then in step S1013, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether or not the small win confirmation flag is set to on. If the result of step S1013 is affirmative, then in step S1008, the round number counter is set to "1". After step S1008, in step S1009, the win status memory area is set to "1". In the following step S1010, the special variable timer is set to a value of "250", which corresponds to an opening period of, for example, 1 second, and in step S1011, the winning counter is set to "10", and in step S1012, a small win opening command is set. After that, this process ends.

If the answer is YES in step S1013, then in step S1014 it is determined whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether or not the time-saving mode is selected. If the answer is NO in step S1014, then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1014 is affirmative, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1015 to measure the duration of the time-saving mode. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, at the end of the "10RN" jackpot state, the number of variation displays (e.g., 100) corresponding to the duration of the time-saving mode is set in the variation counter, and 1 is decremented in step S1015 each time a variation display is performed on the special display devices 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42).

In the next step S1016, it is determined whether the value of the change count counter is "0". If the determination is negative in step S1016, that is, if the change display of the special display devices 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) has not yet been performed the specified number of times set as the period of the time-saving mode after the end of the "10RN" jackpot state, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1016 is positive, then in step S1017, "11" is set in the mode memory area, indicating that the mode is normal. In other words, when the variable display has been performed a prescribed number of times on the special display devices 43a, 43b, the time-saving mode ends and the mode transitions to normal. After step S1017, in step S1018, a support end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time-saving mode, and then this process ends.

Next, the variable prize-winning device control process for opening and closing the variable prize-winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the value set in the hit status memory area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the state is other than a hit state. If the determination in step S1201 is positive, that is, if the state is not a hit state, this process ends as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state and the small hit state, "1" is set in the hit status memory area in the above-mentioned determination information setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of step S1201 is negative, that is, if the player is in a winning state (if the winning status memory area is set to any of "1" to "3"), the process proceeds to step S1202, where the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1. Incidentally, at the start of the big win state, the special variable timer is set to "2000" in the determination information setting process.

In the next step S1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If the result of step S1203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1204 whether "1" is set in the winning status storage area.

If the result of step S1204 is positive, that is, if the end of the opening period or the interval period has arrived, then in step S1205, "2" is set in the winning status storage area. Then, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not a small winning has occurred.

If the answer is negative in step S1206, then in step S1207, the special variable timer is set to a value of "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) that the variable winning device 32 is to remain open. On the other hand, if the answer is positive in step S1206, then in step S1208, the special variable timer is set to a value of "450" corresponding to the time (1.8 seconds) that the variable winning device 32 is to remain open.

After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, a process is performed to open the variable winning device 32, and in step S1210, a round command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that a round is about to begin. Then, this process ends.

If the result of step S1204 is negative, then in step S1211 it is determined whether or not "3" is set in the hit status memory area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big win state (small win state) end and the ending period begins, "3" is set in the hit status memory area. If the result of step S1211 is negative, that is, when the round period has ended (when it is not yet time to end the big win state), then in step S1212 the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1.

In the next step S1213, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter is "0". If the result of step S1213 is negative, i.e., if there are still rounds to be played, the process proceeds to step S1214, where "1" is set in the win status storage area. Note that in this embodiment, since there is only one round in the small win state, a negative determination is not made in step S1213.

Then, in step S1216, the special variable timer is set to a value of "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds). After step S1216, in step S1218, the prize counter is set to "10". Furthermore, in step S1219, a process is performed to close the variable prize device 32, and in step S1220, an interval command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an interval has started. Then, this process ends.

Also, if the result of step S1203 is negative, i.e., if there is still time remaining for the variable winning device 32 to remain open or closed (open time or closed time), the process proceeds to step S1221, where it is determined whether the value of the winning counter that counts the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is "0". At the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval, the winning counter is set to "10", which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of winnings per round. Then, one is subtracted each time a game ball enters the variable winning device 32.

If the result of step S1221 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S1221 is positive, that is, if the trigger for ending the round occurs before the set period for the round has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, if 10 game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round ends promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not yet elapsed.

Also, if the result of step S1213 is positive, i.e., if all rounds in the big win state have been played, the process proceeds to step S1222, where the win status memory area is set to "3". After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not the win is a small win. If the result of step S1223 is negative, in step S1224, the special variable timer is set to a value of "2500" corresponding to the ending time of the big win state (10 seconds). On the other hand, if the result of step S1223 is positive, in step S1225, the special variable timer is set to a value of "100" corresponding to the ending time of the small win state (0.4 seconds).

After step S1224 or step S1225, in step S1226, the winning counter is set to "7". Note that when the process of setting the ending from step S1222 onwards is carried out in the flow following a positive decision in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is set to "0". If the value of the winning counter is left at "0" at the start of the ending period, then in the variable winning device control process 4 msec later, a positive decision will suddenly be made in step S1221, and the ending period will not be completed. For this reason, a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1226 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed in a different way.

After step S1226, in step S1227, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and in the following step S1228, an ending command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that an ending has started. Then, this process ends.

If the result of step S1211 is affirmative, i.e., the ending period has ended and it is time to end the jackpot state, the process proceeds to step S1229, where the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area and the change count counter are set.

Here, the end setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 23. First, in step S1401, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether the 10RN flag is set to on.

If the result of step S1401 is affirmative, then in step S1402, the value "12" corresponding to the time-saving mode is set in the mode storage area. This means that the time-saving mode is applied after the big win state ends.

In the next step S1403, the variation counter is set to "100". The variation counter is used to know that the specified number of variation displays set as the time-saving mode period when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time-saving mode is started, have been completed. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time-saving start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of the time-saving mode (transition to the pullback stage). Then, this process ends.

If the result of step S1401 is negative, then in step S1405, the execution area of the special variable pending area is referenced to determine whether or not the small win flag is set to on. If the result of step S1405 is positive, then this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S1405 is negative, then in step S1406, "21" is set in the mode memory area. This means that the special variable mode will be granted after the end of the big win state. After step S1406, in step S1407, a special variable start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of the special variable mode. Then, this process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, even when the probability variable mode is granted, the decorative pattern change display instructs the occurrence of a jackpot state, and the fact that the probability variable jackpot state is in the probability variable jackpot state is not taught, and the decorative pattern display device 42 may not teach that the probability variable mode is in effect even after the probability variable mode has started (for example, this may occur at a rate of 1/15 of a 10RS jackpot), and the sub-control device 262 determines this when it receives a change pattern command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. Based on this determination, the sub-control device 262 transitions to the probability variable stage if it has instructed the probability variable mode at the start of the probability variable mode, or transitions to the pullback stage if it has not instructed the probability variable mode.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1229, in step S1230, the hit status memory area is set to "0" indicating that the jackpot state is not in effect. Then, in step S1231, a hit end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is ending, and then this process ends. The hit end command includes the count information of the fluctuation count counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer, which is used to measure the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41, is "0". If the result of step S2101 is negative, that is, if it is a normal pattern interval, the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted in step S2102, and then the process ends. In other words, for example, if the normal pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the normal pattern interval timer is set to "249" ("250" if step S2102 is performed before step S2101), the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec in the process, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2101 is positive, i.e., if it is not the normal pattern interval period, then in step S2103, it is determined whether or not a normal pattern display flag, which indicates whether or not a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41, is on. Note that if the normal pattern display flag is on, it is considered that a changing display is being performed on the normal pattern display device 41.

If the answer is negative in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0. If the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process ends.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2104, that is, if no change display is pending on the normal pattern display device 41, this process ends as is. For example, if a negative judgment is made in step S2104, a standby display setting may be made in the normal pattern display device 41 to derive a display mode corresponding to a change standby state in which no change display is being performed. In other words, after the change stops, the normal pattern display device 41 maintains its stopped mode (in a mode showing the result of the ball entry support lottery) for the normal pattern interval period, but when the normal pattern interval period ends, the display mode may be switched to one indicating that the change standby state is in place.

On the other hand, if the answer is yes in step S2104, then in step S2105, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc.

In the next step S2106, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the normal variable reserved area. This data shift process shifts the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the normal variable reserved area to the execution area side in sequence, with the data in each area being shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, etc.

Then, in step S2107, a normal pattern change setting process is executed to set and start the change display of the normal pattern display device 41.

Now, the normal pattern change setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S2301, a normal pattern display flag is set to ON, which indicates that the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a change in the normal pattern. In the following step S2302, the winning status memory area is referenced to determine whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the current state is other than a big win or a small win. If the result of step S2302 is positive, that is, if the current state is not a winning state, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode memory area, that is, whether or not the current state is a high ball winning state (time-saving mode or high probability mode).

If the result of step S2303 is positive, then in step S2304, the normal pattern display timer, which measures the time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, is set to "100" to set the normal pattern variable display time to 0.4 seconds.

Then, in step S2305, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is "0". In addition, in a high ball winning state, a win occurs when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which has a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232".

If the result of step S2305 is a positive judgment, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S2305 is a negative judgment, that is, if the ball-scoring support lottery for deciding whether or not to open the second start-up winning device 33b is won, a ball-scoring support flag indicating that the ball-scoring support lottery has been won is set to ON in step S2306. After step S2306, the process ends.

Also, if the result of step S2302 or step S2303 is negative, that is, if the player is in a big win state, small win state, or low ball entry state, then in step S2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to "500" to set the normal symbol variable display time to 2.0 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variable pending area is "1". In addition, in a low ball entry state, a win occurs when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes values in the range of "0 to 232", is "1".

If the result of step S2308 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S2308 is positive, i.e., if the ball entry support lottery has been won, the ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery has been won is set to on in step S2306, and the process ends. The variable display time of the normal symbols and the probability of winning the ball entry support lottery can be set appropriately for each type of pachinko machine, and for example, the probability of winning the ball entry support lottery in a high ball entry state may be configured to be higher than the probability of winning the ball entry support lottery in a low ball entry state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, a subtraction display process is performed on the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) corresponding to the reduction of the hold number of the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 by one. In other words, if both of the pair of left and right normal hold lamps 406 are in a blinking state, the right normal hold lamp 406 is turned on while the left normal hold lamp 406 is blinking, if the left normal hold lamp 406 is in a blinking state and the right normal hold lamp 406 is turned on, both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned on, if both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned on, the right normal hold lamp 406 is turned off while the left normal hold lamp 406 is turned on, and if the left normal hold lamp 406 is turned on and the right normal hold lamp 406 is turned off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal hold lamps 406. After step S2108, this process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step S2103 is a positive judgment, i.e., if the normal pattern display device 41 is displaying a variable pattern, the process proceeds to step S2109, where a process is performed to decrement the normal pattern display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal pattern display timer is decremented by one.

Then, proceed to step S2110 and determine whether the count value of the normal display timer is "0", i.e., whether the change time has elapsed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2110, in step S2115, a switching display setting is made to continue the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 (a switching display in which a pair of normal lamps on the left and right are alternately lit). Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal to perform a switching display is output to the normal pattern display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. This realizes the switching display (variable display) of the normal pattern display device 41 at the timing of the normal display control processing, i.e., every 4 ms. After step S2115, this processing ends.

If the result of step S2110 is affirmative, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step S2111, and the normal symbol stop display setting is performed in step S2112 to display the stop symbol on the normal symbol display device 41. In other words, if the winning ball support lottery is won (if the winning ball support flag is set to on), both of the pair of normal symbol lamps on the left and right of the normal symbol display device 41 are lit, and if the winning ball support lottery is lost, only the left normal symbol lamp is lit.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2113, where the general map discrimination information setting process is performed. The general map discrimination information setting process is now explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the winning support flag is set to ON. If the result of step S2401 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S2401 is YES, in step S2402, the normal variable flag is set to ON to determine whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in the open state.

In the next step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, i.e., whether or not the ball is in a high winning state. If the determination in step S2403 is affirmative, in step S2404, the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b is set to "450" so that the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is 1.8 seconds.

Furthermore, in step S2405, the opening count counter, which counts the number of times (remaining times) the second start winning device 33b is to be opened, is set to "3" so that the second start winning device 33b is opened three times. After step S2405, in step S2408, the winning support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the support period flag is turned on. Furthermore, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to an open state, and then this process is terminated.

Also, if the result of step S2403 is negative, i.e., if the ball entry state is low, then in step S2406, the normal variable timer is set to "100" to set the opening time of the second start winning device 33b to 0.4 seconds. In the following step S2407, the opening count counter is set to "1" to open the second start winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the winning support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the support period flag is turned on, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to the open state, and then this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, the GPIO interval timer is set to a value equivalent to the GPIO interval period (e.g., 1 second), and then the process ends.

Next, the start-up winning device control process in step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If the result of step S2201 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S2201 is positive, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202.

In the next step S2203, it is determined whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If the determination is negative in step S2203, that is, if it is the period during which the second start winning device 33b is to be kept open or closed, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the answer is YES in step S2203, then in step S2204 it is determined whether the normal variable flag is ON. If the answer is YES in step S2204, that is, if the second start winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the time has come to close it, then in step S2205 the normal variable flag is turned OFF. In the following step S2206, the value of the opening count counter is decremented by 1, and in step S2207 the second start winning device 33b is set to the closed state.

Then, in step S2208, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter is "0". If the determination is affirmative in step S2208, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S2208 is negative, i.e., the winning ball entry support lottery was performed in the guaranteed bonus mode or time-saving mode, and based on that, there are still three times left to open the second start winning device 33b, then in step S2210, a value equivalent to the interval time (e.g., "250") is set for the normal variable timer, and then this process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step S2204, that is, if the second start winning device 33b is in the interval period between three openings (the second start winning device 33b is in a closed state) and the timing to end the interval period has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, a value equivalent to the opening time (in this example, "450" only in a high ball winning state) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2212, and the second start winning device 33b is set to an open state in step S2213. After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, if a specified number of game balls (e.g., 8 balls) enter the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b may be configured to immediately close (for example, if a negative judgment is made in step S2203, a judgment is made as to whether or not the second start winning switch 224b has been detected, and if a positive judgment is made, the process may proceed to step S2205).

Next, we will explain the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311. For ease of explanation, we will first explain the reception interrupt processing with reference to Figure 28, and then explain the main processing with reference to Figure 29.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt processing executed by the dispensing control device 311. The reception interrupt processing is a process that is executed by interrupting when the dispensing control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the dispensing control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the dispensing control device 311 is temporarily put on hold, and the reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the reception interrupt process is executed, first in step S3001, the command sent from the main control unit 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command reception flag is turned on to record that a command has been sent from the main control unit 261, and this reception interrupt process is terminated. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a specified storage area, and the storage pointer is updated to store the next received command in the next storage area.

In this embodiment, the reception process of the command sent from the main control unit 261 is performed by an interrupt process executed when the command is received. However, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 30, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it may be confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command may be stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 and the command reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the dispensing control device 311, which is started when the power is turned on and reset.

First, in step S3101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Then, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is set in backup area 513a of RAM 513. If power failure occurrence information is set in backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power failure, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 513 is saved correctly.

If power outage information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization of RAM 513 in step S3115 and subsequent steps.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial values of RAM 513 are set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information has been set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored in step S3109, the power failure occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. Also, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not power interruption information is set in the backup area 513a. If the power interruption information is set here, it means that the power has been cut off, and the process from step S3123 onwards is carried out as power outage processing when the power is cut off. In the power outage processing, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, a command judgment process to be described later is executed. Then, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, in step S3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in the backup area 513a, and in step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 513.

In addition, since the processing of step S3122 checks for information on the occurrence of a power outage after the processing performed when the power is turned on is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of RAM 513 is smaller than when each processing is in progress, and storage can be made easier. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the dispensing control device 311 can be reduced.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the dispensing control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (every 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command is obtained from the main control unit 261, and a judgment process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command judgment process is described below with reference to FIG. 31.

Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the command determination process performed by the dispensing control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command sent from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process described above (see Figure 28).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control unit 261, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control of the dispensing control unit 311.

The type of command read from RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout initialization command, step S3307 determines whether the payout permission flag is already on. If the payout permission flag is off, this means that the main control unit 261 instructed the initialization of RAM 513 when the power was turned on, so in step S3308 the working area (area) other than the stack area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3309 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3311 the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control unit 261 performs initialization processing of RAM 503 after sending the payout initialization command, and the payout control unit 311 performs initialization processing of RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command, so the timing at which RAM 503 and the timing at which RAM 513 are initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, even if the payout control unit 311 receives a command sent from the main control unit 261 due to a difference in initialization timing, it is possible to prevent problems such as the RAM 513 being initialized and being unable to perform control corresponding to the received command. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already on in step S3307, the command judgment process is terminated without clearing the working area of RAM 513 and initializing RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the initialization of RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is on when the power is turned on, so it is not received with the payout permission flag on. In such a case, it is considered that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the payout permission flag is on and the working area of RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of RAM 513 is set (step S3309), a problem occurs such as a prize ball not being paid out when there are remaining balls, causing a loss to the player, but since the initialization of RAM 513 is prevented with the payout permission flag on, it is possible to prevent the player from losing money.

Also, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off, and the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to permit the payout of prize balls. In other words, if there is information of a power outage and the main control unit 261 and payout control unit 311 have returned to the state before the power was cut off, the payout of prize balls will be permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the processing of step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer has ended, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control unit 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored, and in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of the prize balls. At this time, the payout control unit 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a specified buffer area, and stores it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command sent from the main control unit 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of prize balls. In addition, when a prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the payout of prize balls can be performed early for a winning prize. When the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, processing based on the command stored in a specified memory area of the command buffer is completed, and the read pointer is updated to the read pointer corresponding to the next memory area.

If the command sent from the main control unit 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), the command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Returning to the flowchart in FIG. 30, when the command determination process in step S3201 is completed, in step S3202, a ball jam detection process is performed to detect whether a ball jam has occurred in the ball feeding device 63. When the ball jam detection process in step S3202 is completed, in step S3203, a CR unit response process related to the CR unit, such as a ball lending operation, is performed.

After step S3203, in step S3204, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. If the payout permission flag has not been turned on, this process is terminated. In other words, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being paid out before a command is sent from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if the result of step S3204 is positive, the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and if it is determined that the state recovery operation should be started, the state recovery operation is executed. With this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball jam is resolved (returning to the normal state).

After that, in step S3206, the lower tray 15 is set to full or the lower tray full/unfull state according to the change in state. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full/unfull state is set. Also, in step S3207, the tank ball no state (bulb out state) or the tank ball no state (bulb present state) is set according to the change in state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball no state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when the tank ball is no longer absent, the tank ball no state is set.

Then, in step S3208, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, the condition is notified.

Next, the payout control process for the prize balls and loan balls is executed. In detail, the payout number setting process is executed in step S3209, the motor control status acquisition process is executed in step S3210, and the motor drive process is executed in step S3211.

In step S3212, the state return switch 321 is checked to ensure that the ball removal is not impossible and that the ball removal operation has not started, and the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step S3213, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is jammed. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether or not the command sent from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, in step S3902, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. The command buffer of RAM 553 is configured as a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control unit 261. The ring buffer has a specified memory area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the memory area, and when commands have been stored in all of the memory area, the memory area is returned to the beginning and the command is updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and commands are stored and read based on each pointer.

In the next step S3903, a pending information storage process is performed to store the information of the advance command output from the main control unit 261 in a pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control unit 262. As described above, the advance command includes information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the entry of a ball into the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, information indicating whether the variable information corresponds to a big win or a small win, information indicating the type of big win, information indicating the type of reach, etc.

The reserved information storage area of the sub-controller 262, like the special variable reserved area of the main controller 261, includes a first reserved information storage area and a second reserved information storage area each having four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and one execution area. In the first reserved information storage area, information on variable display such as whether or not it is a big win, the big win type, information on whether or not it is a small win, and information on the reach pattern (variable information) is stored in chronological order in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable reserved area). In addition, in the second reserved information storage area, variable information is stored in chronological order in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable reserved area). By adopting this configuration, it is possible to reserve and store four pieces of variable information on the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and four pieces of variable information on the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. As a result, the sub-controller 262 is able to grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special variable pending areas of the main controller 261, but also the variable information stored in the pending areas.

The pending information storage process will now be described with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a prior command has been received (whether or not the prior command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4101 is positive, then in step S4102 it is determined whether the advance command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variable information stored in the second special variable pending area). If the result of this determination is negative, that is, if the advance command corresponds to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a (variable information stored in the first special variable pending area), then in step S4103 the first variable pending counter Nd, which counts the number of pending variable information stored in the first pending information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step S4104, the information included in the starting command as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot (in this example, in the win/lose lottery triggered by the ball entering the first start winning device 33a, a small jackpot is not won, but in the case of a configuration in which a small jackpot may be won, information on whether or not a small jackpot has been won), reach pattern information, etc. are stored in the first of the available reserved areas in the first reserved information storage area.

In the next step S4105, a preview information storage process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, there are cases where related performance displays are intentionally derived from multiple consecutive variable displays (so-called "consecutive previews" are performed). Here, the value of a consecutive preview counter for determining whether or not to perform a consecutive preview, and the value of a preview type counter for determining the type of consecutive preview are obtained, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area of the first reserved information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in step S4104 above.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 49, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 49). The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer).

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 9, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e., 9). The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is updated, the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) is used to store the counter value.

When variable information is stored in the pending information storage area in the pending information storage process, the value of the continuous preview counter and the value of the preview type counter stored in the continuous preview counter buffer and the preview type counter buffer are acquired. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area in the pending information storage area is provided with a continuous preview flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous preview is to be derived.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a prediction accuracy judgment table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to make a continuous prediction, and a prediction table that is taken into consideration when deciding the type of continuous prediction. There are multiple prediction accuracy judgment tables and multiple prediction tables, and the prediction accuracy judgment table and prediction table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the variable information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous preview lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview. In the continuous preview lottery process in step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag already set on. If it is not confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, and further, only variable information corresponding to a complete miss (a miss that does not result in a reach state) is stored in the first reserved area, a lottery for a continuous preview is performed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is a reserved area with the continuous preview flag set, a lottery for a continuous preview is not performed.

In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, if the value of the first variable pending counter Nd is "2" or more, the system refers to the notice win/lose judgment table (those corresponding to a jackpot are more likely to win than those corresponding to a miss) corresponding to each of the big win types, reach patterns, and game modes based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine whether or not to execute a continuous notice. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a continuous notice, the system refers to the notice table corresponding to the big win type, reach pattern, and game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area to determine whether or not to execute a continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all pending areas in which variable information is stored among the pending areas in the first pending information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag for the execution area is not turned on.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a pending icon setting process is performed to display one additional pending icon 461 indicating that a variable display is being held in the decorative pattern display device 42.

In the pending icon setting process of step S4107, the manner in which the pending icon 461 is to be derived is selected (drawn) and set. For example, the patterns of the pending icon 461 are ranked, a display rank indicating the rank of the pending icon 461 that is actually displayed is stored in a display rank memory area, a display upper limit rank indicating the range in which the pattern of the pending icon 461 can be changed is stored in an upper limit rank memory area, and a pending change flag is set to on if there is a difference between the display rank and the upper limit rank.

After step S4107, this process ends. Note that, as will be described in more detail later, the reserved icon 461 will be erased from the display section of the decorative pattern display device 42 when the corresponding variable display is executed (started). When the reserved icon 461 is erased, an effect may be performed in which the reserved icon 461 (a picture that resembles a game ball) is launched into the air by a cannon. There are also patterns in which the ball appears to be launched but is not, and patterns in which the launch position (the direction in which the game ball display flies), the launch position (the position of the cannon), or the launch device (manpower, etc.) changes.

Also, if the result of step S4102 is positive, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variable information stored in the second special variable pending area), the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second variable pending counter Ne, which counts the number of pending variable information stored in the second pending information storage area, is incremented by one.

Then, in step S4109, the information included in the starting command as to whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether or not it is a small jackpot, the reach pattern information, etc. are stored in the first empty reserved area of the second reserved information storage area. In the following step S4110, the value of the consecutive notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are obtained, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area of the second reserved information storage area where the variable information was newly stored in step S4109.

After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous announcement lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a continuous announcement. Note that the continuous announcement lottery process in step S4111 simply makes the continuous announcement lottery process in step S4106 correspond to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b, and an explanation of this process is omitted. After step S4111, in step S4112, a pending icon setting process is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or if a negative judgment is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, where it is judged whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3913.

In step S3905, various counters are updated. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the top, middle, and bottom symbol counters CL, CM, and CR used to set the losing symbols in the top, middle, and bottom symbol display areas are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that the register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, resulting in randomly changing values.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CO determines the pattern (jackpot pattern) when the decorative pattern display device 42 stops changing when a jackpot state occurs, and in this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO. In other words, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 8, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (i.e. 8).

This jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is periodically updated by the counter update process in step S3905 and stored in the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer. Then, as described below, when the sub-controller 262 receives a pattern command corresponding to a jackpot from the main controller 261, it reads out the value of the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO from the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer in RAM 553.

In addition, there is a special jackpot stop decorative pattern table that associates the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed during a special jackpot with the value of the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO, and a normal jackpot stop decorative pattern table that associates the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed during a normal jackpot with the value of the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO.

When the sub-controller 262 receives a symbol command from the main controller 261 indicating that a symbol corresponding to a guaranteed jackpot should be stopped, the sub-controller 262 determines a combination of symbols for a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer and the guaranteed jackpot decorative symbol table. For example, if the counter value is 0, it is set to "1" (a double number), and if the counter value is 1, it is set to "2" (a double number). Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer in RAM 553, but it is also possible to refer to the counter value when the symbol command is received without storing it in the buffer.

In addition, when the sub-controller 262 receives a symbol command from the main controller 261 indicating that a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot should be stopped, it determines the combination of symbols for the jackpot based on the value of the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer and the normal jackpot stop decorative symbol table. For example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (double number), if it is 2 to 4, it is "4" (double number), if it is 5 or 6, it is "6" (double number), and if it is 7 or 8, it is "8" (double number).

In addition, if a special jackpot is won and it has been instructed that it is a special jackpot (special jackpot mode will be applied) by, for example, stopping and displaying a special jackpot pattern, and if a special jackpot is won but it has not been instructed that it is a special jackpot, a special jackpot uninstructed flag (which is on when not instructed) is set, the special jackpot uninstructed flag is set when setting the decorative pattern to be stopped based on the reception of a pattern command corresponding to a special jackpot.

The top, middle and bottom pattern counters CL, CM and CR determine the combination of symbols that will stop in the top, middle and bottom pattern display areas when the winning/losing lottery is a losing one, and since one of nine decorative symbols is displayed in each column, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each. The top pattern counter CL determines the symbol that will stop in the top pattern display area, the middle pattern counter CM determines the symbol that will stop in the middle pattern display area, and the bottom pattern counter CR determines the symbol that will stop in the bottom pattern display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated using the value of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. Each of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in either the front or rear miss reach pattern buffer, the front or rear non-miss reach pattern buffer, or the complete miss pattern buffer of RAM 553.

Here, the update process of each pattern counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the upper pattern counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle pattern counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower pattern counters CL, CM, CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower pattern counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Also, if the upper pattern counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if it is time to update the upper pattern counter CL (step S4001 is YES), proceed to step S4003 and update the upper pattern counter CL. Also, if it is time to update the middle pattern counter CM (step S4002 is YES), proceed to step S4004 and update the middle pattern counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), proceed to step S4005 and update the lower symbol counter CR. When updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lowest 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the result of this addition exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted, and the result of this calculation becomes the current value of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update process, the top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of each counter value do not overlap. This allows one set of pattern counters CL, CM, and CR to be updated every time the update process is performed three times.

Then, in step S4006, it is determined whether the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a reach symbol combination (the symbol in the upper symbol display area is the same as the symbol in the lower symbol display area), and if it is a reach symbol combination (YES in S4006), it is further determined in step S4007 whether it is a jackpot symbol combination (the symbol in the left and right symbol display areas is the same as the symbol in the center symbol display area). If the determination in step S4007 is positive, the process ends without storing the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR combination in RAM 553.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4007 is negative, then in step S4008, it is determined whether the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear miss patterns. If the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear miss patterns (front and rear miss reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, where the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear miss reach pattern buffer of RAM 553, and this process ends. If the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of patterns other than front and rear miss patterns (reach other than front and rear miss) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, where the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear miss reach pattern buffer of RAM 553, and this process ends.

Also, if the combination is other than the reach pattern (S4006 is NO), the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a losing pattern (completely losing pattern), so in step S4011, the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely losing pattern buffer of RAM 553, and this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3906, the hold process is performed. The hold process is explained below with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). If a positive determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second variation pending counter Ne is greater than "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display has not been reserved and stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, where the value of the first variation pending counter Nd is decremented by 1.

As described above, in this embodiment, the second change display is consumed preferentially over the first change display, and when the second change display is reserved, the first change display is not consumed. In other words, when the change information of the second change display is reserved and stored in the second reserved information storage area, the change pattern command corresponding to the first change display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether the value of the second change reservation counter Ne is greater than "0", it is determined whether the change pattern command has the change information of the first change display or the second change display. Of course, it is also possible to provide the change pattern command with information on whether it corresponds to the change information of the first change display or the second change display, and to determine whether the change pattern command has the change information of the first change display or the second change display based on the change pattern command.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the first pending information storage area. This data shift process is a process to shift the data (including the continuous preview flag) stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first pending information storage area to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

If the result of step S4202 is affirmative, i.e., if at least one piece of change information for the second change display is stored in reserve, the value of the second change reserve counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4205.

In the next step S4206, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the second pending information storage area. This data shift process is a process in which the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second pending information storage area is shifted to the execution area side in sequence, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: pending area 1 → execution area, pending area 2 → pending area 1, pending area 3 → pending area 2, and pending area 4 → pending area 3. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. Note that in this embodiment, the pending information storage area has one execution area, and the data stored in the first pending information storage area and the second pending information storage area is shifted to a common execution area when a variable display corresponding to the data is performed.

In step S4207, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for the continuous preview. In the preview setting process in step S4207, it is determined whether the continuous preview flag (see the continuous preview lottery process in step S4106) in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on or not, and if the determination is negative, no continuous preview is performed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, it is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command whether or not there is a jackpot, what the type is if there is a jackpot, and if there is no jackpot, what the reach pattern is, etc., and the type of continuous preview is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The type of continuous preview determined here will be derived at the expected timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

After step S4207, in step S4208, a pending icon shift process is performed to shift the pending icon 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. Each pending area of the pending information storage area and the execution area is provided with a pending icon storage area that stores the type of pending icon 461, and information related to the pending icon 461 is also shifted by the data shift process of the pending information storage area described above.

The pending icon shift process is a process for redrawing the pending icon 461 in accordance with the data shift, and in the decorative pattern display device 42, each time a variable display is consumed (executed), the pending icon 461 located at the far left is erased, and the pending icon 461 located to the right of it is shifted one position to the left (the display location moves). After step S4208, this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, in step S4208, if there is a reserved area with the reserved change flag set to on, prior to the process of redrawing the reserved icon 461, a lottery is held to see whether or not to perform a reserved change performance for the reserved icon 461, and if the lottery is won, a lottery is held to see how many levels the rank of the reserved icon 461 should be increased by (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern should not be exceeded), and the new display rank is stored in the display rank storage area. In the redrawing process, a process is performed to draw the reserved icon 461 at the corresponding position based on the information (display rank) in the display rank storage area of each reserved area in the reserved information storage area. In addition, if the display rank is increased, a determination is made as to whether the display rank in the display rank storage area is the same as the upper limit rank in the upper limit rank storage area, and if they are the same, the reserved change flag is set to off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3907, a display setting process is performed. Here, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of RAM 553. In other words, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command and a pattern command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, and stopping pattern, and determines the display pattern of the decorative pattern variation display, etc. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the varying display of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42. Once a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the varying display of the pattern continues in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed.

In addition, when starting the variable display, if the continuous preview flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous preview lottery process in step S4106) is on, the type of continuous preview to be derived in the variable display is determined based on the variable information of the variable pattern command by referring to a table corresponding to each situation, and the derivation of a preview performance other than the continuous preview is determined, or a display corresponding to the operation of the performance button 125, etc. is performed. Furthermore, the display setting process in step S3907 also performs a process for controlling the performance during a jackpot (win display process).

Next, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of a winning state has been received from the main control device 261. In this embodiment, a positive determination is made in step S4701 not only when an opening command is received at the start of a big winning state, but also when a small winning opening command is received at the start of a small winning state.

If the result of step S4701 is positive, then in step S4702, the round count counter for counting the remaining number of rounds is set to "10RS" or "10RN" based on the information contained in the opening command, and set to "10" if the result is "10RN", or set to "4" if the result is "4RS". Alternatively, the round count counter is set to "1" based on the information contained in the small win opening command.

After that, in step S4703, if it is a jackpot, an 8-second opening performance is set (setting the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting state of the various lamps) and then this process ends. Alternatively, if it is a minor jackpot, an opening performance is set for 1 second and then this process ends. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various performance modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding performance is selected by referring to the table and executed.

If the result of step S4701 is negative, then in step S4704 it is determined whether or not a round command has been received. If the result of step S4704 is positive, then in step S4705, if a big win has been selected, the effects during the round are set for a maximum of 30 seconds, and then this process ends. Alternatively, if a small win has been selected, the effects during the round are set for a maximum of 1.8 seconds, and then this process ends.

If the result of step S4704 is negative, then in step S4706 it is determined whether or not an interval command has been received. If the result of step S4706 is positive, then in step S4707 the round grasp counter is decremented by 1, and if a jackpot has been reached in step S4708, the effects for the 4-second interval are set, and then this process ends.

If the result of step S4706 is negative, then in step S4709 it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. If the result of step S4709 is positive, then in step S4710 the round grasp counter is decremented by 1, and in step S4711, if a big win has occurred, a 10-second ending performance is set and then this process ends. Alternatively, if a small win has occurred, a 0.4-second ending performance is set and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, in the case of a small win, the effects are not set for each period, such as the opening period (1 second), the round period (1.8 seconds), and the ending period (0.4 seconds), but are set so that the effects (announcements, etc.) are performed throughout the entire period.

If the result of step S4709 is negative, in step S4712, it is determined whether or not a winning end command has been received. If the result of step S4712 is negative, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the result of step S4712 is positive, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated and the normal game mode in which the variable display is performed is set. In other words, it is determined whether a time-saving start command or a high probability start command has been received, and if a high probability start command has been received, the high probability start flag is checked and it is determined whether it is set to on. Then, if a time-saving start command has been received, a pull-back stage is derived, if a high probability start command has been received and the high probability start flag is set to off, a high probability stage is derived, and if a high probability start command has been received and the high probability start flag is set to on, a pull-back stage is derived. After step S4713, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3908, a change stop process is executed to stop the changing display of the decorative pattern display device 42. Here, the change stop process is explained with reference to FIG. 38.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) has been received. If the determination in step S4401 is affirmative, in step S4402, a process is performed to stop the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42.

After step S4402, in step S4403, the pullback stage is derived and it is determined whether the probability change uninstructed flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S4403 is affirmative, that is, if the current variable display has been instructed to be in probability change mode, in step S4404, a process is performed to change the "pullback stage" to the "probability change stage."

After step S4404, or if a negative determination is made in step S4403, or if a negative determination is made in step S4401, in step S4405, it is determined whether or not a support end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4405 is affirmative, then in step S4406, a process is performed to change the performance stage displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 from the "pullback stage" to the "normal stage." After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4501, this process is terminated. The various variation information included in the variation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area, or may be configured to be stored in a separate storage area. Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a flag corresponding to the reception of a variation pattern command is turned on when processing corresponding to the reception of the variation pattern command is performed in the pending processing (see FIG. 36), and the flag is turned off when the variation display is set in the display setting processing, and the flag is checked to determine whether or not a variation pattern command has been received.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4501 is affirmative, step S4502 determines whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot or a front or rear miss reach. In this embodiment, the number of seconds of the variable time corresponding to the super reach performance that occurs when a jackpot or a front or rear miss reach occurs is one of "13, 16, 20, 22, 25, 27, 30", and "13 seconds, 16 seconds, 20 seconds" can be selected only when a handover performance (pseudo ball performance) using the pseudo ball performance device 49 (see FIG. 4, etc.) is performed. In addition, the variable time of "25 seconds, 30 seconds" can be selected both when a handover performance is performed and when a super reach performance without a handover performance is performed. Conversely, "22 seconds, 27 seconds" is a variable time that can be selected only when a super reach performance without a handover performance is performed.

If the result of step S4502 is positive, then in step S4503 it is determined whether the variable time is "25 seconds" or "30 seconds". If the result of step S4503 is positive, then in step S4504 a handover performance lottery is performed (using a corresponding random number counter and a table for determining whether or not a win has been made), and in step S4505 it is determined whether or not a win has been made.

If the answer is negative in step S4503, then in step S4506, it is determined whether the fluctuation time is "13 seconds," "16 seconds," or "20 seconds."

If the result of step S4505 is affirmative (if the takeover performance lottery is won), or if the result of step S4506 is affirmative, the takeover performance flag is set to ON in step S4507.

In the next step S4508, a process is performed to determine the pattern of the handover performance. In other words, basically, depending on the change time, it is determined which combination and how long the pseudo ball performance will continue, and depending on whether or not it is a big win, the outcome of the handover performance is determined. In this example, a scenario progress memory area is provided with memory areas divided into addresses 1 to 6 (this value is an upper limit set for each model. In this example, it is assumed that a maximum of 6 pseudo ball performances will be performed as a handover performance corresponding to one change display) corresponding to each scene of the handover performance, and where and which color pseudo balls will be derived from the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403 are stored in order, and the memory area corresponding to the ongoing pseudo ball performance or the subsequent pseudo ball performance display is indicated by a pointer.

In addition, when a takeover effect occurs from a state in which the reserved icon 461 is displayed, the pseudo ball FB to be used in the pseudo ball effect is determined according to the color of the reserved icon 461 (in this example, it is a display in a state that imitates a game ball, and the color may change). Furthermore, whether or not to change the type (color in this example) of the pseudo ball FB (or pseudo ball display) during the takeover effect is also determined (by referencing the content of the takeover effect and the upper limit rank memory area, etc.). In addition, details of patterns such as connecting effects are determined by pattern lottery.

In addition, before the pseudo ball performance starts, the display of the launch of the game ball (pseudo ball) on the decorative pattern display device 42, the display of the performance on the sub display device 48, and the display of the light-emitting performance section 47a are performed, and during that time, preparations for the pseudo ball performance are made. For example, in the transition performance on the decorative pattern display device 42 between the first performance passage 421 and the second performance passage 422, if the color of the pseudo ball display changes from silver (gray) to blue, a silver pseudo ball FB is set at the upper end (entrance) of the first performance passage 421, and a blue pseudo ball FB is set at the upper end (entrance) of the second performance passage 422. In addition, when the silver pseudo ball FB is used, it is determined whether the silver ball flag is on or not, and if it is on, a process of using the silver pseudo ball FB in the upper storage room 408 and a process of turning off the silver ball flag are performed. On the other hand, if it is off, the process uses the silver pseudo-ball FB in the lower storage room 408 and turns on the silver ball flag.

In the next step S4509, the scenario control timer and lap timer are set as remaining time measurement means (remaining time grasping means, grasping means configuration). The scenario timer checks the end timing of each scene of the handover performance, and here, a value is set corresponding to the start of the variable display, the launch display of the decorative pattern display device 42, the performance display of the sub display device 48, and the guidance display consisting of the display of the light-emitting performance section 47a (in this example, the time is constant (e.g., 7 seconds)). The scenes of the handover performance are divided into an opening scene of the guidance display, a first corresponding scene consisting of a pseudo-ball performance in the first performance passage 421 and a transition performance (or a performance at the end of the handover performance), a second corresponding scene consisting of a pseudo-ball performance in the second performance passage 422 and a transition performance (or a performance at the end of the handover performance), a third corresponding scene consisting of a pseudo-ball performance in the third performance passage 423 and a transition performance (or a performance at the end of the handover performance), a fourth corresponding scene consisting of a pseudo-ball performance in the fourth performance passage 424 and a transition performance (or a performance at the end of the handover performance), and a final scene consisting of a pseudo-ball performance in the lower unit 403 and a transition performance.

The lap timer is provided to grasp the difference between the target time and the actual time of the pseudo-ball performance, and a value corresponding to the time (target time) until the end of each pseudo-ball performance is set here. The lap timer continues to count even if its value becomes negative (even after the target time has passed). Note that in this example, there is only one lap timer, but it is also possible to provide lap timers corresponding to the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403, respectively.

Then, in step S4510, the handover upper limit counter and the handover control counter are set to know how many times the pseudo-ball performance has been performed out of the total number of times, and then this process is terminated. That is, the number of times the pseudo-ball performance is performed in the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403 is set. For example, after the guidance display, the pseudo-ball performance is performed in the first performance passage 421 (in the pseudo-ball display (connecting performance) of the decorative pattern display device 42 that follows), and if the setting is such that the handover performance ends, the handover upper limit counter is set to "1". Furthermore, for example, if, after the guidance display, a pseudo-ball performance is performed (once each) in the first performance passage 421 and the second performance passage 422 and the handover performance ends, the handover upper limit counter is set to "2", if, after the guidance display, a pseudo-ball performance is performed in the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, and the third performance passage 423 and the handover performance ends, the handover upper limit counter is set to "3", if, after the guidance display, a pseudo-ball performance is performed in the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, and the fourth performance passage 424 and the handover performance ends, the handover upper limit counter is set to "4", and if, after the guidance display, a pseudo-ball performance is performed in the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403 and the handover performance ends, the handover upper limit counter is set to "5". In addition, the handover control counter is set to "0" across the board.

If the result of step S4502 is negative, if the result of step S4505 is negative, or if the result of step S4506 is negative, then in step S4511, a presentation pattern for the variable display other than the handover presentation is determined. Then, this process ends.

Next, the takeover performance execution process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. First, in step S4601, it is determined whether the takeover performance flag is set to ON. If the result of step S4601 is NO, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4601 is positive, then in step S4602, the scenario control timer and the lap timer are decremented by 1. In the following step S4603, it is determined whether the value of the scenario control timer is 0. If the result of step S4603 is positive, then in step S4604, the value of the handover control counter is incremented by 1, and a pointer indicating one of the six memory areas in the scenario progress memory area is updated.

In the next step S4605, it is determined whether the value of the handover control counter is greater than the value of the handover upper limit counter. If the result of step S4605 is negative, the pattern of the connecting effect is determined in step S4606. At this point, the preparation for the pseudo-ball effect has already been completed, as will be described in more detail later.

In addition, in the process of determining the transition effect, first it is determined whether the value of the handover control counter is the same as the value of the handover upper limit counter. If they are the same, a pattern that ends the transition effect is set, and if they are different, a pattern that continues the transition effect is set. Furthermore, when setting the end pattern and the continuation pattern, the value of the handover control counter, etc. is confirmed, and the time, content, etc. are set. In addition, whether the transition effect will continue to a pseudo-ball effect that was performed, and to which pseudo-ball effect it will be connected (or not) is determined by referring to the memory contents, etc., of the area of the memory area of the scenario progression memory area indicated by the pointer.

In the next step S4607, the scenario control timer is set to a value corresponding to the time of the next scene, and the lap timer is set to a value corresponding to the time (target time) of the pseudo-ball presentation of the next scene. After that, in step S4608, a process is performed to start the pseudo-ball presentation, and this process ends.

Also, if step S4605 returns a positive answer, i.e., if the takeover performance is complete, step S4609 turns off the takeover performance flag and then ends this process.

If the result of step S4603 is negative, i.e., the current scene is not at the stage of ending (the pseudo-ball performance is in progress), then in step S4610, it is determined whether or not the end point detection switch has been detected. Note that the performance corridors 421 to 424 and the lower unit 403 are each provided with an end point detection switch.

If the result of step S4610 is negative, the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S4610 is positive, the process proceeds to step S4611, where the time difference between the target time for the pseudo-ball effect is calculated. In other words, the value of the lap timer is referenced to determine how much the time difference is shorter or longer than the target time.

In the next step S4612, the time lag of the pseudo ball effect calculated in step S4611 is set to be absorbed in the transition effect. For example, in the transition effect performed by the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42, if a cut-in effect is performed in which a character is introduced with a predetermined line, the time of the cut-in effect is adjusted. This absorbs the "lag" and ends the scene at the scheduled time. Of course, time adjustment can be performed in an effect other than the cut-in effect (speeding up or slowing down the progress speed of the pseudo ball display. Reducing or increasing obstacles, making them simple or difficult. Introducing characters or devices that get in the way, or characters or devices that assist. etc.). The "lag" of the pseudo ball effect of the lower unit 403 is eliminated by the display effect of the big win instruction in the decorative pattern display device 42 performed during the remaining time of the variable display corresponding to the transition effect (adjusting the length of the display effect).

In the next step S4613, a process is performed to start the transition effect. After that, in step S4614, it is determined whether the value of the handover control counter is the same as the value of the handover upper limit counter. If the determination in step S4614 is affirmative, that is, if it is the final scene of the handover effect and there is no next pseudo-ball effect, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of step S4614 is negative, then in step S4615, preparations are made for the pseudo ball presentation of the next scene. In other words, the pseudo ball presentation of this embodiment is performed by passing a predetermined type of pseudo ball FB through the connecting passage 406a of the presentation passage member 406 (or through the lower unit 403), and since the type of pseudo ball FB is determined at the start of the variable display, the corresponding pseudo ball FB is set at the upper end (entrance) of the corresponding presentation passage member 406 based on this determination (for the lower unit 403, the corresponding pseudo ball FB is set above the first connecting passage 434).

As described above, in the handover performance, it is possible to freely set which of the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, and the fourth performance passage 424 will be used in which order. For example, if the change time corresponding to the handover performance is short, it is desirable to provide not only a pattern in which the pseudo-ball performance ends in failure at an early stage, but also a pattern in which a shortcut (for example, the first performance passage 421 →, the fourth performance passage 424 → the lower unit 403) is taken and the performance ends in success. In other words, the connecting performance (pseudo-ball display performance) that connects the pseudo-ball performances of the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403 is performed by the decorative pattern display device 42, so that the pseudo-ball performances can be freely and effortlessly connected. Furthermore, by creating a pattern in which the pseudo-ball FB flows backwards (for example, from the first performance passage 421 to the third performance passage 423 to the second performance passage 422), the variety of performances can be significantly increased (however, "backflow" here does not mean flowing backwards from the lower end side to the upper end side of the connecting passage 406a of the performance passage member 406).

In addition, the final result of the handover performance is either or both of the following in the case of "success": a pattern indicated by the decorative pattern display device 42 (the lower unit 403 is used to indicate the type of big win) and a pattern indicated by the lower unit 403 being led out with a pseudo ball FB, and in the case of "failure", the decorative pattern display device 42 is instructed (it is difficult to tell just by the fact that the pseudo ball FB does not appear). Furthermore, with regard to the instruction as to whether or not to continue the pseudo ball performance in the middle, in the case of "success (continue)", either or both of the following instructing: a pattern indicated by the decorative pattern display device 42 and a pattern indicated by the next movable role movement area 404 (performance passage member 406) are instructed, and in the case of "failure", the decorative pattern display device 42 is instructed.

For example, a scenario memory area may be provided that stores which of the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403 will be used in which scene, and when the variable display starts (during the handover performance pattern determination process), values indicating the use of the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403 may be stored in the memory area corresponding to each scene, and as the handover performance progresses, the pseudo-ball performance and the connecting performance may be set by referring to the memory in the scenario memory area corresponding to the value of the handover control counter (or by providing pointers corresponding to each memory area in the scenario memory area and based on the information in the memory area pointed to by the pointers).

In this embodiment, the difference between the remaining time of the handover performance that may occur in the pseudo-ball performance and the remaining time of the corresponding variable display is completely resolved during the variable display, but it may be configured to carry over the resolution of "(at least a part of) the difference" after the variable display. For example, after the variable display, the time to inform of the start of the jackpot state (the beginning of the jackpot state) may be adjusted to be longer or shorter. In the case of a longer deviation, the handover performance may be continued even after the variable display of the next special display device 43a, 43b has started (the variable display of the next decorative pattern will be shorter). In the case of a shorter deviation, the variable display of the next decorative pattern may be started even though the variable display of the next special display device 43a, 43b has not started (the variable display of the next decorative pattern will be longer).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3909, the lighting pattern of the lamps and electric decorations is set to synchronize with the display performance performed by the decorative pattern display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display performance performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. In addition, when audio-related commands such as an error notification are sent from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3910.

In step S3911, control settings for the customer waiting effect and other processes are performed. In other words, if the state where the player is not playing continues for a specified time, the device is configured to switch to a customer attraction mode or an energy saving mode, and the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to derive a demo screen display in which the decorative patterns are not displayed (instead, a series of videos or still images are displayed) or the screen is darkened as a customer waiting effect.

In step S3912, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3912 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative pattern display device 42 displays a changing decorative pattern.

After steps S3905 to S3912 are executed every 2 msec, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3913, where it is judged whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 553. The information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control device 261.

If no information about the power outage is stored, the process proceeds to step S3914, where it is determined whether or not RAM 553 has been corrupted. If RAM 553 has not been corrupted, the process returns to step S3901, and normal processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 553 has been corrupted, the process is put into an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913 that the power failure occurrence information is to be stored, power failure processing is executed in step S3915. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring and each output port is turned off. In addition, the stored information on the power failure occurrence is erased. After the power failure processing is executed, the processing is looped infinitely.

As described above in detail, according to the first embodiment, the pseudo-ball performance (movable role performance) using the pseudo-ball FB as a movable role object allows the viewer to enjoy a performance that is different in style from the performance display by a display device (such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device). Furthermore, a connecting performance is performed by the pseudo-ball display of the decorative pattern display device 42 in such a manner that the behavior of the pseudo-ball FB that was moving through either the first performance passage 421 and the third performance passage 423 of the left unit 401, or the second performance passage 422 and the fourth performance passage 424 of the right unit 402 (as well as the lower unit 403) is taken over, and the behavior of the pseudo-ball FB of another performance passage 421, 422, 423, 424 is taken over. For this reason, (although the pseudo-ball performances in each of the performance passages 421, 422, 423, 424 may have fewer performance patterns than performances using a display device), it is possible to combine the pseudo-ball performances in multiple performance passages 421, 422, 423, 424 to diversify the performance, and further increase the variety of performances in the connecting performances that connect the pseudo-ball performances in the multiple performance passages 421, 422, 423, 424. Therefore, while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of each performance passage 421, 422, 423, 424, it is possible to derive a series of magnificent performances that combine analog performances in which the user's eyes follow the behavior of the pseudo-ball FB and experience joy and sorrow, and digital performances that display virtual behaviors of the pseudo-ball that are physically difficult to perform and skillfully connect the behavior of the pseudo-ball between the pseudo-ball performances (by adjusting the time, position, etc.), thereby improving the interest.

Furthermore, by dividing the pseudo-ball effects into multiple parts, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of each pseudo-ball effect. Furthermore, by sandwiching a transition effect between the pseudo-ball effects, it is possible to eliminate the misalignment of the pseudo-ball effects in the transition effect. In addition, by performing the transition effect on the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to derive bold transition effects that are impossible to perform in analog (for example, those that are physically impossible), and the range of the series of effects can be greatly expanded. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly while incorporating analog effects, and interest can be increased.

The start and end points of each movable feature movement area 404, including the connecting passages 406a of the performance passages 421, 422, 423, and 424, are located behind the decorative pattern display device 42, and are not visible or are difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to have the pseudo ball FB wait at the start point before the pseudo ball performance, and it is possible to more smoothly connect the pseudo ball performance with the transition performance before and after the pseudo ball performance.

Also, an end point detection switch 416 is provided to detect the pseudo ball FB approaching the end point of each movable feature movement area 404. This makes it possible to know when the pseudo ball FB has reached the end point of the movable feature movement area 404, and allows for a smoother connection between the behavior of the pseudo ball FB in the movable feature movement area 404 and the transitional performance following the pseudo ball performance. This allows for a spectacular performance that combines the pseudo ball performance and the transitional performance to be performed with precise timing, improving the performance, etc. It also makes it possible to know when the pseudo ball FB is stuck in the middle of the movable feature movement area 404.

In addition, in this embodiment, four performance passage members 406 are provided, namely, two performance passage members 406 (first performance passage 421 and third performance passage 423) of the left unit 401 and two performance passage members 406 (second performance passage 422 and fourth performance passage 424) of the right unit 402, and a pseudo ball FB is prepared in each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for operating the pseudo ball FB in each movable role movement area 404, shorten the time to circulate the pseudo ball FB (the time until the pseudo ball FB can be set at the starting point after being used in the pseudo ball performance), etc. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the pseudo ball FB, and improve convenience when the movable role movement area 404 and its related parts need to be replaced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each have two silver (gray) pseudo ball FBs used as default pseudo ball FBs. This prevents the frequently used pseudo ball FBs from deteriorating significantly, causing the left unit 401 or the right unit 402 to become unusable (requiring replacement). Furthermore, the diameter of the pseudo ball FB is configured to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it relatively easy to see the pseudo ball FB, allowing players to enjoy the pseudo ball presentation even more.

In addition, in the transition performance performed by the decorative pattern display device 42, not only can the pseudo-ball performance performed in the order of the first performance passage 421 → second performance passage 422 → third performance passage 423 → fourth performance passage 424 be connected (basic movement pattern), but it is also possible to move the pseudo-ball display from the lower movable role movement area 404 to the upper movable role movement area 404, such as the second performance passage 422 → first performance passage 421, or to skip a step, such as the first performance passage 421 → third performance passage 423, or the first performance passage 421 → fourth performance passage 424 (or the lower unit 403) (applied movement pattern). Therefore, it is possible to relatively increase the variation of the transition performance in which the pseudo-ball performance and the transition performance are performed together, and it is possible to fully bring out the good points of the pseudo-ball performance device 49, suppress monotony, and increase interest.

Furthermore, if a gap occurs between the pseudo-ball performance and the variable time (if the value of the lap timer, which can measure the difference between the target time of each pseudo-ball performance, becomes other than "0" at the end of each pseudo-ball performance), the time gap of the pseudo-ball performance is eliminated in the subsequent transition performance. This allows the pseudo-ball performances to be connected more appropriately, and for example, when the period of the pseudo-ball performance and the variable time are matched, the time gap or inconsistency of the pseudo-ball performance can be eliminated as much as possible in the transition performance without any sense of incongruity. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the gap between the end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the handover performance is too large, or a specific handover performance does not make it in time for the end of the corresponding variable display and ends a while after the start of the next variable display, making it impossible to determine the correspondence between the handover performance and the variable display (making it impossible to determine what the handover performance is suggesting or teaching).

In addition, when eliminating the time "gap" of the pseudo-ball effect in a transitional performance, it is necessary to quickly calculate the time difference and generate a "pseudo-ball display" that corresponds to the pseudo-ball. In this regard, in a transitional performance, a nearly still image such as a cut-in display is inserted, and the time adjustment is performed here. This reduces the burden on display control.

In addition, a start solenoid 413 is provided corresponding to the start point of each movable role movement area 404 of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402. Therefore, a configuration can be adopted in which the pseudo ball FB stays at the start point, and the pseudo ball can be made to wait at the start point a little before the pseudo ball performance. Furthermore, the movement of the pseudo ball FB (pseudo ball performance) can be started at a timing that matches other performances. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the pseudo ball FB naturally (immediately) moves to the connecting passage 406a when the pseudo ball FB reaches the start point, for example, the initial movement of the pseudo ball FB in the movable role movement area 404 can be stabilized, and the moving speed of the pseudo ball FB moved to each movable role movement area 404 can also be appropriately adjusted.

The takeover performance is performed in such a manner that it takes over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the start winning devices 33a and 33b located below the variable display unit 35. Therefore, when a game ball enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b without a pending variable display, if a takeover performance is performed, the light-emitting means built into the start winning devices 33a and 33b emits light, the decorative pattern display device 42 displays the game ball (pseudo ball) being launched up to the sub-display device 48 above, the sub-display device 48 displays the pseudo ball being sent to the left unit 401 or right unit 402, and the light-emitting performance section 47a displays the light emitted from the sub-display device 48 toward the left unit 401 or right unit 402. On the other hand, when a hold variable display is executed and a handover effect is performed, a hold icon 461, which is a display of a pseudo-ball, is displayed as being launched up to the sub-display device 48 above, a display is made on the sub-display device 48 as the pseudo-ball is sent to the left unit 401 or right unit 402, and a light emission effect section 47a displays light emitting from the sub-display device 48 toward the left unit 401 or right unit 402.

In this way, a series of performance displays (guiding displays) (moving the focus area to guide the player's gaze) from the start winning devices 33a, 33b to the movable role movement area 404 (start point of the handover performance) of the left unit 401 or right unit 402 can further strengthen the connection between the ball entering the start winning devices 33a, 33b and the pseudo-ball performance of the left unit 401 or right unit 402. Therefore, it is possible to make it clearer that the behavior of the game ball that entered the start winning devices 33a, 33b is carried over to the handover performance, making it easier for players to understand what the handover performance is. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize the start point and start timing of the handover performance, allowing players to enjoy the handover performance more reliably. Furthermore, even if the start winning devices 33a, 33b and the start point of the handover performance are separated from each other, the two can be connected, which improves the design freedom regarding the placement of the start winning devices 33a, 33b and the start point of the handover performance.

In addition, by using the guidance display, the time from when the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b until the handover performance starts can be changed (adjusted) without any sense of incongruity. In that case, the handover performance can be derived at a suitable timing. Also, for example, compared to a case where the handover performance always starts immediately when it is decided to execute the handover performance, it is possible to avoid a situation where the handover performance interferes with other performances (especially in a configuration where the variable display is reserved and stored). Furthermore, it is possible to select the optimal start timing for the handover performance (taking into account the length of the handover performance, etc.), and it is possible to avoid a situation where the handover performance is unnecessarily extended by waiting for the start of the pseudo-ball performance, which leads to a decrease in performance. In addition, it is also possible to perform a performance that increases the expectation that a certain suggestion or instruction will be given in the handover performance by making the start of the handover performance more daunting.

Furthermore, if the time from when the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b until the handover performance starts is extended, the "guiding display" becomes a "waiting display" that informs the player that the handover performance is waiting to start. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the handover performance is waiting to start.

In addition, in this embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each include a storage member 408, and a mechanism is provided for moving the pseudo ball FB in a specified storage room 408 of the storage member 408 to the starting point of the movable role movement area 404 and launching it toward the connecting passage 406a, or returning the pseudo ball FB used in the pseudo ball performance to the original storage room 408 by operating the storage member 408. Therefore, the cycle of using the pseudo ball FB can be formed reliably and relatively smoothly. In particular, the presence of the storage member 408 that can take in and out the pseudo ball FB makes it possible to use multiple pseudo balls FB, improving convenience and performance, etc.

Furthermore, since the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each have two movable role movement areas 404 (performance passage members 406), it is possible to diversify the pseudo-ball performance, and to prevent it from becoming monotonous. In particular, for example, after a pseudo-ball performance is performed in the first performance passage 421 of the left unit 401, while a pseudo-ball performance is being performed in the second performance passage 422 of the right unit 402, preparations for the pseudo-ball performance in the third performance passage 423 of the left unit 401 can be fully made. Therefore, a grand pseudo-ball performance using multiple movable role movement areas 404 can be performed relatively smoothly. In addition, in each of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, the pseudo ball FB, the storage member 408, and the mechanism for operating the storage member 408 are commonly used in multiple movable role moving areas 404, so that the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 can be prevented from becoming larger, the number of parts can be increased, and the manufacturing workability can be reduced, while improving the convenience of managing the pseudo ball FB. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are basically the same, and are basically arranged relative to each other in a vertically inverted orientation. Therefore, the pseudo ball performance can be performed in an optimal and diverse manner while reducing manufacturing costs, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, by displacing the storage member 408 itself, the pseudo ball FB reaches the start point of the movable role movement area 404 while remaining stored in the storage member 408, and when the pseudo ball FB reaches the end point of the movable role movement area 404, it is already stored in the storage member 408. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exchange the movable role between the storage member 408 and the movable role movement area 404 while suppressing the complexity of the pseudo ball performance device 49.

In addition, the storage member 408 is provided with an auxiliary plate portion 412 that protrudes downward from the edge of the bottom surface on the side of the performance passage member 406, and can close the lower end of the connecting passage 406a even when the lowest storage room 408 is located at the start of the movable prop movement area 404. This makes it possible to avoid, for example, a situation in which the pseudo ball FB that has passed through the connecting passage 406a falls into the inner space of the main body portion 405 below the storage member 408. Also, since the auxiliary plate portion 412 is provided on the storage member 408, the passage on the end side of the movable prop movement area 404 can be opened and closed in conjunction with the displacement of the storage member 408, and the configuration and control can be simplified compared to, for example, a case in which a separate shutter or the like is provided.

In addition, each storage room 408 of the storage member 408 is associated with a type of pseudo ball FB. Therefore, while the pseudo ball FB can be managed in an orderly manner in the pseudo ball performance device 49, the pseudo ball performance can be diversified, and it is possible to make it easier to give predetermined suggestions and instructions in the pseudo ball performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance while suppressing the use of the wrong type of pseudo ball FB and the time required for selection when taking it out. In addition, although changing the type of pseudo ball FB is not as easy as changing it using a specified display means such as a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to make the player more interested. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid contact between pseudo balls FB, and it is possible to reduce damage and deterioration of the pseudo ball FB and improve its durability. In addition, the different types of movable parts include those that have different colors, patterns, sizes, shapes, materials, etc.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below, focusing on its characteristic features, with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 53, the pseudo-ball performance device 801 of this embodiment includes a rectangular cylindrical main body 802 extending vertically, a performance passage member 803 having a generally U-shaped tube shape with both ends connected to the main body 802, and a storage member 804 (rotating storage plate) for storing unused pseudo-balls FB. The performance passage member 803 is similar to the performance passage member 406 of the first embodiment, and includes a connecting passage 805 through which the pseudo-balls FB can pass, and is provided in pairs above and below one main body 802, as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the upper performance passage member 803 will also be referred to as the "upper performance passage member 806," and the lower performance passage member 803 will also be referred to as the "lower performance passage member 807."

As shown in FIG. 54, the storage member 804 of this embodiment has a portion between the double annular shape when viewed from the front, which is divided into eight equal parts along the circumferential direction, and each of the divided areas is a storage chamber 808 capable of storing a pseudo-sphere FB. As shown in FIG. 53, a storage motor 810 consisting of a stepping motor is connected to the center of the storage member 804 via a shaft 809.

As shown in FIG. 53, the inner and outer peripheral surfaces of the storage member 804 in each storage chamber 808 are inclined toward the center of the storage member 804 toward the surface side opposite the back surface side connected to the shaft 809. Furthermore, the storage chamber 808 is open on the front surface side of the storage member 804 and closed on the back surface side of the storage member 804. However, the storage member 804 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the pseudo-sphere FB stored in the storage chamber 808 can be seen from outside the storage member 804.

In this embodiment, the storage member 804 is connected to the surface of the main body 802 opposite to the side to which the performance passage member 803 is connected. Furthermore, the main body 802 is provided with a receiving port 811 and a return port 812 so that the predetermined storage room 808 at the highest position for rotating the storage member 804 and the predetermined storage room 808 at the lowest position communicate with the internal space of the main body 802. In addition, in this embodiment, the lower surface (inner bottom surface) of the storage room 808 at the lowest position and the lower edge of the return port 812 are located slightly below the floor surface of the lower end of the connecting passage 805 of the lower stage performance passage member 807. The receiving port 811 is provided at a height between the upper end and the lower end of the connecting passage 805 of the lower stage performance passage member 807.

The pseudo-ball performance device 801 of this embodiment is equipped with a first movable floor 813, a second movable floor 814, and a third movable floor 815, which are substantially rectangular plates that can be displaced up and down in the internal space of the main body 802. The second movable floor 814 is disposed below the first movable floor 813, and the third movable floor 815 is disposed below the second movable floor 814. The first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 are configured to have substantially the same shape and substantially the same size. In addition, although the outer dimensions of the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 are configured to be one size smaller than the inner dimensions of the main body 802 in the horizontal direction, it is impossible for the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 to be vertically interchangeable with each other.

As shown in FIG. 55, the first movable floor 813 is connected to a connecting rod 816 at one side, and the connecting rod 816 is inserted into a slit (not shown) formed in the main body 802 and extending in the vertical direction. In addition, adjacent to the main body 802, there are provided a pair of upper and lower pulleys 817, a rubber circular belt member 818 (such as a timing belt) that is hung on the pair of upper and lower pulleys 817, and a lifting motor 819 consisting of a stepping motor connected to one of the pulleys 817 (a roller chain and a sprocket, etc., are also acceptable). The connecting rod 816 is connected to a part of the circular belt member 818, and when the lifting motor 819 is driven to rotate the circular belt member 818, the first movable floor 813 is displaced up and down.

The second movable floor 814 is also provided with a drive mechanism similar to that of the first movable floor 813, and is provided on the opposite side of the main body 802 to the drive mechanism of the first movable floor 813. On the other hand, the third movable floor 815 only has a lifting solenoid 820 connected to its underside.

The first movable floor 813 is movable between a position where it is aligned with the floor surface of the upper end of the connecting passage 805 of the upper performance passage member 806, i.e., the starting position of the movable prop movement area 821 including the connecting passage 805 of the upper performance passage member 806 (hereinafter referred to as the "upper movable prop movement area 822"), and a position where it is aligned with the floor surface of the upper end of the connecting passage 805 of the lower performance passage member 807, i.e., the starting position of the movable prop movement area 821 including the connecting passage 805 of the lower performance passage member 807 (hereinafter referred to as the "lower movable prop movement area 823"), and a position where it is aligned with the lower edge of the receiving port 811 of the main body 802 (hereinafter referred to as the "receiving position").

In addition, a discharge prevention shutter 824 capable of restricting the movement of the pseudo ball FB is provided corresponding to the receiving port 811. Furthermore, a discharge sensor 825 capable of detecting the pseudo ball FB in the storage chamber 808 that is set to the highest position in the storage member 804 is provided. In other words, since the floor surface of the storage chamber 808 that is set to the highest position is inclined downward toward the receiving port 811, by opening the discharge prevention shutter 824, the pseudo ball FB in the storage chamber 808 that is set to the highest position is led out through the receiving port 811 to the first movable floor 813 (or the second movable floor 814) that is at the receiving position.

In addition, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 (upper surface, the placement surface of the pseudo ball FB) in this embodiment are inclined downward from the performance passage member 803 side toward the storage member 804 side. In this respect, in this embodiment, the first movable floor 813 (or the second movable floor 814) at the receiving position is located slightly below the lower edge of the receiving port 811, making it difficult for the pseudo ball FB led out from the receiving port 811 to return to the receiving port 811. Furthermore, when the discharge sensor 825 detects that the pseudo ball FB has been discharged from the storage room 808, the discharge prevention shutter 824 is closed. This prevents the pseudo ball FB placed on the first movable floor 813 (or the second movable floor 814) from returning to the receiving port 811.

The second movable floor 814 is movable between a position where it aligns with the floor surface of the lower end of the connecting passage 805 of the lower performance passage member 807, i.e., the end position of the lower-moving prop movement area 823, a receiving position, and a position where it aligns with the floor surface of the lower end of the connecting passage 805 of the upper performance passage member 806, i.e., the end position of the upper-moving prop movement area 822.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second movable floor 814, which is the end position of the lower-moving role movement area 823, is not only continuous with the floor surface of the lower end of the connecting passage 805 of the lower performance passage member 807 (or the second movable floor 814 is located slightly lower), but also continuous with the return port 812 provided in the main body 802 and the floor surface of the storage room 808, which is the lowest position of the storage member 804 (or the second movable floor 814 is located slightly higher). In other words, the end position of the lower-moving role movement area 823 in this embodiment is also the "return position" where the pseudo ball FB can be returned to the storage member 804. As described above, the upper surface of the second movable floor 814 is inclined downward toward the storage member 804, and the floor surface of the storage room 808, which is located at the lowest position, is also inclined downward away from the main body 802. Therefore, the pseudo ball FB placed on the second movable floor 814, which is located at the end position of the lower movable prop movement area 823, is stored in the storage room 808, which is located at the lowest position, via the return port 812, and after being stored in the storage room 808, it does not return to the return port 812.

Also, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a start solenoid 826 is provided as a start auxiliary means for displacing the pseudo ball FB located at the start of the upward moving type role movement area 822 and the downward moving type role movement area 823 toward the connecting passage 805. Therefore, even if the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 are inclined upward toward the performance passage member 803, the pseudo ball FB can be reliably sent to the connecting passage 805. Furthermore, an end point detection switch 827 is also provided as an end point detection means capable of detecting the pseudo ball FB just before it reaches the end point of the upward moving type role movement area 822 and the downward moving type role movement area 823.

In this embodiment, the inner space of the main body 802 corresponds to the communication passage. Furthermore, the position of the storage room 808 that is the highest position in the storage member 804 corresponds to the discharge position, and the position of the storage room 808 that is the lowest position corresponds to the receiving position. In addition, the upper movable type role movement area 822 corresponds to the first movable type role movement area (of means C described below), and the lower movable type role movement area 823 corresponds to the second movable type role movement area.

The third movable floor 815 is configured to be displaceable between the end position of the downwardly moving prop movement area 823 and a retreat position that is located lower than the end position of the downwardly moving prop movement area 823 and does not interfere with the second movable floor 814 that has been displaced to the end position of the downwardly moving prop movement area 823. In this embodiment, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the configuration for raising and lowering them constitute the preparation assistance means, and the second movable floor 814, the third movable floor 815, and the configuration for raising and lowering them constitute the storage assistance means.

Here, the manner of inserting and removing the pseudo ball FB when both the upward moving type part moving area 822 and the downward moving type part moving area 823 are used in one handover performance will be described. For example, when using a pseudo ball FB of the same color (e.g., blue) in the pseudo ball performance of the downward moving type part moving area 823 after the pseudo ball performance of the upward moving type part moving area 822, as shown in FIG. 56(a), first, in order to perform the pseudo ball performance in the upward moving type part moving area 822, the first movable floor 813 receives the blue pseudo ball FB at the receiving position, and then, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the starting point of the upward moving type part moving area 822, and the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the upward moving type part moving area 822. Then, the blue pseudo ball FB is moved to the end point of the upper movable prop movement area 822 via the connecting passage 805 of the upper performance passage member 806, so that the blue pseudo ball FB is placed on the second movable floor 814.

Next, in order to perform the pseudo-ball performance in the lower-moving role movement area 823, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the second movable floor 814 is moved to the start point of the lower-moving role movement area 823, and the third movable floor 815 is moved to the end point of the lower-moving role movement area 823. Then, by moving the blue pseudo-ball FB to the end point of the lower-moving role movement area 823 through the connecting passage 805 of the lower performance passage member 807, the blue pseudo-ball FB is stored in the storage member 804 through the third movable floor 815. In addition, a storage sensor 828 capable of detecting the pseudo-ball FB in the storage room 808, which is the lowest position of the storage member 804, is provided, and in this example, the storage of the pseudo-ball FB is confirmed by the detection information of the storage sensor 828, so that the handover performance is normally terminated.

Next, a case will be described in which a pseudo ball FB of a different color (e.g., green to red) is used in the pseudo ball performance in the lower moving type part moving area 823 after the pseudo ball performance in the upper moving type part moving area 822. First, as shown in FIG. 57(a), in order to perform the pseudo ball performance in the upper moving type part moving area 822, the first movable floor 813 receives the green pseudo ball FB at the receiving position, and then, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the upper moving type part moving area 822, and the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the upper moving type part moving area 822. Then, by moving the green pseudo ball FB to the end point of the upper moving type part moving area 822 through the connecting passage 805 of the upper stage performance passage member 806, the green pseudo ball FB is placed on the second movable floor 814.

Next, in order to perform the pseudo-ball performance in the lower-moving role movement area 823, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the receiving position to receive the red pseudo-ball FB. Furthermore, the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the lower-moving role movement area 823, and the green pseudo-ball FB is stored in the corresponding storage room 808. The second movable floor 814 is left at the end point of the lower-moving role movement area 823. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the lower-moving role movement area 823, and the red pseudo-ball FB is moved to the end point of the lower-moving role movement area 823 via the connecting passage 805 of the lower-stage performance passage member 807, so that the red pseudo-ball FB is stored in the storage member 804 via the second movable floor 814.

Next, a case will be described in which a pseudo-ball FB of a different color (e.g., green → red) is used in the pseudo-ball performance in the upward moving type part moving area 822 after the pseudo-ball performance in the downward moving type part moving area 823. First, as shown in FIG. 58(a), for the pseudo-ball performance in the upward moving type part moving area 822, the first movable floor 813 receives the red pseudo-ball FB at the receiving position, and then, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the first movable floor 813 is moved upward (e.g., to the starting point of the upward moving type part moving area 822), and the second movable floor 814 receives the green pseudo-ball FB at the receiving position in order to perform the pseudo-ball performance in the downward moving type part moving area 823. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the second movable floor 814 is moved to the starting point of the downward moving type part moving area 823, and the third movable floor 815 is moved to the end point of the downward moving type part moving area 823. Then, the green pseudo ball FB is moved to the end point of the lower movable prop movement area 823 via the connecting passage 805 of the lower performance passage member 807, and the green pseudo ball FB is stored in the storage member 804 via the third movable floor 815.

Next, in order to perform the pseudo ball performance in the upwardly moving role movement area 822, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the first movable floor 813 is moved to the start point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822, and the second movable floor 814 is moved to the end point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822. Then, the red pseudo ball FB is moved to the end point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822 via the connecting passage 805 of the upper performance passage member 806, so that the red pseudo ball FB is placed on the second movable floor 814.

In this embodiment, the transition effect of using the same color pseudo ball FB in the pseudo ball effect of the upward moving type part moving area 822 after the pseudo ball effect of the downward moving type part moving area 823 is performed only when two silver pseudo balls FB are used. Also, the manner in which the pseudo ball FB is inserted and removed in such a transition effect is the same as when a pseudo ball FB of a different color (e.g., green to red) is used in the pseudo ball effect of the upward moving type part moving area 822 after the pseudo ball effect of the downward moving type part moving area 823 (one of the pair of silver pseudo ball FBs is used in the pseudo ball effect of the downward moving type part moving area 823, and the other of the pair of pseudo ball FBs is used in the pseudo ball effect of the downward moving type part moving area 823). Furthermore, if the third movable floor 815 can be moved to the end point of the upward moving part movement area 822, and the first movable floor 813 can be displaced to a position that avoids interference with the pseudo ball FB placed on the second movable floor 814 located at the start point of the upward moving part movement area 822, it is possible to execute a handover performance in which a pseudo ball FB of the same color is used in the pseudo ball performance of the upward moving part movement area 822 after the pseudo ball performance of the downward moving part movement area 823, even if a pseudo ball FB other than the two silver pseudo balls FB is used.

As described above in detail, the second embodiment also basically achieves the same effects as the first embodiment. Furthermore, in this embodiment, by using the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814, the pseudo ball FB can be moved relatively smoothly between each movable part movement area 821 (upper movable part movement area 822 and lower movable part movement area 823) and the storage member 804, and the pseudo ball performance can proceed relatively smoothly. In addition, for example, as in the case of a single movable floor, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the movable floor does not arrive in time for the pseudo ball FB that starts moving from the starting point to reach the end point (or the movable floor needs to be operated quite quickly to make it in time). Furthermore, the mechanism for moving the pseudo ball FB to the starting point of the movable prop movement area 821 is also shared between the upper movable prop movement area 822 and the lower movable prop movement area 823, which makes it possible to improve convenience and performance while avoiding a complicated configuration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper stage performance passage member 806 (upper moving type role movement area 822) and the lower stage performance passage member 807 (lower moving type role movement area 823) are connected to the storage member 804 by the main body part 802 (inner space), and the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 are provided in the inner space of the main body part 802. Therefore, the transfer of the movable role between the storage member 804 and the start point and the end point of the movable role movement area 821 can be performed more smoothly. In addition, since the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 are provided in the inner space of the common main body part 802, the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 can also be used in common in the upper moving type role movement area 822 and the lower moving type role movement area 823. Therefore, the effect of improving the convenience of managing the pseudo ball FB can be more significantly achieved while suppressing the increase in size of the pseudo ball production device 801, the increase in the number of parts, and the decrease in manufacturing workability.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a third movable floor 815 is provided that can be displaced between the end point of the downward moving type role movement area 823 and a retreat position below the end point. For this reason, a first movable floor on which a pseudo ball FB is placed and a second movable floor 814 on which a pseudo ball FB is not placed are arranged at the start point and end point of the upward moving type role movement area 822, and after displacing the pseudo ball FB from the start point to the end point of the upward moving type role movement area 822, the second movable floor 814 is displaced to the start point of the downward moving type role movement area 823, so that the pseudo ball FB can be moved as close as possible to the upward moving type role movement area 822 and the downward moving type role movement area 823. Therefore, for example, the pseudo ball FB that moves through the upwardly movable role movement area 822 and reaches the end point can diversify the presentation, etc., compared to a configuration in which the pseudo ball FB passes through the storage member 804 once before reaching the start point of the downwardly movable role movement area 823.

In addition, due to the presence of the third movable floor 815, even if the pseudo ball FB placed on the second movable floor 814 arranged at the start point of the downward moving type role movement area 823 reaches the end point of the downward moving type role movement area 823, the pseudo ball FB can be received by the third movable floor 815 and reliably returned to the storage member 804. Furthermore, for example, after the pseudo ball performance in the downward moving type role movement area 823, a performance in which a pseudo ball performance in the upward moving type role movement area 822 is performed can be performed relatively smoothly.

The starting points of the upward movable part movement area 822 and the downward movable part movement area 823 are located at different positions from the receiving position. This allows the starting solenoid 826 to be appropriately installed (while avoiding interference with the storage member 804) in correspondence with each starting point, and also prevents the pseudo ball FB discharged from the storage member 804 from passing through the starting point of the movable part movement area 821 with its momentum and starting to move through the movable part movement area 821.

Furthermore, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 are inclined upward toward the connecting passage 805. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo ball FB is inadvertently displaced to the connecting passage 805 when the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 move to the starting point. In addition, when the second movable floor 814 and the third movable floor 815 move to the end point, the pseudo ball FB that has reached the end point is prevented from returning to the connecting passage 805 side, and when the second movable floor 814 and the third movable floor 815 move to the return position, the pseudo ball FB placed on the second movable floor 814 and the third movable floor 815 can be guided to the storage chamber 808 of the storage member 804, thereby avoiding a situation in which a separate drive mechanism is required to move the pseudo ball FB to the storage chamber 808 side.

In addition, the storage chambers 808 in this embodiment are configured in a disk shape when viewed from the front, and the storage chambers 808 are arranged in a ring shape. Therefore, in a configuration that handles multiple types of pseudo spheres FB, the target pseudo sphere FB can be efficiently put in and taken out of the storage member 804 in which multiple pseudo spheres FB are stored, while suppressing the increase in size of the storage member 804. In other words, for example, when eight storage chambers for pseudo spheres FB are provided, if the storage chambers are arranged in a straight line, the discharge section needs to be relatively displaced so as to straddle seven storage chambers from one end storage chamber to the other end storage chamber, but if they are arranged in a circle, it is only necessary to relatively displace it so as to straddle four storage chambers 808.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when each storage chamber 808 is in the discharge position (the highest position in this example) where the pseudo ball FB is discharged (directed toward the main body 802), the floor surface of the storage chamber 808 is inclined downward toward the main body 802. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where a separate drive mechanism is required to move (e.g., push) the pseudo ball FB toward the main body 802 in order to discharge the pseudo ball FB stored in the storage chamber 808 that has been displaced to the discharge position from the storage chamber 808.

Furthermore, when each storage chamber 808 is in the receiving position (the lowest position in this example) where the pseudo ball FB is received, the floor surface of the storage chamber 808 is inclined downward away from the main body 802. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where a separate shutter is required to regulate the displacement of the pseudo ball FB in order to maintain the storage state of the pseudo ball FB stored in the storage chamber 808 that has been displaced to the receiving position. This makes it possible to execute the pseudo ball performance relatively smoothly while simplifying the configuration.

In addition, a discharge prevention shutter 824 is provided in correspondence with the receiving port 811 provided in the main body 802 to connect the storage chamber 808 in the discharge position with the internal space of the main body 802. By providing the discharge prevention shutter 824, it is possible to prevent the pseudo ball FB stored in the storage chamber 808 in the discharge position from being inadvertently discharged from the storage chamber 808 (the pseudo ball FB that is not scheduled for discharge), or to prevent the pseudo ball FB from being displaced from the main body 802 in a direction in which it is stored in the storage chamber 808 in the discharge position. Therefore, the management control of the pseudo ball FB can be performed more reliably and smoothly.

If it is only necessary to prevent the pseudo-ball FB discharged from the storage chamber 808 in the discharge position to the first movable floor 813 or the second movable floor 814 from returning to the storage chamber 808 in the discharge position, it is possible to displace the storage member 804 to a position where none of the storage chambers 808 coincide with the discharge position. However, in the process of positioning a specific storage chamber 808 in the discharge position, when a storage chamber 808 other than the specific storage chamber 808 coincides with the discharge position, it is not possible to prevent the pseudo-ball FB stored in such storage chamber 808 from being discharged to the main body 802 side.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment will be described below with reference to Fig. 59, focusing on its characteristic parts. As shown in Fig. 59, the variable display unit 851 of this embodiment includes a decorative pattern display device 852 as a takeover performance means provided in the center of the game area (game board 30), a specific area ball entry means including a specific area 854 into which a game ball moving (flowing down) in the game area can enter, and a specific winning unit 853 as a lottery means. The specific winning unit 853 includes an upper area 855 provided above the decorative pattern display device 852, a separate area 856 constituting a takeover performance corresponding section located to the side (on the right side as viewed) of the decorative pattern display device 852 and behind the semi-transparent game board 30, and a lower area 857 located behind the lower part of the decorative pattern display device 852.

In the upper area 855, a pair of ball entry openings 861 (entrances) are formed on both the left and right sides, which serve as entrances for game balls moving through the game area to enter the specific area 854. The specific winning unit 853 also includes a pair of left and right blade members 862 (entrance opening/closing means) that move between a closed position that closes each ball entry opening 861 and an open position that opens it, and a blade solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the blade members 862. When the blade members 862 are displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 861 is closed, the specific winning unit 853 is closed and ball entry into the specific area 854 is not possible. On the other hand, when the blade members 862 are displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 861 is opened, the specific winning unit 853 is opened and ball entry into the specific area 854 is permitted.

The blade members 862 are opened for a predetermined time (e.g., 1.8 seconds) when a ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b and a small prize is won in a win/lose lottery based on the ball entry. In this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 862 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, so that when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, the other is also in the closed position.

In addition, there is provided a ball entry detection switch 864 that can detect game balls that enter through the left and right ball entry openings 861. Regardless of whether the ball enters the upper area 855 through the left or right ball entry opening 861, it is discharged from the upper area 855 through a common discharge hole 865. In addition, there is provided a handover detection switch 866 that detects game balls that enter the discharge hole 865.

The game balls discharged from the upper area 855 are guided to the separation area 856. The separation area 856 is equipped with a first branch 871 where the game ball passage branches into two, a second branch 872 where the game ball passage branches into three, and a sub-allocation device 873. The first branch 871 is provided with a first allocation device 874 that periodically changes state between a state where the game ball is guided to the second branch 872 side and a state where the game ball is guided to the outside of the specific winning unit 853, and ultimately to the outside of the game area. In this example, in the first branch 871, half of the game balls are guided to a safe passage leading to the second branch 872.

Furthermore, it is equipped with a first safe ball detection switch 875 that detects a game ball moving through a game ball passage (safe passage) that continues (connects, leads to) the second branch 872 of the first branch 871, and a first out ball detection switch 876 that detects a game ball moving through a game ball passage (out passage) that leads to the outside of the specific winning unit 853 of the first branch 871. Furthermore, when a game ball is guided to the out passage, 15 winning balls are awarded.

The second branch 872 is provided with a second distribution device 877 in the shape of a disk with a slope that is lower in the center. The second distribution device 877 is provided with a chance hole 878 leading to the lower area 857, a sub-challenge hole 879 leading to the sub-distribution device 873, and three missed holes 880 leading to the outside of the specific winning unit 853 and, in turn, to the outside of the game area. The chance hole 878, the sub-challenge hole 879, and the three missed holes 880 are all the same size and are provided at equal positions centered on the center of the second distribution device 877. In this example, in the second branch 872, 1/5 of the balls are guided to the game ball passage (chance passage) leading to the lower area 857, and 1/5 of the balls are guided to the game ball passage (challenge passage) leading to the sub-distribution device 873.

Furthermore, it is equipped with a chance ball detection switch 881 that detects a game ball that has entered the chance hole 878, a challenge ball detection switch 882 that detects a game ball that has entered the sub-challenge hole 879, and a second out ball detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball that has entered the miss hole 880. When a game ball enters the miss hole 880, 15 prize balls are awarded.

The game ball that enters the chance hole 878 is shot out by the chance solenoid 883, which changes between an excited state and a non-excited state at regular intervals, and is guided to the lower area 857. In other words, the game ball that enters the chance hole 878 is guided to a position approximately the same height as the lower area 857, or to a position lower than the game ball rolling surface of the lower area 857. For this reason, the chance solenoid 883 is used to deliver the game ball to the lower area 857. Note that instead of a solenoid, a different drive mechanism (such as a conveyor-like device) may be used to guide the game ball to the lower area 857, or the game ball may be configured to be guided to the lower area 857 using potential energy alone.

The lower part of the display part of the decorative pattern display device 852 is a transparent liquid crystal display part (hereinafter referred to as "transparent display area 891"). Normally, an opaque display is also derived in the transparent display area 891, and together with the other areas, the entire display part of the decorative pattern display device 852 displays the performance. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the chance ball detection switch 881 is detected, the transparent display area 891 becomes transparent, and the lower area 857 of the specific winning unit 853 arranged on the back side is made visible from the front. In addition, the last-minute detection switch 892, which is guided from the second branch 872 and detects the game ball just before it enters the lower area 857, is provided at a position above the transparent display area 891. In addition, a light (not shown) is provided to illuminate the lower area 857, and when the lower area 857 becomes visible from the front based on the detection of the last-minute detection switch 892, the light in the lower area 857 is turned on.

The lower area 857 is provided with a final allocation device 893 that is disk-shaped with a slope that is lower in the center. The final allocation device 893 is provided with a V winning hole 894 and two miss holes 895. The V winning hole 894 and the two miss holes 895 are the same size and are provided at equal positions centered on the center of the final allocation device 893. In this example, in the lower area 857, one-third of the game balls enter the V winning hole 894.

Although not shown in the figure, a V winning detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the V winning hole 894 and a miss detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the miss hole 895 are provided. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 894 (when the V winning detection switch detects), 15 prize balls are awarded and a jackpot state is granted (the first round of the jackpot state corresponds to a small win state in which the ball entry opening 861 is open for 1.8 seconds, leading to the second round and onward). It should be noted that 15 prize balls are also awarded when a game ball enters the miss hole 895.

In addition, the sub-allocation device 873, to which the game balls that enter the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second branch 872 are guided, is disk-shaped with a slope that is lower in the center. The sub-allocation device 873 is provided with a sub-V winning hole 896 and five miss holes 897. The sub-V winning hole 896 and the five miss holes 897 are all the same size and are provided at equal positions centered on the center of the sub-allocation device 873. In this example, in the lower area 857, the game balls enter the sub-V winning hole 896 at a rate of 1/6.

Although not shown in the figure, there is a sub-V winning detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the sub-V winning hole 896, and a miss detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the miss hole 897. When a game ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896 (when the sub-V winning detection switch detects), 15 winning balls are awarded and a jackpot state is granted (the first round of the jackpot state corresponds to a small jackpot state in which the ball entry opening 861 is open for 1.8 seconds, leading to the second round and onward).

The game ball passage in the separation area 856 is made of a transparent material, and the second distribution device 877 and the sub-distribution device 873 are shaped to open forward, so that the game balls moving through the separation area 856 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. However, the semi-transparent game board 30 is located in front of the separation area 856, reducing visibility, and further, such visibility may be reduced depending on the light emission state (light reflection, etc.) of the various light-emitting means.

In addition, even if a game ball enters the missing hole 897, 15 prize balls are awarded. In addition, in this embodiment, the V prize hole 894 and the sub V prize hole 896 correspond to the second special prize ball section, and the other discharge parts from the specific area 854 correspond to the first special prize ball section. Furthermore, the V prize switch and the sub V prize switch correspond to the second special prize ball detection means, and the switch provided corresponding to the discharge parts from the other specific area 854 corresponds to the first special prize ball detection means. In addition, the big win state (continuation from the small win state to the big win state and 15 prize balls) corresponds to the second award, and the 15 prize balls correspond to the first award. In addition, various detection switches provided corresponding to the separation area 856 correspond to the progress detection means. Furthermore, the lower area 857 corresponds to the settlement section, and the last-minute detection switch 892 corresponds to the handover performance end detection means. In addition, the passages leading to the V winning hole 894 and the sub V winning hole 896 in the specific area 854 correspond to the main passages, and the rest correspond to the loss passages, and the first allocation device 874 and the second allocation device 877 correspond to the allocation means.

Next, the gameplay of this embodiment and the presentation of the variable display unit 851 will be described. First, in this example, the first start winning device 33a, which is located below the variable display unit 851 and has no blade member, the second start winning device 33b, which is located below the first start winning device 33a and has a blade member, the variable winning device 32, which is located below the second start winning device 33b, and the through gate 34, which is located in the left side area (left of the variable display unit 851), are provided. In the winning/losing lottery, which is performed based on the game ball entering the start winning device 33a or 33b, there is a 1/300 chance of winning the jackpot state (so-called a direct hit jackpot), and if the jackpot state is not won, there is a 1/5 chance of winning the small win state. In addition, in this embodiment, there is no probability mode, and there is a normal mode and a time-saving mode (for 20 or 50 variable displays). There are two types of jackpot states: a 7-round jackpot state in which a time-saving mode of 20 variable displays is given after the jackpot state ends, and a 7-round jackpot state in which a time-saving mode of 50 variable displays is given. For the second to seventh rounds, the round ends when the variable winning device 32 (15 winning balls per win) is opened for 30 seconds or when 10 balls are won.

When a small jackpot is won, the blade members 862 are in the open position for 1.8 seconds, allowing the ball to enter the specific area 854. The game ball that enters the specific area 854 through the ball entry opening 861 is detected by the ball entry detection switch 864, and its behavior in the upper area 855 is visible from the front. Based on the detection of the ball entry detection switch 864 in the upper area 855, a performance display notifying the start of the performance is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 852 (the entire display section). The game ball moving through the upper area 855 enters the discharge hole 865 and enters the separation area 856.

The detached area 856, which is located to the side of the decorative pattern display device 852 and behind the translucent game board 30, has low visibility from the front, making it difficult to see the game ball moving through the detached area 856. In particular, when the decorative pattern display device 852 is displaying a performance, the frames surrounding the decorative pattern display device 852, the upper area 855, and the lower area 857 emit light, making it even more difficult to see (it can be seen if you get closer).

In addition, when the game ball enters the discharge hole 865 (when the takeover detection switch 866 is detected), the decorative pattern display device 852 starts a takeover performance that takes over the behavior of the game ball. For example, the takeover performance display may include a performance display in which the pseudo ball (pseudo ball display) may fall off the path, a performance display in which characters appear and compete for the pseudo ball display, and a performance display in which the pseudo ball overcomes an obstacle of its own volition (a display of a changing decorative pattern may be displayed in parallel). In this embodiment, the takeover detection switch 866 of the discharge hole 865 constitutes the entry detection means, but the ball entry detection switch 864 may be used as the entry detection means, and the decorative pattern display device 852 may be configured to start the takeover performance when the ball entry detection switch 864 is detected, and the game ball detected by the ball entry detection switch 864 may be configured to enter the departure area 856 as it is.

After that, either the first safe ball detection switch 875 or the first out ball detection switch 876 of the first branch 871 is detected, and the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 852 is changed based on this detection. That is, when the first out ball detection switch 876 is detected, the decorative pattern display device 852 ends the performance display in a mode indicating "miss." On the other hand, when the first safe ball detection switch 875 is detected, the performance display is continued (such as deriving a display to clear a small obstacle).

Furthermore, when the gaming ball that has reached the second branch 872 enters the chance hole 878 of the second distribution device 877, the decorative pattern display device 852 performs a corresponding handover effect (for example, drawing attention to the lower area 857 and displaying the possibility that a gaming ball may appear) based on the detection of the chance ball detection switch 881, and then, based on the detection of the last-minute detection switch 892, the transparent display area 891 of the decorative pattern display device 852 is made transparent (transparent), allowing the lower area 857 to be viewed. In this example, the moment the gaming ball is guided to the lower area 857 is the state most likely to result in a jackpot.

After that, if the game ball guided to the lower area 857 enters the V winning hole 894, a display is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 852 informing the player that a jackpot state has occurred (for example, this may be displayed only in the area above the transparent display area 891, or on the entire display), and the jackpot state is initiated.

In addition, when the game ball that has reached the second branch 872 enters the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second distribution device 877, the decorative pattern display device 852 performs a corresponding display performance based on the detection of the challenge ball detection switch 882. In this example, even if the game ball enters the sub-challenge hole 879, the transparent display area 891 of the decorative pattern display device 852 is not made transparent (transparent), and the performance display is continued on the entire display unit of the decorative pattern display device 852. Then, when the game ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896, a display is performed on the decorative pattern display device 852 (entire display unit) to teach the occurrence of a jackpot state, and the jackpot state is started. In this example, the challenge ball detection switch 882 includes a first challenge ball detection switch 882a on the upstream side and a second challenge ball detection switch 882b on the downstream side. In addition, when the game ball enters the specific area 854, the next variable display is not performed.

Here, an example of the takeover performance will be described. When the game ball enters the discharge hole 865 (when the takeover detection switch 866 is detected), the takeover performance starts on the decorative pattern display device 852, and the game ball (display of the game ball) starts sliding, starting the performance of jumping over a cliff. When the first safe ball detection switch 875 is detected, a performance display of jumping over the cliff and proceeding further down is generated (the next mission starts), and when the first out ball detection switch 876 is detected, a performance display of falling over a cliff is generated.

After the first safe ball detection switch 875 is detected, the performance of moving through the forest starts. Then, when the game ball enters the out hole 880 of the second distribution device 877 (when the second out ball detection switch is detected), the player reaches a dead end and is unable to proceed, and a performance display of the player being captured by someone is derived. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the chance hole 878 of the second distribution device 877 (when the chance ball detection switch 881 is detected), a performance display of the player coming out to an open area, being attacked by a monster, and escaping to the front side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 852 (the lower area 857 side) starts. After that, based on the detection of the last minute detection switch 892, a performance display of the player jumping into the front side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 852 (the lower area 857 side) (and then whitening out for a moment) is derived. The handover performance ends here, and after that, performances are performed to enhance the behavior of the game ball in the visible lower area 857, and a display is displayed to inform the player whether a jackpot will occur or not.

In addition, when a game ball enters the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second distribution device 877 (detection by the first challenge ball detection switch 882a has occurred), the game ball appears in an open area, just as when a game ball enters the chance hole 878, but is attacked by a monster, and a performance display starts in which the monster escapes to the front side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 852 (the lower area 857 side). After that, based on detection by the second challenge ball detection switch 882b, a performance display in which the monster jumps into the front side of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 852 (the lower area 857 side) is generated. Furthermore, the handover performance of the decorative pattern display device 852 continues, and a display performance in which the game ball and the monster confront each other is generated. If the game ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896, a success effect is generated in which the game ball slips past the monster and escapes, and if the game ball enters the miss hole 897, a failure effect is generated in which the game ball is caught by the monster.

As described above in detail, even in the third embodiment, instead of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854, a takeover effect (display of the decorative pattern display device 852) that takes over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854 can be derived, thereby resulting in a bold effect that cannot be executed with the game ball. This can lead to improved presentation and playability, and ultimately to increased interest, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the handover performance has started, the game ball that entered the specific area 854 has not been discharged outside the game area (there is a grace period before the ball enters the V winning hole 894 or each of the missing holes 880, 895, and 897), and the result of whether or not a jackpot state will be granted has not yet been determined. For this reason, by making the length of time (timing of end) of the handover performance be determined according to the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area 854, it is possible to eliminate the impression that the handover performance is merely showing behavior corresponding to an already determined result (the so-called feeling of a rigged race). As a result, interest in the handover performance can be further increased.

On the other hand, for the section (separate area 856) of the path of the game ball in the specific area 854 through which the game ball passes during the period when the handover effect is derived, even if the shape of the path and therefore the behavior of the game ball passing through the path are simple (for example, a shape that is less likely to become clogged with balls), the handover effect can be used to liven up the game instead of the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately derive an effect that combines the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 and the handover effect while suppressing the complexity of the configuration, etc.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the specific area 854 enters the chance hole 878 of the second allocation device 877, the handover effect performed by the decorative pattern display device 852 ends when the game ball is guided to the lower area 857, and the mode of the handover effect is handed over to the game ball moving through the specific area 854 (lower area 857) that triggered the start of the handover effect. Furthermore, the actual result will naturally differ depending on whether the game ball enters the V winning hole 894 or the miss hole 895 of the final allocation device 893. This makes it possible to eliminate the sense of a rigged game in the handover effect, and to generate strong interest in the handover effect.

In addition, if a gaming ball that has entered the specific area 854 enters the sub-challenge hole 879 of the second allocation device 877, the gaming ball moves to the sub-allocation device 873, and if it enters the sub-V winning hole 896, a jackpot will occur, but if it enters the miss hole 897, no jackpot will occur. However, the handover presentation of the decorative pattern display device 852 continues even if the gaming ball enters the sub-challenge hole 879, and if the gaming ball enters the sub-V winning hole 896 or the miss hole 897, the handover presentation tells whether or not it is a jackpot, and the display transitions directly to a presentation showing a jackpot state. In other words, the player is not actively allowed to see the behavior of the game ball in the sub-allocation device 873, and instead, from the time the game ball enters the specific area 854 (in this example, from the time it enters the discharge hole 865 in the upper area 855, but it can also be from the time it enters the ball entry opening 861) until it is discharged, a display effect on the decorative pattern display device 852 is used to suggest and inform the player whether or not the game ball has won a prize corresponding to a jackpot (indirectly expressing this). This allows for an increase in the number of presentation patterns and makes it possible to make the presentation more flashy, etc.

In addition, the actual travel distance of the game ball from the ball entrance opening 861 in the specific area 854 to the final distribution device 893 is longer than the straight-line distance from the ball entrance opening 861 in the specific area 854 to the final distribution device 893 in the lower area 857. This allows for a thorough handover performance.

In addition, the separated area 856 is provided with a first branch 871, a second branch 872, and a sub-allocation device 873, and is configured to derive a takeover performance whose contents correspond to the detection of a detection switch provided in the passage after the branch. Therefore, it is possible to derive a performance of whether the takeover performance will fail (continue) or not. Therefore, the value of the takeover performance can be increased and interest in the takeover performance can be further increased. Furthermore, in response to the detection of each detection switch, the game ball moving in the specific area 854 can be more reliably linked to the takeover performance, and the takeover performance can be developed at any time as the game ball progresses. In other words, the progress (speed) of the game ball can be matched with the timing of the start and end of a predetermined performance of the takeover performance, and the result selected by the behavior of the game ball can be matched with the content of the suggestion/instruction by the takeover performance. Therefore, the takeover performance can be made more realistic and interesting. Furthermore, even if the game ball that enters the specific area 854 does not reach the V winning hole 894 or the sub-V winning hole 896, a (miss) effect is produced, which prevents the player from continuing playing while being uncertain as to whether or not they have missed.

In this embodiment, there is no lighting in the detached area 856, and the behavior of the game ball moving through the detached area 856 is not noticeable, especially compared to the handover performance in the decorative pattern display device 852, because it is performed in the dark. Therefore, while the handover performance is being derived, the player can concentrate on the handover performance. Also, even during the handover performance, a player who wants to understand the behavior of the game ball can check the behavior of the game ball.

On the other hand, lighting is provided in the lower region 857, and the lighting is turned on when the transparent display region 891 is in the transparent state. This allows the player to enjoy the behavior of the game ball in the lower region 857 more reliably.

In addition, a part of the passageway through which the game ball that has entered the chance hole 878 of the second distribution device 877 is guided is located below the entrance to the lower area 857 for the game balls. In this regard, in the third embodiment, a chance solenoid 883 is provided that launches the game ball that has entered the chance hole 878 toward the lower area 857. This increases the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the separation area 856, and also makes it possible to make the separation area 856 more spacious. This makes it possible to increase the amount of time that the game balls stay in the separation area 856, and to fully carry out the handover performance. In addition, the handover performance can be placed away from a position that is conspicuous to the player, allowing the player to concentrate on the handover performance.

The decorative pattern display device 852, which takes over the behavior of a gaming ball that has entered the specific area 854 and performs a handover effect in which the behavior is passed on to a gaming ball moving through the specific area 854, is positioned between the ball entry opening 861, which is the entrance of the gaming ball into the specific area 854 (the upper area 855 to which it is immediately guided), the V entry hole 894, and the miss hole 895 (lower area 857) (including the position between the straight lines in this example), and is configured to be able to derive a handover effect. This allows the handover effect and the behavior of the gaming ball in the specific area 854 to continue more smoothly.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example:

(a; Pseudo-ball performance, pseudo-ball) In the first embodiment, the pseudo-ball performance device 49 in which the performance using the pseudo-ball FB is performed is configured to include a left unit 401, a right unit 402, and a lower unit 403, but is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a pseudo-ball performance device 49 having a movable prop movement area 404 may be added, or the lower unit 403 may be omitted. In addition, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 each have two performance passage members 406, but there may be three or more, or just one.

Furthermore, the shape of the performance passage member 406 and the behavior of the pseudo ball of the pseudo ball performance are not particularly limited, and may be configured to have a structure such as the final distribution device 893 of the third embodiment. In addition, for the connecting passage 406a of the first embodiment, a branching path may be provided, such as the first branch 871 and the second branch 872 of the third embodiment, and a switching means for switching the destination of the pseudo ball FB at the branching point may be provided. Furthermore, an outlet may be provided in the connecting passage 406a, and a shutter that can open and close the outlet may be opened, so that the pseudo ball FB moving through the connecting passage 406a is discharged from the outlet to the outside of the connecting passage 406a (returned to the storage member 408 that stores the pseudo ball FB).

The number, size, shape, pattern, material, and combination of the pseudo ball FBs used in the pseudo ball performance are not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the content of the pseudo ball performance. For example, there may be silver pseudo ball FBs that are larger and smaller than normal ones (if a type other than the default is derived, it will be an instruction to increase the chance). Furthermore, a resin pseudo ball and a metal pseudo ball may be used together. In addition, the surface of the pseudo ball may be provided with irregularities. It is desirable that the size of the pseudo ball FB (used by default) is configured to be slightly larger in diameter than the game ball in order to improve visibility.

In addition, the suggestion made in the form of the pseudo ball FB is not particularly limited. For example, in the left unit 401, the right unit 402, etc., five silver pseudo balls FB of the same size and shape are prepared, and on one of them, "Win" is written in gray within 2 square millimeters, on another, a "black dot" is written within 1 square millimeter, and on another, a "gold dot" is written within 1 square millimeter. The pseudo ball FB of "Win" is derived only when it is a win, and the pseudo ball FB of "Black dot" and "Gold dot" can be derived only when it is equal to or greater than a predetermined setting, for example, in a configuration in which the probability of winning the win/lose lottery can be set in six stages (for example, the "black dot" is a suggestion that the setting is other than the setting that is the least likely to win, and the "gold dot" is a suggestion that the setting is either the setting that is the most likely to win or the setting that is the second most likely to win). In this case, more interesting suggestions and teachings can be made using the pseudo ball FB. In addition, since the markings are not visible when the pseudo ball FB is viewed from a direction other than the specified direction, even if a pseudo ball FB with a marking is guided to a position visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, there are cases where it is impossible to confirm the markings (the markings may be on the back side of the pseudo ball as viewed by the player, or the pseudo ball FB is rotating at high speed and cannot be properly confirmed), so when a type of pseudo ball FB that may have a marking is guided, a new fun can be added in that the player can confirm the markings.

The number of pseudo ball FBs used as defaults in the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403 is not particularly limited. If the pseudo ball FBs are used more frequently than the other types of pseudo ball FBs, the number of default pseudo ball FBs may be increased compared to the number of the other types of pseudo ball FBs, and if the frequency of use is not so different, the number may be the same. All of the multiple pseudo ball FBs may be the same. Also, replacement pseudo ball FBs may be included with the pachinko machine 10.

(b) Details of the artificial ball effect device
In the above embodiment, the end point detection switch 416 is provided to be able to detect the pseudo ball FB that has passed the position immediately before the end point of the movable prop moving area 404, but it may be provided to be able to detect the pseudo ball located at the end point. Also, the type of the end point detection switch 416 is not particularly limited, but a sensor that can detect the pseudo ball without contact is preferable.

In addition, although not mentioned in the above embodiment, when a pseudo-ball performance is performed in each movable device movement area 404, a pseudo-ball performance flag is set to ON based on the detection of the start point detection switch 415 and set to OFF based on the detection of the end point detection switch 416, and a pseudo-ball performance timer is set to count down the time during which the pseudo-ball performance flag is ON, and when the pseudo-ball performance flag is set to ON, a value corresponding to 5 seconds may be set for the pseudo-ball performance timer. When the pseudo-ball performance flag is ON, the value of the pseudo-ball performance timer may be periodically subtracted and checked, and when it becomes "0", an error state corresponding to the pseudo-ball clogging may be generated. In this case, it is possible to immediately grasp the clogging. In particular, when the movement path of the game ball in the movable device movement area 404 is more complicated than that in the above embodiment, such an effect is more pronounced.

In addition, a configuration may be provided that can detect a failure or malfunction of the pseudo-ball presentation device 49. For example, to detect a case where a pseudo-ball presentation should be performed but the pseudo-ball FB is not derived, an error state may be generated when the processing of steps S4611 to S4615 is not performed even though the scenario timer value is set to "0", or an error state may be generated when the discharge sensor 825 or storage sensor 828 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 53) detects an abnormality in the operation of the storage member 804.

In addition, a cushioning means (e.g., using a spring or rubber) for cushioning the pseudo-ball FB that has moved through the movable prop movement area 404 may be provided at the end of the movable prop movement area 404. In this case, damage to the end of the movable prop movement area 404 can be suppressed, and collision noise of the pseudo-ball FB can be suppressed.

The orientation (inclination) of at least the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 located at the starting point of the movable prop movement area 404 may be configured to be changeable. In this case, it is possible to provide variation in the direction in which the pseudo ball FB is launched from the starting point.

The left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decorative pattern display device 42 (at least one of these) may be configured to be relatively displaceable. In this case, a novel performance can be derived in which the movable role moving area 404 itself in which the pseudo ball FB moves is displaced, or the decorative pattern display device 42 is displaced. In particular, the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decorative pattern display device 42 (at least one of these) are configured to be relatively displaceable in the range in which both ends of the movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are adjacent to each other, so that even if the relative positions of the movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are changed, the decorative pattern display device 42 interposed between the multiple movable role moving areas 404 can effectively connect the pseudo ball performances of the multiple movable role moving areas 404. In addition, the "adjacent range" may be such that the entrance and exit sides of the movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are continuous when viewed from the player side (the front of the pachinko machine 10), and it is preferable that the entrance and exit of each movable role moving area 404 overlaps the decorative pattern display device 42 in the front and rear, regardless of the relative positions of each movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42. In addition, the movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 may be relatively displaceable in a range exceeding the range in which both ends of the movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 are adjacent. For example, the entrance or exit of the movable role moving area 404 and the decorative pattern display device 42 may not be adjacent to each other, and a performance may be derived in which the performance is interrupted there. In addition, for example, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 may be displaced to a position away from the decorative pattern display device 42, making it difficult to see from the front. Furthermore, for example, the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the movable character movement area 404 may be configured to overlap from front to back, or may be configured to have a state in which they overlap from front to back and a state in which they do not overlap.

The movable object movement area 404 (at least one of the multiple areas) may be configured to be shape-changeable. In this case, the movable object movement area 404 may be deformed (for example, the direction or width of the passage may change), resulting in a bold surprise effect in which the behavior of the pseudo-ball FB may also change.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 are almost the same (they are inverted upside down and the mounting position of the starting solenoid 413 is changed), but different units may be installed, or one or both may be omitted. There are also no particular limitations on the installation direction or placement of the left unit 401, etc., as long as the pseudo-ball FB can operate without any problems.

The game may be played even if the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 is broken. In other words, the game may be switched to a state in which the display presentation in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed instead of the pseudo-ball presentation. The game may also be configured to be able to execute a takeover presentation using only one of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, so that when one of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 breaks down, the other unit and the decorative pattern display device 42 (and the lower unit 403) perform the takeover presentation. However, it is preferable to notify the failure state of the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 (for example, by displaying a non-variable display state in the decorative pattern display device 42 indicating that the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 has broken down and is in a special presentation mode, or by sending information to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal board).

Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, each of the performance passage members 406 of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 may be configured to be detachable from the main body 405. In this case, the maintainability (ease of repair, replacement, etc.) of each movable prop movement area 404 can be improved.

(c; Configurations other than the pseudo-ball; Use of a movable role, combinations other than the combination of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 and the decorative pattern display device 42) In the first embodiment, the pseudo-ball FB is configured to displace the movable role movement area 404, but a movable role other than the pseudo-ball FB may be displaced (from the start point to the end point) in a position visible from the front (by the player) such as the movable role movement area 404. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the performance to be performed using a movable role that is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy. For example, the movable role may be a role that has a movement aid such as a roller, wheel, or ball (for example, a character, a figure such as a vehicle that can run even upside down), or it may be a shape that rotates by itself, such as an oblong spheroid, an oblate spheroid, a cylinder, or a columnar shape.

Furthermore, an RFID tag may be built into the pseudo ball FB (movable role). For example, if a reading means for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to each movable role movement area 404, it becomes possible to grasp where the movable role is moving in the movable role movement area 404, and when a performance is derived according to the movable role moving in the movable role movement area 404, such a performance can be more accurately matched to the behavior of the movable role. Also, for example, when there are multiple types of movable roles, if a reading means for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to the storage member 408 in which multiple types of movable roles are stored, management of multiple types of movable roles can be performed relatively easily and accurately. In other words, it is possible to take out the necessary movable role even if the room in which the movable role is stored in the storage member 408 is associated with the type of the movable role. In addition, it becomes possible to derive a complex performance in which multiple movable roles are mixed.

The application of the technology of providing an "RFID tag" to a movable part is not limited to a pachinko machine 10 having multiple movable part movement areas 404 and a decorative pattern display device 42, but may be embodied in a pachinko machine 10 having only one movable part movement area 404 or a pachinko machine 10 (or a slot machine, etc.) that does not have a decorative pattern display device 42. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to a configuration in which an RFID tag is provided on a movable part, an RFID tag may be provided on a movable part (connected to a drive source via a connecting means). For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple movable parts can be overlapped front and back, and each movable part can be individually (or in groups divided into multiple groups) displaced between a first position and a second position, and a reading means capable of reading the combination of movable parts in the first position is provided.

In the above embodiment, the pseudo-ball performance of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 (left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403) constituting the first performance means and the second performance means is combined with the display performance (pseudo-ball display performance) of the decorative pattern display device 42 as a connecting performance means to derive a performance, but it is also possible to combine other configurations to perform a performance. In other words, the specific configuration of the first performance means, the second performance means, and the connecting performance means is not particularly limited, and examples include display means such as liquid crystal display devices, EL display devices, and dot display devices, electrically driven performance means capable of performing an electrically driven performance using electrically driven parts operated by an electrically driven means appropriately using motors, solenoids, etc., mobile part performance means (pseudo-ball performance device 49 in this example) capable of performing a mobile part performance using a mobile part that can move based on mechanical energy, and light emitting means (group; in a predetermined arrangement) consisting of lamps such as LEDs.

The electrical drive means may be controlled by a performance control means (e.g., sub-control device 262) that controls the performance. The electrical drive means may be, for example, a connecting shaft connected to a mobile role moving in the mobile role moving area 404, and the connecting shaft may be linked to the drive of a stepping motor via a linkage mechanism using gears, rollers, belts, etc., or may be configured with movable character roles provided on the right side, left side, and below the decorative pattern display device 42, and one of the characters may be configured to be visible at a predetermined timing (moving toward the decorative pattern display device 42, or the shielding means may move, etc.), and the corresponding display may be derived in the decorative pattern display device 42 in response to the character's arm moving toward the decorative pattern display device 42, or may be configured with a slot machine reel (with identification information attached to the outer periphery and operated by a stepping motor). In addition, electrically driven props also have a start point and an end point, and a means may be provided that can determine when the electrically driven prop is at the start point or when it is at the end point.

Whether the first presentation means, the second presentation means, and the connecting presentation means are a combination of display means, electrically driven presentation means, movable prop presentation means, and light emitting means, etc., the effects of being able to combine the presentations of multiple presentation means to produce a series of spectacular presentations while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of each presentation means, and to diversify the presentation, etc., are achieved.

In addition, even if the left unit 401 and the right unit 402 serving as the first and second performance means are separated from each other, the decorative pattern display device 42 serving as the connecting performance means can effectively connect the two performances. Therefore, it is possible to improve the freedom of arrangement of the first and second performance means, etc., and to diversify the performances, while also improving the ease of understanding of the performances performed in conjunction with the first and second performance means.

The number of the performance means (first performance means, second performance means, and connecting performance means, as well as A performance means and B performance means) that perform the performance in conjunction is not particularly limited, and the number of the first performance means and the second performance means that connect the performance via the connecting performance means may be two or four or more. Also, the number of the A performance means and the B performance means that connect the performance based on the starting winning may be one each, or one or both may be multiple. Furthermore, the number of the connecting performance means may be two or more (for example, the display section of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to be divided into two, upper and lower, or a variable display device that can slide (and/or rotate) parallel to the display surface of the decorative pattern display device 42 (up, down, left, right, diagonally) may be provided in front of the decorative pattern display device 42).

At least one of the first presentation means, the second presentation means, and the transition presentation means (the first presentation means and the second presentation means) may be configured as an electrically driven presentation means or a movable gadget presentation means. In this case, the player can enjoy an analog presentation that is different in style from the pachinko machine 10 that only displays the presentation using a display device (such as the decorative pattern display device 42). Of course, there is a concern that the presentation may become monotonous if the presentation means (such as the left unit 401) that performs the analog presentation is used alone, but in the first embodiment, a series of diverse presentations can be derived using the left unit 401, the right unit 402, the lower unit 403, and the decorative pattern display device 42, eliminating such concerns.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the presentation means for performing the handover presentation is provided only in the game area (the area surrounded by the game area) (however, the inside of the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 and the front of the decorative pattern display device 42 are not part of the game area), but it may be provided outside the game area. For example, a movable role as a presentation means may be provided that is inaccessible to the player but visible through the front of the front frame set 14 or the top surface of the upper tray 19, and configured to operate in conjunction with the operation of the presentation button 125. Furthermore, a light-emitting means may be placed between the movable role and the decorative pattern display device 42, or a transparent display device may be placed in the glass unit 137, to perform a transitional presentation between the presentation by the movable role and the presentation by the decorative pattern display device 42. Also, for example, it is possible to make it possible to output pseudo balls in an untouchable and visible manner on the upper tray 19, and to output pseudo ball effects in conjunction with the left unit 401, right unit 402, lower unit 403, decorative pattern display device 42, etc. of the pseudo ball effect device 49 of the first embodiment, or, for example, to output an effect in which a large number of pseudo balls are visible on the upper tray 19 (during the variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b) before the occurrence of a jackpot state, as an indication of the occurrence of a jackpot state.

(d; Connecting effect) In the first embodiment described above, a pseudo-ball is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 as a connecting effect that connects between pseudo-ball effects, but the "connecting effect" may be any effect using a visual or audio appearance that suggests that the behavior of the pseudo-ball FB is continuing between pseudo-ball effects. For example, a toy car is used as a mobile prop, and the pseudo-ball performance device 49 is configured to circulate the toy car. A front-view plate-like blind is provided between the end of the first performance passage 421 and the start of the second performance passage 422, and based on the detection of the end detection switch 416 of the first performance passage 421, sounds reminiscent of high-speed driving of a car, sounds reminiscent of low-speed driving, sounds reminiscent of normal driving, sounds reminiscent of driving in bad weather or on a bad road, etc. are randomly derived (the selection rate may differ depending on whether or not the final result is successful) as a transition performance (the blind may be composed of a display means such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device, and the toy car may be displayed on the display means), and the mobile prop performance of the second performance passage 422 may be started at a timing suitable for such a transition performance, or at a timing that is intentionally shifted.

For example, in the transition performance, a motorized prop may be used, and the motorized prop may be configured to operate based on the control of the sub-control device 262. Furthermore, in addition to using a liquid crystal display device as the display device (decorative pattern display device 42) for the transition performance, various display devices such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, a dot display device, projection mapping (projector (and screen), or a suitable arrangement of light-emitting bodies and movable props, etc.) may also be used.

In addition, the time lag of the pseudo-ball performance is resolved by adjusting the length of the cut-in performance of the connecting performance, but it may be resolved in other ways. For example, it may be dealt with by cutting the last part of the scene change of the video or adding an unobtrusive video. In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 that does not have a display means such as a decorative pattern display device 42, when performing a variable corresponding performance corresponding to the variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b using multiple performance means, for example, the movement speed of the pseudo-ball FB may be changed (changing the launch speed, changing the ease of moving the movement path, etc.), and the operation of the moving role and the movable role may be adjusted to adjust the lag.

In addition, in the transition performance, the pseudo-ball performance may be performed first, followed by the transition performance. It is also possible to eliminate the transition performance. For example, a pair of pseudo-ball performance devices 801 (improved versions) of the second embodiment may be provided on the left and right, and the performance passage members 803 of the pair of pseudo-ball performance devices 801 may be arranged as close as possible to each other in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

(e; Trigger for handover performance) The trigger for starting the handover performance is not particularly limited, and is not limited to a configuration in which the pseudo-ball performance and the connecting performance are performed to take over the behavior of the game ball (there is also a pattern in which a reserved display is intervened) as in the first embodiment. For example, the pseudo-ball performance may start in the middle of a specified performance, and as a modified example of the specific area 854 in the third embodiment, the game ball that entered the specific area 854 may move from the upper area 855 to the leaving area 856, or move directly from the upper area 855 to the lower area 857. Furthermore, the pseudo-ball performance device 49 in the first embodiment may be added, and the pseudo-ball performance may be configured to start when the game ball moves to the leaving area 856. In addition, the pseudo-ball performance may be configured to start when the game ball passes through a specified part of the game area such as the through gate 34 (when the passage of the game ball is detected).

In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo-ball performance or a pseudo-ball display performance can be started in the middle of a predetermined performance, and an operating means (approach sensor) capable of detecting an object approaching in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be provided, or an operating means (having an operating part that moves back and forth) may be provided adjacent to the decorative pattern display device 42 or the movable role moving area 404 (for example, the decorative pattern display device 42 may be placed as close as possible to the side edge of the play area, and placed so that only the right-hand path is sandwiched between the rail 50), etc., and based on the operation of the operating means (detection by an approach sensor as a specific detection means, detection by an operation detection switch as a specific detection means that detects button operation), a pseudo-ball performance or a pseudo-ball display performance (A performance or B performance) may be started in the movable role moving area 404 adjacent to the operating means or the decorative pattern display device 42 (for example, it may be started by something (for example, a pseudo-ball) that is to be connected in the connecting performance popping out from the operating means).

Also, for example, in a slot machine having three reels and three stop buttons for stopping each reel, a transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided in front of all of the reels and in an area including the area above the reels, and light-emitting means capable of deriving multiple visual patterns may be provided surrounding each reel (for example, three-color LEDs may be arranged in each of several partitioned areas so that at least a large number of fine vermilion light-emitting patterns can be derived, and a prism plate, a plate with small holes, a plate with holes of a specified shape, etc. may be appropriately positioned in front of them), and a light-emitting means pattern reminiscent of sparks from a fuse may be derived around the stopped reel in response to the stop operation of the stop button, along with sound effects, and a similar presentation may be derived corresponding to the last reel to be stopped, and then the entire transmissive liquid crystal display device may be configured to produce fireworks of a pattern corresponding to the result of a win/lose lottery. Furthermore, if the special game state has not been won, the system may be configured to perform an effect that increases the expectation of the special game state, such as turning on and off the light-emitting means around all of the reels sequentially from left to right based on the next operation of the start lever (here, in front of the reels, the display corresponding to the state of the light-emitting means may be supplemented by a transmissive liquid crystal display device).

Furthermore, for example, light emitting means may be provided around the start lever, stop button, effect button, etc. of the slot machine on the front part of the slot machine, and the surrounding light emitting means may be illuminated by operating the start lever. In that case, the light emitting means provided to connect the light emitting means and the liquid crystal display device may be configured to sequentially emit light, leading to the display effect of the liquid crystal display device. In addition, in a state in which a right advantageous to the player (a special game state such as bonus, replay time, assist time, assist replay time, etc.) has been obtained (and this may not have been notified), a takeover effect may be generated based on the operation of the bet button with three or less credits or the operation of the credit payout button, and the player may be notified that he or she has obtained the right advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, it is configured to determine whether or not to perform a takeover performance when the variable display starts, but it may also be determined whether or not to perform a takeover performance when the variable display is stored in a reserved state (in the reserved information storage process of FIG. 35, based on the information included in the starting command set in the start winning process of FIG. 13). In this case, it is possible to start the takeover performance before the variable display starts.

In other words, for example, if the starting command contains information that indicates a jackpot or a miss before or after, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a takeover performance. Furthermore, if a win is obtained, a decision is made as to how many times the takeover performance should be derived. However, the number of pending variable displays excluding the currently executed variable display is the upper limit. Furthermore, information stored in other storage areas of the pending information storage area is checked to see whether a takeover performance is already scheduled to be performed, whether there is a variable display that will result in a jackpot, or whether there is a variable display that will result in a miss before or after. If there is, it is decided not to perform a takeover performance, and if there is not, to perform a takeover performance. In the takeover performance, the change times of all the corresponding variable displays are used to teach whether or not there is a jackpot. When this configuration is adopted, a spectacular takeover performance using multiple variable displays (times) can be derived.

It is also possible to "prohibit the start of another takeover performance during the execution of the takeover performance," or to "start another takeover performance even during the execution of the takeover performance (for example, the number of pseudo balls increases)." In this case, it is possible to derive a novel performance that cannot be produced by the variable display of the identification information of the special display means, such as starting a takeover performance that indicates or suggests the result of another win/lose lottery during a takeover performance that indicates or suggests the result of a predetermined win/lose lottery (overlapping takeover performances). In addition, by overlapping multiple takeover performances (for example, the number of pseudo balls during the takeover performance increases to two), the performance mode becomes more lively, making the takeover performance more interesting.

In addition, when multiple takeover effects are being performed simultaneously, if the previous takeover effect corresponds to a variable display that was won in a win/lose lottery and an instruction is given that the previous takeover effect was won in the win/lose lottery, a display may be generated indicating that the subsequent takeover effects will be paused, restarted, combined, or changed in order, or they may not be performed at all. In this case, even if the period in which the variable display is performed based on the win/lose lottery is temporarily suspended, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the takeover effects that have already started are treated as if they never happened, causing discomfort to the player.

(f; Instruction contents of the takeover performance) In the first embodiment, the takeover performance is configured to instruct whether or not a jackpot state will occur, but the contents to be instructed or suggested in the takeover performance are not particularly limited and can be set for each model. For example, the current game mode or the game mode to be given from now on may be suggested in the takeover performance. Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which the winning probability of the win/lose lottery can be set in multiple stages, the current winning probability setting may be suggested or instructed in the takeover performance. In addition, for example, when a game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b, a takeover performance including a pseudo ball performance is always performed, and when the takeover performance is successful, the decorative pattern display device 42 may start displaying a variable decorative pattern with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, for example, the content to be instructed (the privilege to be given) may be different depending on the type (color, etc.) of the pseudo ball FB used in the successful pseudo ball performance. For example, if the handover performance is successful with a pseudo ball FB other than gold, it will not result in a jackpot, but if the handover performance is successful with a golden pseudo ball FB, a jackpot is guaranteed; or, if the handover performance is successful with a pseudo ball FB other than gold, it is not clear what type of jackpot state will occur, but if the handover performance is successful with a golden pseudo ball FB, a sure-win mode will be granted.

In addition, when the variable display unit 35 of the first embodiment is mounted on a slot machine, if a lottery is won by operating the start lever, a performance consisting of a pseudo-ball performance and a connecting performance may be started. Furthermore, for example, the pseudo-ball performance of the first performance passage 421 may be started by operating the start lever, and the pseudo-ball performance of the second performance passage 422, the pseudo-ball performance of the third performance passage 423, the pseudo-ball performance of the fourth performance passage 424, and the pseudo-ball performance of the lower unit 403 may be started based on the operation of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button that stops three reels with multiple patterns on the outer periphery.

In addition, in the first embodiment, whether the handover performance is successful or unsuccessful is indicated based on whether the decorative pattern display device 42 performs a connecting performance or whether the pseudo ball FB is led to the performance passage member 406 or the lower unit 403 (whether the next pseudo ball performance is started), but it may be configured to indicate whether the handover performance is successful or unsuccessful in the middle of the pseudo ball performance.

However, it is desirable to avoid situations where a player fails to achieve a "success" (the corresponding variable display corresponds to a big win) or succeeds to achieve a "failure" (the corresponding variable display corresponds to a miss) (especially a pattern where a miss is a success). For example, in relation to a "pattern where a player wants to achieve a success", the number of pseudo ball FBs increases, the pattern is repeated until a success occurs, the player is forced to enter the goal (the pseudo ball FB is guided), a reversal effect occurs on the decorative pattern display device 42, a problem occurs such as the bottom of the movable role moving area 404 falling out, and a transition to a special effect that indicates a success occurs. For example, in relation to a "pattern where a player wants to achieve a failure", the setting is made so that even if the last pseudo ball effect is successful, it is not a 100% big win, the pseudo ball FB is bounced or stopped, or some other obstruction occurs, the goal escapes, is hidden, becomes smaller, or disappears, or the pseudo ball effect is temporarily hidden by a shutter or a transparent display device, etc., and is then shown as a failure.

(g; Adding an external force to the pseudo ball) An external force adding means may be provided that can add an external force to the pseudo ball FB moving in the movable device movement area 404. In this case, it is possible to diversify the pseudo ball effects. In other words, the behavior of the pseudo ball FB in the movable device movement area 404 is merely an effect, and even if an external force is added, no substantial problems can occur with regard to the granting of a jackpot state, etc. For this reason, it is possible to derive novel effects that allow the player to be more deeply involved in a specific behavior in the play area (actually, the movable device movement area 404 is not a play area) in response to the player's operation.

In addition, when the movement of the pseudo ball FB becomes stagnant in the movable accessory movement area 404, it is possible to eliminate the stagnation of the pseudo ball FB without the need for a person in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed to directly touch it with his/her hand. Examples of the external force application means include a device equipped with a member that uses a solenoid or a motor to contact the pseudo ball FB and change the direction of travel of the pseudo ball FB, a device that vibrates the passage of the movable accessory movement area 404, changes the inclination, or blows wind to change the speed of the pseudo ball FB or the time of the pseudo ball performance (a device that moves back and forth, moves periodically, or rotates). However, in order to suppress damage to the pseudo ball FB, it is desirable to avoid strong contact with the external force application means as much as possible. In addition, the trigger for the operation of the external force application means to eliminate unintentional stagnation of the movement of the pseudo ball FB in the movable device movement area 404 may be automatic, or may be a predetermined operation by an associated person such as an amusement hall (an operating means for eliminating errors may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

The configuration for moving the pseudo ball FB located at the starting point of the moving prop moving area 404 to the connecting passage 406a side is not particularly limited, and in addition to the solenoid (starting solenoid) as described above, a motor or wind pressure may be used, the floor of the storage room 408 may be originally tilted toward the connecting passage 406a, or the floor of the storage room 408 may be tilted after reaching the starting point. Furthermore, the launch speed may be appropriately changed, and basically, it is desirable to push out the pseudo ball FB at a low speed to suppress damage to the pseudo ball FB, and even if it is pushed out at a high speed, it is desirable for the starting solenoid 413 etc. to gradually change from a low speed to a high speed when pushing out, and it is desirable for the starting solenoid 413 and the pseudo ball FB to be in contact or close to each other when the pseudo ball FB is waiting at the starting point.

(g-1: Reaction of the pseudo-ball presentation device 903 to an operation by the player: Example 1 of Means E described below) In the first embodiment and the like described above, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific operation by the player affects the movement of the pseudo-ball FB of the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 (is reflected in the operation of the external force adding means). Below, an example of the configuration will be described with reference to Figures 60 and 61.

As shown in FIG. 60, the variable display unit 901 of this embodiment includes a decorative pattern display device 902, which is a transparent liquid crystal display device, and a pseudo-ball effect device 903, which is similar to the pseudo-ball effect device 801 of the second embodiment, arranged on both sides of the decorative pattern display device 902. In the handover effect of this embodiment, first, a pseudo-ball FB is delivered to the bottom of the display section of the decorative pattern display device 902.

The left and right pseudo-ball performance devices 903 each have a pair of performance passage members 905 with connecting passages 906 through which the pseudo-ball FB can pass, one above the other, and a pseudo-ball performance is performed in which the pseudo-ball FB moves along each performance passage member 905. When the player operates the performance button 907, the pseudo-ball FB is launched into the upper left performance passage member 905 (hereinafter referred to as the "first performance passage member 911"), and the game ball passes through the pseudo-ball display (connecting performance, role-behavior handover performance) on the decorative pattern display device 902 to the upper right performance passage member 905 (hereinafter referred to as the "second performance passage member 912"). The decorative pattern display device 902 displays enemy soldiers on guard, and the player operates the performance button 907 at the right time. In addition, in this embodiment, an end point detection switch (not shown) is provided to detect the pseudo ball FB that has reached the lower end of the connecting passage 906 of the performance passage member 905 (the end point of the movable prop movement area), and based on the detection of the end point detection switch, the pseudo ball display (connecting performance) in the decorative pattern display device 902 is started.

In addition, in the handover performance, first, it is decided how many pseudo balls FB will be used, and if multiple pseudo balls FB are used, multiple pseudo balls FB are successively delivered to each performance passage member 905. For example, at the start of the handover performance, a performance is performed in which one to four silver game balls are awarded (it may also be configured so that the pseudo ball FB is launched into the first performance passage member 911 without the player being informed). In addition, if a performance display is performed in which the movement of the pseudo ball display is obstructed by enemy soldiers or the like in the decorative pattern display device 902, the number of pseudo balls FB used in the next pseudo ball performance is reduced, etc.

When the first movable floor 813 of the pseudo ball performance device 801 shown in FIG. 53 receives, for example, two pseudo balls FB, the first movable floor 813 can be positioned downward from the receiving port 811 at a distance approximately the diameter of the pseudo ball FB, and two pseudo balls FB can be led out from the storage member 804. The first movable floor 813 may be configured to be able to carry four pseudo balls FB, or may be configured to share the transport of the pseudo balls FB with the second movable floor 814 (enabling the first movable floor 813 to be positioned above the starting point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822).

After the pseudo-ball effect of the second performance passage member 912, another performance is performed in which the pseudo-ball FB is fired. The decorative pattern display device 902 explains the performance and suggests the expected success rate. Then, at the timing when the player operates the performance button 907, the pseudo-ball FB is fired to the lower left performance passage member 905 (hereinafter referred to as the "third performance passage member 913"), and the game ball passes through the pseudo-ball display (connecting performance) on the decorative pattern display device 902 to the lower right performance passage member 905 (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth performance passage member 914"). The decorative pattern display device 902 displays enemy soldiers on guard, and the player operates the performance button 907 at the right timing.

After the pseudo-ball performance of the fourth performance passage member 914, the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 902 is made transparent. Behind the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 902, a space (a movable role moving area) is provided in which a launcher 915 capable of firing a pseudo-ball FB and a target role 916 like a bowling pin are provided. The launcher 915 is shaped like a cannon, and the direction of firing the pseudo-ball FB can be changed up, down, left, right, and so on by operating a cross button 917 that can be operated by the player. A plurality of target roles 916 are provided, and can stand on their own from a lying state. For example, a string-like body is connected to the inside of a hole that opens downward in the target role 916, and when the string-like body is pulled downward, the lower surface of the target role 916 and the installation surface on which the target role 916 is installed come into face-to-face contact. Furthermore, it is configured to be possible to create a pattern in which all of the target parts 916 have their strings loosened or tensed, but also a mixture of target parts 916 with loosened strings that can be toppled and target parts 916 with tensed strings that cannot be toppled. It is also possible to create variations in which the strings are slightly loosened, so that the target parts look like they are about to fall but don't, or it takes a while for the target parts to fall but then they do.

The decorative pattern display device 902 displays an explanation of the effect of firing the pseudo ball FB, the remaining number of times the pseudo ball FB can be fired, and the remaining time of the effect. The explanation of the effect is made easier to see by partially opaque the display section of the decorative pattern display device 902. The remaining number of times and the remaining time are displayed semi-transparently, and are displayed even after the start of the effect of firing the pseudo ball FB. Note that the longer the corresponding change time, the more time the player has to operate the firing device 915, and the greater the number of pseudo balls FB that reach the fourth effect passage member 914. The period between the various pseudo ball effects is the effective operation period, and the display of the remaining number of times and the remaining time corresponds to the period instruction means.

The launcher 915 can launch the pseudo balls FB in the number of pseudo balls FB that have passed through the fourth performance passage member 914, and when all the target features 916 fall (there may be a pattern in which they are replaced by other target features 916), this indicates the occurrence of a jackpot state. However, the time limit for launching the pseudo balls FB by the launcher 915 is set for each ball, and when the time limit is exceeded, the right to launch one pseudo ball FB is lost. Also, a configuration is possible in which a helper feature can appear from the space above the target features 916, and this helper feature can knock down all the remaining target features 916.

In addition, while the handover performance is in progress, the operation of the performance button 125 is reflected in the operation of the starting solenoid (not shown) that displaces the pseudo-ball FB toward the connecting passage 906 side of the performance passage member 905 and the launching device 915 (they are in a linked state) according to each part of the handover performance. On the other hand, when the handover performance is not in progress, the device that moves the pseudo-ball FB does not react even if the performance button 125 is operated.

As described above, analog effects such as the pseudo-ball effect using the pseudo-ball FB are originally effects that the player is likely to exert force into, but according to this embodiment (g-1), the player's operation is further reflected in the analog effect. In this embodiment, each pseudo-ball effect is started by the player's operation of the effect button 907 (the pseudo-ball FB is fired by the starting solenoid or firing device 915). This allows the player to start the pseudo-ball effect with more familiarity and expectation, making the pseudo-ball effect more interesting. In addition, the operation of the effect button 907 etc. can provide a moderate stress relief, and can also be used to concentrate the points at which the player applies external force to the pachinko machine 10 (preventing the glass unit etc. from being struck). In this embodiment, it has already been decided whether the handover effect including the pseudo ball effect can be successful (decided at the time of the initial winning), and if a big win state does not occur, it is impossible to make the final pseudo ball effect (shooting effect) successful, but if a big win state occurs, the pseudo ball effect (shooting effect) can be successful. In other words, there are cases where the pseudo ball effect can be made successful depending on the player's skill, and in such cases, the sense of elation and satisfaction is greater than that of other effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the pseudo-ball effect is also carried over to the pseudo-ball display of the decorative pattern display device 902, and effects that would be difficult to achieve with analog effects alone can be derived. Therefore, while making use of the pseudo-ball effect, it is possible to diversify the effects and prevent a feeling of monotony. Furthermore, the pseudo-ball display starts based on the pseudo-ball FB being detected by an end point detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the lower end of the effect passage member 905. In other words, although the timing of the launch of the pseudo-ball FB is determined by the player, the timing of the end of the pseudo-ball effect is properly reflected in the pseudo-ball display, and the pseudo-ball effect can be reliably and smoothly connected to the pseudo-ball display, allowing the player to enjoy a more complete effect.

Furthermore, the pseudo-ball display of the decorative pattern display device 902 is also carried over to the pseudo-ball performance, and any changes in the appearance of the pseudo-ball that occur in the pseudo-ball display are reflected in the subsequent pseudo-ball performance. In other words, if two pseudo-ball FBs are derived consecutively in the pseudo-ball performance of the first performance passage member 911, and the subsequent pseudo-ball display shows a display in which one pseudo-ball is reduced, then only one pseudo-ball FB is derived in the subsequent pseudo-ball performance of the second performance passage member 912. This allows for a better connection between the pseudo-ball display and the pseudo-ball performance, and can improve the performance, etc.

In addition, even if the effect button 907 is operated, the device for operating the pseudo ball FB cannot be operated except in the handover effect. This ensures that the state in which the behavior of the pseudo ball FB can be enjoyed and the state in which it cannot be enjoyed are separated, adding variety to the game. Furthermore, for example, if the pseudo ball effect can be enjoyed at any time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which someone occupies the pachinko machine 10 without playing the normal game that proceeds mainly with the win/lose lottery, and players who want to play are unable to play.

In addition, because the operation for operating the device that operates the pseudo ball FB is performed by operating the effect button 907, the number of operating means (buttons) can be reduced as much as possible compared to the case where separate buttons are provided, which prevents the front side configuration of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming too complicated, lowers the hurdle for participating in effects that use buttons, and makes such effects easier to understand and familiar. Therefore, more players can enjoy effects that use buttons, and it is possible to prevent the stress that can occur when complex operations are required based on quick decisions.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 902 is a transparent liquid crystal device, and a movable role area in which the launching device 915 and the target role 916 are arranged is provided behind the display unit. The decorative pattern display device 902 performs the pseudo-ball display connecting the pseudo-ball performances of the performance passage member 905 in a non-transparent state (blind state), and then in a transparent state (exposed state), the shooting performance by the launching device 915 and the like is made visible. This makes it possible to enhance and diversify the performance effect of the pseudo-ball FB. Furthermore, for example, when the pseudo-ball performance unintentionally develops in an inconvenient manner, it is also possible to make the decorative pattern display device 902 in a non-transparent state and perform recovery or explanation of the situation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the desired development of the pseudo-ball performance from becoming too large, making recovery difficult or causing trouble. In particular, when the timing of the pseudo-ball effect (e.g., the end) is synchronized with the timing of a separate component, this effect is more pronounced. When the decorative pattern display device 902 is in a non-transparent state, the device that operates the pseudo-ball FB may not operate based on the operation of the effect button 907.

In addition, in the pseudo ball performance (shooting performance) in which the launcher 915 aims the pseudo ball FB at the target 916 and launches the pseudo ball FB, a time limit is set for launching the pseudo ball FB. This makes it possible to avoid situations in which the pseudo ball performance becomes protracted. Furthermore, during the shooting performance, the decorative pattern display device 902 in a transparent state displays the remaining time until the time limit for the shooting performance (the time limit for launching each pseudo ball FB) is reached, thereby preventing situations in which the time limit is reached without the player's knowledge and the pseudo ball FB cannot be launched.

Although not specifically mentioned in this embodiment, as in the above embodiment, the variation in the time of the pseudo-ball performance may be eliminated by adjusting the time of the pseudo-ball display in order to match the end timing of the handover performance (instruction performance) consisting of the pseudo-ball performance and the pseudo-ball display with the end timing of the corresponding variable display. That is, for example, if the end time of the pseudo-ball performance in the first performance passage member 911 is delayed by one second from the target time, the length of the following pseudo-ball display may be shortened by one second, and if the end time of the pseudo-ball performance in the first performance passage member 911 is advanced by one second from the target time, the length of the following pseudo-ball display may be extended by one second. In this case, the handover performance can be performed within a set period, and it is possible to avoid situations such as obstructing other performances. The end timing of the variable display and the end timing of the handover performance (instruction performance) may always be matched, or the balance may be balanced by the next variable display or the display of the jackpot state.

The mounting surface on which the button (effect button 907) that operates the pseudo-ball FB is attached may not be provided with other operating means that can be operated by the player. In this case, it is possible to avoid situations in which the hand that performed the operation to operate the pseudo-ball FB also unintentionally operates other operating means, resulting in unintended behavior based on the operation of the other operating means, or an increased risk of damage to the other operating means. It also becomes easier to take measures for reinforcement, which can reduce the risk of damage and costs.

The mounting part to which the button (effect button 907) for operating the pseudo-ball FB is attached may be a different member from the member to which the pseudo-ball effect device 903 is attached, and a shock absorbing means for absorbing shock may be provided between the mounting part and the other member. In other words, generally, the operation part of the button is provided with a member for absorbing shock when operated, but such shock may reach the surrounding members, and such a concern becomes more pronounced especially when the player touches the periphery of the button (the button case). In this regard, if the member to which the effect button 907 is attached is provided on a member other than the pseudo-ball effect device 903, etc., and an external force is applied to the member, the shock absorbing means can suppress the external force from reaching the other member. Therefore, the operation of the effect button 907 not only moves the device for operating the pseudo-ball FB, but also prevents the pseudo-ball FB from behaving unintentionally due to shock. In addition, in the case where a vibration detection means for detecting the vibration of the pseudo-ball production device 903 is provided, in a configuration in which an error state is generated based on detection by the vibration detection means, it is possible to distinguish as much as possible between the operation of the production button 907 and the case where the pseudo-ball production device 903 is vibrated by other methods. Note that, as for the operation direction of the production button 907, it is desirable to avoid the front-rear direction as much as possible, as well as the up-down direction and the left-right direction, in order to prevent the force (shock) caused by the operation from acting on the inner frame 12 in which various control boards, etc. are provided.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to linking the interlocking means capable of applying an external force to the pseudo-ball FB with the operation of the performance button 907, but an approach operation detection means capable of detecting an object approaching the interlocking means (which may be a touch panel) may be provided, and the interlocking means may be operated based on the detection of the approach operation detection means. In this case, the interlocking means can be intuitively operated. This makes it easier to match the timing, and when multiple interlocking means are provided, it is easier to understand how they operate.

In addition, even if there is strong contact with the transparent plate-like body provided in front of the interlocking means, the impact is unlikely to reach the pseudo-ball FB and the like moving in the movable prop movement area, so the transparent body may be made to have a two-layer structure, at least one of which may be displaced back and forth, and a cushioning material may be added to gently regulate the displacement of the transparent body (such as fitting a rubber material to the outer periphery of the plate-like blocking means).

Also, the performance passage member 905 of the pseudo-ball performance device 903 where the pseudo-ball performance is performed and the decorative pattern display device 902 where the pseudo-ball display (connecting performance) is performed may be configured to be relatively displaceable. Furthermore, the performance passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902 may be configured to be relatively displaceable between a first relative arrangement in which the performance passage member 905 is located in front of the decorative pattern display device 902, and a second relative arrangement in which the performance passage member 905 is located out of the front of the decorative pattern display device 902.

In this case, the pseudo-ball performance can be more easily viewed at a position where it is easier to see, and with the support of the decorative pattern display device 902, it can be more exciting (the background of the pseudo-ball performance can be derived by the decorative pattern display device 902, an explanatory text can be displayed, the method and timing of operation can be taught, etc.). Furthermore, when the performance display of the decorative pattern display device 902 is viewed without using the pseudo-ball FB, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance passage member 905 obstructs the field of view. In addition, as the operation of the performance passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902, for example, the pseudo-ball performance device 903 provided in a pair on the left and right can slide in the left and right direction, the decorative pattern display device 902 can slide in the front and back direction, and in the first relative arrangement, the pair of left and right pseudo-ball performance devices 903 abut or approach each other, and in the second relative arrangement, the pair of left and right pseudo-ball performance devices 903 are separated from each other on the left and right, and the decorative pattern display device 902 is displaced forward and positioned in the space between them.

Also, for example, one of the performance passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902 may be configured to be able to change between a display state that is visible from the player side in front of the pachinko machine 10 (the entire part where the performance is performed is easily visible) and a non-display state that is invisible or difficult to see. In this case, it is possible to diversify the performance while increasing the visibility and impact of each performance state. In addition, one of the performance passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902 may be configured to be displaceable, and may be provided with a displacement drive means for displacing the one, and a drive control means for driving and controlling the displacement drive means, or may be provided with a covering means for covering the front of one of the performance passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902 (the performance passage member 905 and the decorative pattern display device 902 may be displaceable or non-displaceable).

(g-1-1; modified example of g-1) There are multiple types of pseudo-ball FB as a moving prop, and the linkage means for applying an external force to the pseudo-ball FB may be capable of generating different changes in the movement mode of the pseudo-ball FB depending on the type of pseudo-ball FB based on the operation of the performance button 907. For example, a pseudo-ball FB that is not the default (e.g., a red pseudo-ball) may be prepared as the pseudo-ball FB, and when such a pseudo-ball FB is launched by the launching device 915, it may be configured to have a faster launch speed than the default pseudo-ball FB.

In this case, by associating the type of pseudo-ball FB with the operation pattern of the interlocking means, not only the appearance of the pseudo-ball FB (it can be the same in appearance) but also its behavior can be changed, and the development of the pseudo-ball presentation can be made more diverse. Therefore, the effect of increasing interest through the pseudo-ball presentation is further achieved.

The type of the movable prop and the operation pattern of the interlocking means based on the operation of the operating means do not have to correspond one-to-one, and the operation pattern may be selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to incorporate an RFID tag in the movable prop, read the information on the RFID tag with the reading means, and drive the interlocking means based on the type information and position information.

(g-1-2; modified example of g-1) There may be multiple types of pseudo-ball effects, and the linking means may be capable of generating different changes in the movement of the pseudo-ball FB depending on the type of pseudo-ball effect based on the operation of the effect button 907, etc. For example, there may be multiple types of launching devices 915 and target parts 916 (e.g., different sizes, etc.), and the target parts 916 may differ in how easily they fall (e.g., the pachinko machine 10 may forcefully fall over while enhancing the surrounding effects). In this case, the pseudo-ball effects can be made more diverse. Therefore, the effect of increasing interest through the pseudo-ball effects is further enhanced.

(g-2; Example 2, mark confirmation operation) For example, in the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, six black polka dot pseudo-spheres FB are prepared, and the character "continue" is written on one of the pseudo-spheres FB with a size of no more than 10 square millimeters, a "whale shape" is written on one of the polka dots of another pseudo-sphere FB with a size of no more than 1 square millimeter, a "star shape" is written on one of the polka dots of another pseudo-sphere FB with a size of no more than 1 square millimeter, and a "crown shape" is written on one of the polka dots of another pseudo-sphere FB with a size of no more than 1 square millimeter. The "continued" pseudo ball FB is derived only when the pseudo ball performance continues, the "whale-shaped" pseudo ball FB is derived only when a big win occurs, and the "star-shaped" and "crown-shaped" pseudo ball FBs can be derived only when the winning probability of the winning/losing lottery is equal to or greater than a predetermined setting, for example, in a configuration in which the winning probability can be set in six stages (for example, "star-shaped" indicates a setting other than the setting that is least likely to win, and "crown-shaped" indicates either the setting that is most likely to win or the setting that is second most likely to win). An RFID tag is embedded in each pseudo ball FB at a position displaced from the center of the pseudo ball in a fixed orientation relative to the area to be marked. The pseudo ball FB is set in a position in which the various "marks" face the rear of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the starting point of the moving device movement area.

Furthermore, a blower device is provided as a linkage means capable of blowing wind to each movable role moving area (connecting passage), and during the pseudo-ball performance period, air is blown from the blower device based on the operation of the performance button. The pseudo-ball FB may change direction or slow down when it receives wind from the blower device. When this configuration is adopted, the player will operate the performance button 907 during the pseudo-ball performance in an attempt to find information (small marks) that may be written on the pseudo-ball FB. Therefore, a new way of enjoying the game can be given, and interest can be improved. In other words, the pseudo-ball performance can be considered as a chance to know the result of the lottery in advance or to see through the settings of the winning probability of the lottery, and together with the configuration in which the direction of the pseudo-ball can be changed by the linkage means, it can give even more fun and excitement. In particular, in this embodiment, when the pseudo ball FB is introduced into the movable prop movement area, the mark on the pseudo ball FB is aligned to face backwards, so that the user can more reliably enjoy the operation of the performance button 907.

In addition, because the air blower can cause changes in the movement of the pseudo ball FB while it is moving through the movable device movement area, the effect of the operation of the effect button 907 on the behavior of the pseudo ball FB can be made greater and easier to understand, allowing the player to feel even more that their operation is reflected in the pseudo ball effect. Furthermore, the period during which the behavior of the pseudo ball FB changes in response to the operation of the effect button 907 can be secured as long as possible. Therefore, the pseudo ball effect can be more effectively used to suppress the monotony of the game and to increase interest.

The movement mode of the pseudo ball FB (ease of movement, etc.) may be changed by a means other than the air blower, and a protrusion that appears and disappears in the movable feature movement area may be provided by driving a solenoid or a motor, a part of the floor surface of the movable feature movement area may slide or rotate, or the movable feature movement area may move (vibrate, tilt, etc.). As for the suggestion or instruction of the winning probability setting, there may be a pattern of change in the movement mode of the movable feature that, when a specific pattern is derived, ensures that a specific winning probability is set (it is not derived when a setting other than the specific winning probability is set), or when a specific pattern is derived, there is a high possibility that a specific winning probability is set (compared to when a setting other than the specific winning probability is set).

(g-3: Example 3, a game separate from normal play that focuses on winning/losing lottery, informing the player of the result, and awarding a bonus corresponding to the win) It may be configured so that an effect (mobile accessory challenge effect) is performed in which a predetermined movable accessory is linked based on the player's operation of the effect button 907 or the cross button 126, etc., regardless of the result of the winning/losing lottery. By performing this mobile accessory challenge effect, it is possible to reduce the monotony of the game, etc. For example, examples include a performance in which the pseudo-ball FB and a device for bouncing the pseudo-ball FB up into the air are provided, and the pseudo-ball FB jumps over obstacles approaching the pseudo-ball FB (e.g., a jump rope performance), a performance in which the pseudo-ball FB is fired at multiple rotatable targets (a shooting performance), a performance in which the pseudo-ball FB is carried to a goal by changing the inclination of a board on which the pseudo-ball FB is placed (a transportation performance), and a performance in which a rotatable jump platform is provided at the bottom end of a slope along which the pseudo-ball FB rolls, and the inclination of the jump platform is adjusted with the cross button 126 to make the pseudo-ball FB jump in an appropriate manner (a jump performance). Even if the mobile device challenge performance is successful, it has nothing to do with the occurrence of a jackpot state, and success bonuses include, for example, in a configuration in which the winning probability of the win/lose lottery can be set, suggestions or instructions on such settings can be given, in a mobile-linked game in which data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via the player's mobile communication terminal, specific data can be received (making it possible for the player to freely disclose it), and the record of the mobile device challenge performance can be updated.

In addition, if the mobile device challenge presentation is enjoyed even when the game is not progressing (the winning/losing lottery has not been held), for example, there is a risk that the game will not progress. Therefore, operation of the presentation button 907 of the mobile device challenge presentation may be made valid while the special display devices 43a, 43b are displaying changes, or until a specified time after the changes have stopped. In other words, by limiting the period during which the player's operation is reflected in the mobile device challenge presentation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which players who are not playing occupy the pachinko machine 10 and players who want to play are unable to play.

(g-4; Example 4) A dish-shaped pseudo-ball rolling part with a lowered center is provided, and a rotating body is provided in the center, and a V winning hole and a loss hole are provided in front of the pseudo-ball rolling part. The pseudo-ball is guided to the pseudo-ball rolling part by rotating the pseudo-ball rolling part, and is configured so that when the pseudo-ball loses momentum, it is bounced off the rotating body and can enter the V winning hole or the loss hole in front. The player can change the rotation mode of the rotating body by operating the effect button (for example, stop the rotation while pressing it, make it rotate at a low speed, make it rotate at a high speed, etc.). However, if the pseudo-ball effect corresponds to a variable display that teaches a big win, the pseudo-ball can enter the V winning hole, but if the pseudo-ball effect corresponds to a variable display that teaches a loss, the pseudo-ball cannot enter the V winning hole (for example, a transparent protrusion protrudes from the inside of the V winning hole so as not to be seen as much as possible).

It is also possible to provide a performance in which the ball-scoring assistance option can be acquired during a transitional performance. Examples of ball-scoring assistance options include the use of a guide that protrudes upward from the floor of the pseudo-ball rolling section and guides the pseudo-ball to the V-scoring hole, the V-scoring hole widening, the non-winning hole narrowing, a change in the position of the V-scoring hole (a lamp teaches the placement of the V-scoring hole in a roulette-like manner), an increase in the number of pseudo-balls, a temporary wall being put up when the pseudo-ball is about to fall into a non-winning hole, or wind being blown (with a limited number of times). In addition, in this embodiment, it is also possible to set the starting point of the moving device movement area of the pseudo-ball performance in multiple locations (random).

In addition, when a relatively complex pseudo-ball performance is performed, the pseudo-ball may stop moving, or may not move in the desired direction even if it is moving, and the pseudo-ball performance may not proceed. In this regard, an elimination means may be provided to eliminate the pseudo-ball from the moving-type device moving area when the pseudo-ball is detected to be stopped in the moving-type device moving area. In this case, the pseudo-ball blockage can be eliminated. In addition, even if the progress of the moving device in the pseudo-ball performance is too slow, the moving device can be actively discharged from the moving-type device moving area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap from becoming too large with the desired development of the moving device performance and to eliminate the blockage (blockage) of the moving device. In particular, when the specified timing (for example, the end) of the moving device performance is matched with the specified timing of the separate member, such an effect is more pronounced.

The interlocking means may be used as the removal means, or, for example, the floor of the movable prop movement area may be removed (the floor surface of the movable prop movement area may be constructed with a shutter, and the movable props present in the movable prop movement area may be ejected to the outside by opening the shutter).

(g-5; embodiment example 5) A state in which the pseudo ball FB can be seen inside the effect button 907 may be generated. In this case, by making a difference in the expectation of a favorable instruction for the player between when the pseudo ball FB can be confirmed through the effect button 907 and when it cannot be confirmed, the performance can be improved. In particular, when a different mobile role is used instead of the pseudo ball FB to perform a mobile role performance (for example, a mobile role performance in which a car figure passes through a mobile role movement area is performed, and the expectation changes depending on the type of car), such an effect is more pronounced. And, regarding the act of operating the performance button 907 through which the mobile role is seen, the player is interested in the novel change in appearance of the performance button 907 itself, and by associating the change in appearance with the expectation of the occurrence of a predetermined state (increasing the expectation of a big win), the performance can be improved. Furthermore, by having the moving part appear on the effect button 907 that the player touches, the player can feel closer to the moving part (moving part effect), and the player can become more interested in the moving part effect. For example, when a jackpot state occurs, the moving part may appear inside the effect button 907 (the moving part may flow in, the blindfold may be removed to reveal a moving part (a dummy that is not actually used) that was installed beforehand, etc.). In this case, the player can enjoy a new effect in which the player can relatively quietly grasp the occurrence of the jackpot state in a part of the pachinko machine 10 that is familiar to the player.

The type of the jackpot state may be instructed or suggested depending on the type of moving part visible inside the performance button 907. Furthermore, when the moving part switches to a state where it is visible inside the performance button 907, a predetermined vibration (such as a vibration caused by the moving part entering inside the performance button 907, or a dedicated vibration means is provided and the vibration is caused by the vibration means) may be generated, or a sound or the like may be output.

It is also possible that the mobile role being visible in a specific manner inside the performance button 907 corresponds to the success of the mobile role performance (one of the success patterns). In this case, the player can look forward to the mobile role being drawn out in his hand, and when it is drawn out, the player can enjoy operating the performance button 907 even more. By the way, the success of the mobile role performance may be such that a jackpot state or a probability mode is given, or the expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot state or the like is increased. In addition, it is preferable to set the performance button 907 in a position outside the pachinko machine 10, or as far outside as possible, from the mounting surface to which the performance button 907 is attached, rather than being seen deep inside the performance button 907. However, it is desirable to have a configuration that avoids situations such as the mobile role colliding with the performance button 907 when the performance button 907 is operated (the operation part of the performance button 907 does not come into contact with the mobile role even when the performance button 907 is operated, and the part where the mobile role is installed and the mobile role are fixed so that there is no relative displacement, and the mobile role does not displace even when the performance button 907 is operated, or the operation part of the performance button 907 and the mobile role are displaced in the same way when the performance button 907 is operated).

It is preferable that the moving prop that appears inside the performance button 907 is a real moving prop used in a moving prop performance (the moving prop can be displaced to the inside of the performance button 907), but it is also possible to provide an effect similar to that of this means by preparing a moving prop that is the same as the real thing just for the purpose of showing it inside the performance button 907, preparing a smaller one than the original, incorporating a display means to display the moving prop, or preparing a member with the moving prop printed on it. Also, when a performance is derived that makes a moving prop visible inside the performance button 907, it is possible to configure the operation of the performance button 907 to be restricted until it is made visible, or it is not necessary to restrict it.

In addition, the configuration of this embodiment in which the moving part is visible inside the effect button 907 may be embodied in a pachinko machine or slot machine that does not have a linkage means such as a launcher 915 that can change the movement mode of the moving part based on the operation of the effect button 907. Furthermore, it is also possible to apply this to a configuration in which an object that is the motif of an amusement machine such as a pachinko machine or slot machine changes state between being visible inside the effect button 907 and being invisible.

In addition, for example, an operation measuring means capable of measuring the strength with which the performance button 907 is operated or the displacement speed of the operated performance button 907 may be provided, and the operation pattern of the interlocking means capable of changing the operation of the pseudo-ball FB (movable role) according to the operation of the performance button 907 may be changed based on the measurement result of the operation measuring means. For example, in the case of fast and strong operation, the interlocking means may also be configured to operate fast and strong. In this case, even though the interlocking means is not directly operated, the interlocking means operates in a manner similar to the feeling of operation, so that the player can enjoy the pseudo-ball performance linked to the operation of the performance button 907 more. In addition, the operation measuring means can grasp the state of operation of the performance button 907, and for example, if the performance button 907 is hit hard, it is possible to take measures to prevent damage to the performance button 907, such as preventing the takeover performance from going well. In addition, examples of the operation measuring means include a pressure gauge that can contact a part of the performance button 907 inside the pachinko machine 10 that the player cannot touch, and a speed sensor that can detect the passing speed.

In addition, in an interlocking state in which at least the operation of the effect button 907 can operate the interlocking means, an associated effect means for interlocking at least one of the effect button 907 and the interlocking means may be provided between the effect button 907 and the interlocking means. For example, a combination of dial-type and push-type effect buttons (operation means) may be used, and a pseudo-ball effect may be performed in which a movable crane device (normally at least partially hidden) appears, the crane device moves left and right in accordance with the movement of the dial, and the pseudo-ball FB is captured by operating the push button. The associated effect means may be configured by a movable device, a display of a display device, lighting of a light-emitting device, or a combination of these.

(g-6: Application of linkage between operation means and mobile device performance) The configuration (linkage means) that can cause a change in the movement mode of the pseudo ball FB (mobile device) in (g) above was linked to the player's operation of the performance button 907, but it may be configured not to be linked. For example, the configuration (linkage means) that can cause a change in the movement mode of the pseudo ball FB (mobile device) may be configured to be operated appropriately by the decision of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the state of the part that the player can operate can change depending on the behavior of the moving role such as the pseudo ball FB. For example, when the pseudo ball FB runs over a step or hits a wall, the handle 18 or the performance button 907 may be configured to vibrate. In addition, the handle 18 or the performance button 907 may be configured to be able to change the length of protrusion from the attachment, change the inclination relative to the attachment, or rotate, and be displaceable depending on the performance of the moving role (for example, moving uphill, downhill, or through a spiral passage). Furthermore, the displacement amount (vibration, protrusion amount, tilt amount, etc.) of the handle 18 or the performance button 907 may be configured to increase step by step depending on the performance in which the expectation of a big win increases. In addition, various lamps provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to become brighter when the pseudo ball FB passes through a bright passage, and become darker when the pseudo ball FB passes through a dark passage. When these configurations are adopted, the player can feel the pseudo-ball effect (movable role effect) closer to the player, and can enjoy the pseudo-ball effect even more. The configuration that operates the members that the player can operate according to the behavior of the movable role object corresponds to the sensory means.

(g-7; Application 2 of the link between the operation means and the mobile role performance) A pair of left and right shutters are provided in front of the decorative pattern display device 42 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and a movable role imitating the upper body of a boxer is provided on each of the pair of left and right shutters. The boxer role on the left side is configured so that the right arm and the left arm can appear and disappear left and right in conjunction with the operation of the performance button 125, and the head and the torso of the boxer role can be tilted forward and backward. The boxer role on the left side is almost the same as the one on the right side, but is driven and controlled by the sub-control device 262, and may be configured so that a boxing match is held in the mobile role performance. Furthermore, when the punch of the boxer role hits the head or body of the opponent's boxer role, the boxer role mechanically changes into a form corresponding to a knockdown. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 42 may display the background of the boxing, or perform various auxiliary displays associated with punches and knockdowns. In addition, an electrical drive means such as a solenoid that puts the boxer into the down position may be built into the boxer device, and the electrical drive means may be driven at an appropriate point.

(h; auxiliary display) In front of the moving role movement area (performance passage member), a transparent display means (e.g., a transparent liquid crystal panel or EL panel) that allows the pseudo ball FB moving in the moving role movement area to be visible while allowing the user to view its own state from the front of the pachinko machine 10 may be provided (installed between a pair of transparent plates of the glass unit 137). In this case, the behavior of the pseudo ball FB and the display state of the transparent display means can be combined (overlapped) to make the pseudo ball performance more interesting. It is also possible to perform a transition between the pseudo ball performance in the moving role movement area and the transition performance in the decorative pattern display device 42 (e.g., in front of the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42). Furthermore, light emitting means, movable parts (configured to rotate and flip over), etc. may be provided in the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42 so that their visibility can be seen from the front, to create a connection effect in the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42.

(i; Guidance display, reserved icon) In the first embodiment, when there is no reserved ball, the attention part is moved from the start winning device 33a, 33b where the game ball entered to the movable accessory moving area 404 where the pseudo-ball performance is performed to guide the player's gaze, and when there is a reserved ball, the attention part is moved from the reserved icon 461 corresponding to the variable display to be consumed to the movable accessory moving area 404 where the pseudo-ball performance is performed to guide the player's gaze. Here, the form of the guidance display is not particularly limited, and can be changed appropriately depending on the arrangement of the start winning device 33a, 33b and the movable accessory moving area 404, the concept of the machine, etc. Also, for example, the guidance display may be performed by a transparent display means that is placed in front of the game area and makes the game area visible. It is also possible to omit the guidance display.

In addition, the configuration may be such that a predetermined suggestion or instruction can be executed depending on the pattern of the guidance display. This increases the presentation value of the guidance display triggered by the ball entering the start winning device 33a, 33b, and makes the series of handover presentations more spectacular and interesting. Furthermore, the guidance display and even the suggestion of the handover presentation are performed depending on the state of the hold icon 461 and the light-emitting means (in this example, a three-color LED) built into the start winning device 33a, 33b, but the content is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, even if the color of the hold icon 461 changes to something other than the default (silver), the handover presentation is not necessarily performed. However, the hold icon 461 may be configured to change in state (to something other than the default state) only when the handover presentation is performed, or a separate state indicating that the handover presentation is performed may be provided.

(j; movable range of the movable floor in the second embodiment) In the second embodiment, the second movable floor 814 and the third movable floor 815 located at the end point of the movable prop movement area 821 may be located slightly below the floor surface at the lower end of the connecting passage 805. In this case, the pseudo ball FB that has reached the end point can be prevented from running back toward the connecting passage 805. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo ball FB that has reached the end point appears to return to the connecting passage 805, which would result in poor continuity of the performance, and it is possible to improve the performance of the pseudo ball performance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 located at the starting point of the movable prop movement area 821 may be located slightly above the floor surface at the upper end of the connecting passage 805. In this case, when the pseudo ball FB is launched toward the connecting passage 805, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo ball FB collides with the periphery of the upper end of the connecting passage 805, damaging the pseudo ball FB, or the pseudo ball FB at the starting point is unable to displace toward the connecting passage 805.

Furthermore, the second movable floor 814 may be arranged at the start point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822, the third movable floor 815 may be arranged at the end point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822, and the first movable floor 813 may be arranged at an upper evacuation position that is retreated from the start point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822 to a side (information) different from the end point side. In this case, the pseudo ball FB that has moved in the downwardly moving role movement area 823 is received by the second movable floor 814 without passing through the storage member 804, and the second movable floor 814 is moved as it is to the start point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822, and a pseudo ball performance in the upwardly moving role movement area 822 can be performed.

It is also possible to place multiple pseudo balls FB on the first movable floor 813 and the second movable floor 814 at the same time. For example, when the pseudo balls FB are derived in the order of white → blue in the upwardly moving role movement area 822, the first movable floor 813 takes a position two diameters of the pseudo ball FB down from the receiving port 811 and receives the pseudo balls FB from the storage member 804 in the order of blue → white. After that, it takes a position one diameter of the pseudo ball FB down from the starting point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822, and launches the white pseudo ball FB from the starting point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822. After that, it displaces to the starting point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822, and launches the blue pseudo ball FB from the starting point of the upwardly moving role movement area 822.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 are inclined upward toward the connecting passage 805, but they do not have to be inclined upward. For example, the center of the upper surface of the first movable floor 813 may be recessed (by providing a positioning recess) to position the pseudo-sphere FB.

In the second embodiment, the storage member 804 and the performance passage member 803 are provided on opposite sides of the main body 802, but they do not have to be arranged on opposite sides. The inclination of the first movable floor 813, the second movable floor 814, and the third movable floor 815 may be configured to be changeable. In other words, while the pseudo ball FB is positioned from the storage member 804 to the start point (or its vicinity) of the movable prop movement area 821 and is waiting, it may be tilted downward away from the performance passage member 803, and when the pseudo ball performance starts, it may be tilted downward toward the performance passage member 803. In this case, the starting solenoid 826 is not necessary.

In addition, when the timing of the end of the handover performance is to be aligned with the timing of the end of the variable display, not only can the time of the transition performance (pseudo ball display performance) of the decorative pattern display device 42 be adjusted, but the time of the pseudo ball performance can also be adjusted. That is, for example, the operation of the starting solenoid 826 can be adjusted (if a solenoid is not possible, the driving source can be appropriately replaced with a motor or the like) to speed up or slow down the movement of the pseudo ball FB.

(k: Handover performance of the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, the handover performance that takes over the behavior of the game ball that entered the specific area 854 is performed only by the decorative pattern display device 852. However, in addition to or instead of this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the handover performance may be performed using a performance that uses a movable role (pseudo ball FB), or a movable role. In addition, the timing (number of times, order, etc.) of switching between the state in which the game ball moving in the specific area 854 is visible and the state in which the handover performance of the decorative pattern display device 852 is visible is not particularly limited, and for example, a state in which the game ball in the specific area 854 is visible may be inserted between the handover performances.

In addition, since the type of big win state that will be awarded if the ball enters the V winning hole 894 is already determined at the time the small win is won, the decorative pattern display device 852 may be configured to suggest the big win state that would occur if the ball entered the V winning hole 894 while the game ball is moving through the specific area 854 (such as the separation area 856).

The configuration of the specific winning unit 853 is not particularly limited and can be modified as appropriate. For example, the number of distribution devices in the separate area 856 can be increased to increase the number of branching effects that indicate whether the handover effect is successful (the effect continues). Furthermore, for example, the sub-V winning hole 896 of the sub-distribution device 873 can be a hole that guides the game ball to the lower area 857, rather than a hole that grants a jackpot state.

It is possible to make the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area 854 (detached area 856) during the handover performance completely invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 where the player is located, but it is preferable to configure it so that it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 for players who are concerned about it. Furthermore, the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area 854 during the handover performance is not very noticeable, while the visibility of the game ball may be reduced so that the handover performance stands out (for example, a semi-transparent member may be provided in front of the game ball moving through the specific area 854, a plate-shaped body that refracts or diffuses light forward, a beam splitter may be provided, a transparent display device may be provided, and a display that is relatively difficult to see at the relevant area may be provided).

In addition, the brightness of the game area (the brightness of the light-emitting means provided in the game area or in its vicinity) may be adjustable based on the operation of an operating means (e.g., the cross button 126) that can be operated by the player (the brightness adjustment function constitutes the brightness adjustment means). In particular, the brightness of the specific area 854 may be adjusted by adjusting the brightness, and the game ball moving in the separation area 856 may be made easier or harder to see. Furthermore, it may be possible to change only the brightness of the separation area 856, or to adjust the brightness of both the upper area 855 and the lower area 857 at the same time, or to adjust the brightness of the upper area 855 and the lower area 857 individually. In addition, a light-emitting means (brightness adjustable) may be provided that irradiates light onto the game board 30 at an irradiation angle that makes it difficult to see the separation area 857 from behind the game board 30. In this way, by making it possible to change the brightness of the specific area 854, it is possible to provide a display mode that meets the needs of players who want to see the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 more clearly, or players who do not want to be distracted by the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854 (separate area 856).

For example, the first branch 871 may have a safe passage (main passage) leading to the second branch 872, and an out passage (out passage) leading to the outside of the specific area 854 and thus to the outside of the game area, and the out passage may have a first section extending in parallel to the safe passage and a second section for guiding the game ball that has moved through the first section to an outlet passage leading to the outside of the game machine. In this case, even if the safe passage and the game ball moving through the out passage are visible to the player, it is possible to make it as difficult as possible for the player to know that the game ball has entered the out passage immediately after the game ball has entered the out passage. This (can postpone the announcement of which branch the game ball has moved to) can make the player more interested in the instruction on whether the game ball has entered the out passage, which is performed by the handover performance.

The passageway in the separate area 856 does not necessarily have to be transparent, as long as the side walls of the passageway are relatively low in height so that the moving game balls can be seen.

(l: Switching from a state in which the takeover effect of the third embodiment is visible to a state in which the behavior of the gaming ball in a specific area is visible) In the above third embodiment, the lower area 857 is arranged behind the transparent liquid crystal and is configured to be visible only when the gaming ball enters the lower area 857, but it may be configured to be always visible. Also, as part of the effect, a pattern may be provided in which the lower area 857 arranged behind the transparent liquid crystal becomes visible, but the gaming ball is not guided to the lower area 857 (in which case the decorative pattern display device 852 properly informs the player that a jackpot state will not occur).

In the third embodiment, the sub-allocation device 873 may be omitted, and when a jackpot state is generated by the behavior of a game ball that has entered the specific area 854, the game ball may be configured to always move to the lower area 857. In such a configuration, the state in which the behavior of the game ball in the lower area 857 is visible and the state in which it is not visible may be switchable, or it may be configured to always be visible. Furthermore, the switching between the state in which the behavior of the game ball in the lower area 857 is visible and the state in which it is not visible may be performed when the corresponding lottery is drawn, when the number of fluctuations or the number of balls entering the specific area 854 reaches or exceeds a specified number (reset when the specified number is reached), or when a specified condition such as a corresponding operation (operation of the effect button 125 at a specified timing, clearing of an operation effect, etc.) is cleared. The visibility of the separation area 856 may be changeable (by changing the intensity of light irradiation, or by providing a polarizing plate, shutter, etc. in front of the separation area 856), and the game ball moving through the separation area 856 may be switched between a state in which it is actively visible and a state in which it is not actively visible. Furthermore, such switching may be possible by the player's operation, or there may be multiple routes with different odds of winning, and the game ball may be visible only when it is an advantageous route.

In addition, instead of switching the lower area 857 to a visible state just before the game ball is guided to the lower area 857 based on the detection of the last-minute detection switch 892, the switching may be triggered by the detection of the chance ball detection switch 881, or a lottery may be held to determine the time from when the last-minute detection switch 892 or the chance ball detection switch 881 is detected until the lower area 857 becomes visible. As an effect, there may be a pattern in which the transmissive liquid crystal gradually changes to transparent, or the transmissive liquid crystal is switched between transparent and opaque multiple times and then kept in a transparent or opaque state.

The switching between the first presentation state and the second presentation state may be configured to be performed by the gaming machine based on a predetermined trigger (such as winning the relevant lottery or exceeding a set number of plays), or may be configured to be performed based on the corresponding operation of an operating means that can be operated by the player. Also, for example, instead of a handover presentation, a presentation state may be provided in which the behavior of the gaming ball moving through a specific area can be directly viewed (switchable automatically or manually).

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the game ball is led out to the lower region 857, the game ball is led out from the decorative pattern display device 852 adjacent thereto above, but it may be led out from another place. However, in order to improve the connection with the handover performance, it is preferable to configure the game ball to be led out from the member performing the handover performance. In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the third embodiment, the game ball moving in the separated region 856 (the game ball moving in the specific region 854) may be configured to be almost always visible and not to pass through a position hidden behind the decorative pattern display device 852, for example. For example, the area between the discharge hole 865 and the first branch 871 of the upper region 855 and the area between the chance hole 878 and the immediate detection switch 892 may be arranged behind the semi-transparent area of the frame surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative pattern display device 852.

(m; Detection switch in the third embodiment) The location and number of the detection switch provided in the specific area 854 in the third embodiment for determining the location of the game ball are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the first branch 871, a detection switch may be provided in the passage before the branch and in the main passage after the branch (the passage leading to the second branch 872).

In addition, for example, the second out ball detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball that has entered the out hole 880 of the second distribution device 877 may include an advance detection switch, such as the chance ball detection switch 881 or the challenge ball detection switch 882, that is provided relatively close to the second distribution device 877, and a main detection switch that is provided downstream of the advance detection switch, so that the difference between the time from when the game ball enters the chance hole 878 until it is detected by the last detection switch 892 and the time from when the game ball enters the out hole 880 until it is detected by the main detection switch is minimized. In this case, the presentation of whether or not the game ball will be guided to the lower area 857 can be reliably performed (the time can be reliably secured).

(n: Handover effect that does not inherit the behavior of the game ball in the third embodiment) In the above third embodiment, the handover effect is performed in the decorative pattern display device 852 by taking over the behavior of the game ball that entered the specific area 854 and the discharge hole 865 in the upper area 855 (based on the detection of the handover detection switch 866), but if a jackpot is won (so-called direct hit) in the win/lose lottery that is performed when the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b (starting ball entry means) or if a fake jackpot is won, a display effect similar to the handover effect may be executed.

In this case, even if no game ball has entered the specific area 854 (even if there is no detection information from the takeover detection switch 866 corresponding to the discharge hole 865 in the upper area 855), the takeover effect may be executed, and the opportunities for the takeover effect to be derived may be increased. In particular, the takeover effect performed based on a win or loss lottery or the like can be determined more freely in content, etc., regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the specific area 854, and a variety of impactful takeover effects can be provided. Incidentally, when the takeover effect is started as a result of a win or loss lottery or the like, there is no game ball moving through the specific area 854 in parallel with the progress of the takeover effect (the takeover effect does not take over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area 854), so the takeover effect teaches the granting of a jackpot state.

Furthermore, the configuration is such that the handover performance can be derived not only from a win/lose lottery that results in a jackpot state, but also from a win/lose lottery that does not result in a jackpot state (if the jackpot state is not won in the win/lose lottery and neither a jackpot state nor a small jackpot state is won, a lottery is held to see whether or not the handover performance will be performed, and the lottery is won (for example, with a 1/200 chance of winning)). This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which it is determined that a jackpot state will definitely occur when it is confirmed that the handover performance has started even though no game ball has entered the specific area 854.

(o: Surrounding configuration of the V entry hole in the third embodiment) In the above third embodiment, it is not clear whether the game ball will enter the V entry hole 894 until just before the game ball enters the V entry hole 894 of the final allocation device 893, and the game ball is not visible immediately after it enters the V entry hole 894. However, for example, a special guide passage that is (almost) guided to the V entry hole 894 may be provided, and the game ball moving through the special guide passage may be visible.

In this case, the player can more reliably see the game ball moving through the specific area 854 entering the V winning hole 894. This allows the player to clearly recognize whether the big win state will be granted (avoiding the game proceeding without understanding), and when the game ball enters the special guide passage, the player can have time to enjoy watching the game ball moving through the special guide passage. As a result, interest can be improved. In particular, it is considered that the handover performance is derived in a visual manner that is easier to see than the behavior of the game ball. As described above, when the handover performance is configured to be taken over by the game ball moving through the specific area 854 that triggered the handover performance, it is concerned that it may be relatively difficult to follow the game ball with one's eyes (a player may happen to find himself in such a situation), but by adopting the configuration of this embodiment, such concerns can be eliminated.

In addition, for example, instead of showing the behavior of a gaming ball that almost always enters the V winning hole 894, a configuration may be made in which a gaming ball that has entered either the V winning hole 894 or the missing hole 895 is shown for a while. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether the ball has entered the V winning hole 894 or the missing hole 895, making it easier to understand which hole the ball has entered.

(p) The form and display position of the reserved icon 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the performance using the reserved icon 461 (a reserved pre-reading performance in which the content of the variable information is understood at the stage when the variable information is reserved and stored, and a corresponding performance (such as an indication of the expected probability of a jackpot) is performed in the form of the reserved icon 461) can be appropriately set for each model. Also, in the above embodiment, the form of the reserved icon 461 is configured not to instruct whether the variable display is based on a ball entering the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, but for example, the reserved icon 461 may be configured to have information on whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or to be configured to have such a form in some cases.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a proximity detection means (e.g., a proximity detection sensor having a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit, a touch panel, etc.) capable of detecting the approach or contact of an object with multiple points on the decorative pattern display device 42 and connected to the input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 may be provided. For example, when a player brings a finger or the like close to a reserved icon 461 displayed in the reserved display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42, the state of the reserved icon 461 may change or move based on the detection of the finger or the like. In this case, interest in the reserved icon 461 can be increased.

(q) In the above embodiment, the main control unit 261 determines the timing of firing (firing interval) of the firing device 60, but this is not limited to a particular configuration, and the firing timing (firing interval) may be determined by the firing control circuit 312. In this case, the control burden on the main control unit 261 can be reduced.

(r) In the above embodiment, the arrangement and number of the first start winning device 33a, the second start winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable winning device 32, etc. are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately arranged for each model.

For example, a first variable winning device that allows the game ball to enter if the game ball passes through at least the left side area of the game area, and a second variable winning device that allows the game ball to enter only if the game ball passes through the right side area may be provided. Furthermore, for example, both the first and second variable winning devices may be located in the right side area, and a special prize winning device that allows the game ball that enters the second variable winning device to enter the game area and a special prize winning detection switch that detects the entry of the ball into the special prize winning device may be provided, and the second variable winning device may be configured to be in the open state only if the special prize winning lottery is won or lost.

Also, for example, a start winning device unit may be provided that includes an entry section that opens upward and into which game balls moving through the game area can always enter, a pair of first and second winning ports on the left and right into which game balls that enter the entry section can enter, a first passage and a second passage that guide game balls that enter the entry section to the first or second winning port, a distribution device that is provided at the branch point between the first and second passages and alternately guides game balls that enter the entry section to the first and second passages, a left start winning switch that detects game balls that enter the first winning port, and a right start winning switch that detects game balls that enter the second winning port, and the first variable display (for example, up to a maximum of four) is reserved based on the detection of the left start winning switch, and the second variable display (for example, up to a maximum of four) is reserved based on the detection of the right start winning switch.

Furthermore, for example, the first start winning device 33a may be arranged so that the game ball can enter when it passes at least the left side area of the game area, and the second start winning device 33b may be arranged so that the game ball can enter only when it passes the right side area. In addition, the second start winning device 33b may also be configured so that the game ball can enter at all times (in this case, in the normal mode in which the game ball is shot into the left side area, the second variable display has a long variable time (e.g., 1 hour or 2 hours), and in the probability mode and time-saving mode in which the game ball is shot into the right side area, the variable time of the second variable display is relatively short (e.g., 2 seconds to 3 minutes), and when a jackpot state occurs, the first variable display or the second variable display that was being displayed may be erased). In the first embodiment, the first start winning device 33a (and the second start winning device 33b) are provided at the top center of the variable display unit 35 (where the sub-display device 48 is provided), and even if there is no effect of the decorative pattern display device 42 "launching the game ball," the behavior of the game ball that entered the first start winning device 33a can be relatively smoothly carried over to the takeover effect.

In the above embodiment, the high probability mode is configured to be maintained until a jackpot occurs, but for example, an upper limit may be set for the number of times the mode can be changed. Furthermore, in the high probability mode, a drop lottery may be held based on the start winning to determine whether or not to switch from the high probability mode to the normal mode, and if the drop lottery is won, the mode may switch to the normal mode.

(s) In the above embodiment, the probability of winning, the number of types of winning, the opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 for each type of winning are not particularly limited, and can be set appropriately for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may operate in the same way as in the "4RS" winning state, and a winning state may be set in which a "normal mode" is granted after the winning state ends. Also, for example, a "potential mode" may be granted after the "4RS" winning state ends.

The decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to always inform the player that a special jackpot has been won at the latest before the corresponding jackpot state ends, or may be configured not to inform the player even if the corresponding jackpot state ends (even if the player is in special jackpot mode internally, the decorative pattern display device 42 transitions to the same pullback stage as in the time-saving mode, and transitions to the special jackpot stage when the variable display of the special display devices 43a, 43b in the time-saving mode exceeds the upper limit (100 times) of the time-saving mode).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning/losing lottery is variable, but the above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which the winning probability does not change (is constant) and multiple patterns of periods (number of variations) of high ball entry states that are granted after the end of the big win state are prepared. Furthermore, the winning/losing lottery based on balls entering the second start-up winning device 33b may also be configured so that a "small win" may be won, or the "small win" may be omitted.

In addition, the probability of winning in the ball entry support lottery and the opening and closing pattern of the second start winning device 33b in the case of winning can be set appropriately for each model. For example, an upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the second start winning device 33b in one opening may be set. More specifically, a start winning upper limit counter that counts the number of game balls that can enter the second start winning device 33b until the upper limit is reached is provided, and when the second start winning device 33b is opened, a value corresponding to the upper limit is set for the start winning upper limit counter, and when the second start winning switch 224b is detected, a process is performed to subtract 1 from the value of the start winning upper limit counter, and even if the timing to close the second start winning device 33b has not yet arrived while the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, when the value of the start winning upper limit counter becomes "0", the second start winning device 33b is immediately closed.

(t) In the above embodiment, the second variable display is consumed in priority to the first variable display by rearranging the order of the reserved items, such that the second variable display that is reserved after the first variable display that is already reserved is consumed before the first variable display. However, regardless of whether the first variable display is based on the entry of a game ball into the first start winning device 33a or the second variable display is based on the entry of a game ball into the second start winning device 33b, the corresponding variable displays may be reserved in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, and the variable displays may be consumed in the order of the variable displays that were reserved first.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the allocation ratio of the jackpot type that may be awarded is different when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering the first start-up winning device 33a and when a jackpot is won in a win/lose lottery based on a ball entering the second start-up winning device 33b, but it may be configured to be the same. In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls awarded to the player is different when a ball enters the first start-up winning device 33a and when a ball enters the second start-up winning device 33b, but it may be configured to be the same.

(u; Mobile-linked game) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to exchange data (so-called mobile-linked game) between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer or the like via a communication mobile terminal owned by the player. Furthermore, when the mobile-linked game is ended, a two-dimensional code including the current game information is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with a mobile communication terminal and accesses the server with the mobile communication terminal, so that the game information is transmitted to the server. In this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 may be equipped with a fluctuation counter that counts the number of fluctuations of the special display devices 43a and 43b, a jackpot counter that counts the number of occurrences of various jackpot states, and the like, and may be configured so that the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 at the end of the mobile-linked game includes information indicating the values of the various counters. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code may also include information on the total number of game balls shot, the type and number of derived effects, the number of times the player operated the effect button 125 during the button effect, etc. In this case, the gaming machine manufacturer can grasp the gaming situation. The counter value is erased by being converted into a two-dimensional code, and the rest may be stored (even if the power is turned off).

(v) In the above embodiment, the main control unit 261 is configured to perform normal processing (see FIG. 10) after main processing (see FIG. 9), but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal processing in the above embodiment may be performed, and for example, in a timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, the processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the above embodiment and the processing of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, the processing of step S401 may be, for example, a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 has been output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, a flag indicating the occurrence of a power failure is turned on. In addition, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as an NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

(w) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, the value of the win/lose random number counter C1 may be checked again to see if it is a value corresponding to a win, and depending on the result of the checking process (the state of the win/lose flag, etc.), it may be determined whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and the variable display pattern, etc.

(x; simultaneous change) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing a change display, the other change display is not performed (is on hold), but the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be configured to be able to perform the change display simultaneously. In other words, if there is a hold for each of the first change display and the second change display, the corresponding change display is executed (except during a winning state). In addition, when a change display instructing the occurrence of a jackpot state is being performed, a change display that overlaps with the change display may be configured not to be newly started. Furthermore, when one change display is stopped in a manner instructing the occurrence of a jackpot state, even if the other change display is changing, the other change display may be interrupted (resuming after the jackpot state ends) or erased.

In addition, for example, the decorative pattern display device 42 may simultaneously display the first variable display and the variable display using decorative patterns corresponding to the second variable display, respectively (hereinafter, the first performance variable display and the second performance variable display), or may display one of them (the second variable display, or the one that is stopped and displayed first) preferentially, or may be configured to switch between a state in which both are visible and a state in which only one is visible as appropriate.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 42 may be configured to preferentially display the performance change display from which a specific character display is derived. For example, when one of the first and second performance change displays starts, it is determined whether the other is changing, and if the other is changing, it is confirmed whether a specific character display is derived in one of the performance change displays, and if a negative determination is made, the one is not displayed, and if a positive determination is made, it is confirmed whether a specific character display is derived in the other performance change display, and if it is derived, the one is not displayed, and if it is not derived, the one is displayed (the mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be switched at some point from the other performance change display to the one performance change display). In this case, the opportunities for deriving a specific character display can be increased.

In addition, the condition for the visible display of one of the performance change displays can be not only whether or not a specific character display is derived in the other performance change display, but also whether or not a front/rear miss reach is derived (assuming that a front/rear miss reach is passed through in the case of a jackpot) can be the condition for the visible display of one of the performance change displays.

In addition, when a specific character display is derived in one of the first and second performance change displays, and the occurrence of a jackpot state is indicated in the other performance change display that overlaps with the first performance change display, if the first performance change display ends later than the other performance change display, the first performance change display may be shortened (forced to end) until the end of the other performance change display, and if the first performance change display ends earlier than the other performance change display, the first performance change display may be extended until the end of the other performance change display. In this case, the specific character display can be used to suggest and indicate that a jackpot state has been reached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character display from being replaced by another performance display.

In addition, the specific character display may be provided with an extension display used when extending the first and second performance change displays, and a shortening display used when shortening them. In this case, it is possible to suddenly extend or shorten the performance change display from which the specific character display is derived (leading to a state that suggests or indicates a jackpot win) while suppressing any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in a high ball entry state, the change times of the first change display and the second change display may be set relatively short, or only the change time of the second change display may be set relatively short. Also, in a low ball entry state, the second change time may be set relatively long, and in a high ball entry state, the first change time may be set relatively long. Furthermore, a remaining time display may be provided to suggest or instruct the remaining time of the first change time and the second change time.

(y) It may be implemented as a type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment. For example, the present invention may be provided with a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, a variable ball entry means having movable means (wing member) that can be changed between an open state that allows a ball to enter the specific area and a closed state that prohibits a ball from entering the specific area, a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means into which a game ball that has entered the specific area can enter, a specific ball entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) that detects a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means, a special start means that is provided outside the specific area and into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, a special start detection means that detects a game ball that has entered the special start means, and a main control means that controls the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters the specific area, it is determined whether the game ball will enter the specific ball entry means or the non-specific ball entry means. Even if a ball does enter the ball, the player is awarded a predetermined number of game values (game balls), and the main control means, based on detection by the special start detection means, holds the variable ball entry means in an open state once or multiple times for a first time, or holds the variable ball entry means in an open state for a second time longer than the first time, or holds the variable ball entry means in an open state for a predetermined number of times, which is one round, and holds the variable ball entry means in an open state until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. This may be applied to a gaming machine in which a small win state is generated in the win/loss lottery, and a big win state is generated in the win/loss lottery when a small win is won, and when a big win is won in the win/loss lottery and when there is detection by the specific ball entry detection means.

(z) In addition to pachinko machines, the invention may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and similar mahjong ball machines, slot machines as reel-type gaming machines, and gaming machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines.

(z-1) The basic structure of a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) is "a gaming machine equipped with variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button), and the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information as a necessary condition." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

For example, "a box-shaped main body with an opening on the front side, a door body that is provided so as to be able to open and close the opening on the front side of the main body, a start operation means and a stop operation means that are provided on the front side of the door body so as to be operable by a player, a betting means that allows a game value to be bet, a main control means that, when the start operation means is operated when the required number of game values has been bet, performs a lottery to determine whether or not a special game state that is advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display means that can variably display identification information (for example, a circular reel with a number of patterns as identification information attached at predetermined intervals around its outer periphery, In a gaming machine having a display unit including a plurality of display buttons (a display unit including a plurality of display buttons including a display unit having a plurality of display buttons), and the identification information of the variable display means is variably displayed based on the operation of the start operation means when the required number of game values is bet, and the identification information can be stopped in a stopping mode corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery when the operation of the stop operation means is triggered, the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 may be provided (for example, a display means (connection presentation means) such as the decorative pattern display device 42 of the above embodiment is provided above the variable display means, and the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 is provided on both sides of the display means). Of course, it is also possible to provide a presentation button such as the presentation button 125 of the above embodiment on the front side of the slot machine. Also, a medal or a medal imitation may be used as a movable device.

(z-2) The basic structure of a gaming machine (a reel-type gaming machine using balls) that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is as follows: "A gaming machine that is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the identification information in a definite manner, in which the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and which is equipped with a special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, on the condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of the stopping is a specific identification information, uses balls as the gaming medium (shares the gaming balls of a pachinko machine), requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

(aa) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided, and a configuration may be made in which a presentation mode can be derived according to the date and time information of the real-time clock. Also, a configuration may be made in which the presentation that is likely to be selected changes depending on the time or date (the table for the presentation that is likely to be selected changes).

(bb) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the winning lottery may be set in multiple stages. That is, for example, if the winning probability of the winning lottery can be set in six stages, the first winning/losing judgment table that stores a value corresponding to a "jackpot" and the second winning/losing judgment table (the number of winning/losing random number counters C1 stored as values corresponding to the jackpot are different. However, one of the first and second winning/losing judgment tables of a given set may be the same as the first or second winning/losing judgment table of the other given set) may be configured to have six sets. Furthermore, a setting flag indicating which winning/losing judgment table set is to be referenced, a function to change the winning/losing judgment table set indicated by the setting flag to be referenced (a setting operation means operable by a person related to the game hall on the back side of the inner frame 12, a setting lock means for switching between a state in which setting changes based on the setting operation means are permitted and a state in which they are not permitted, and a setting confirmation means for enabling confirmation (display) of the winning/losing judgment table set set to be referenced), etc. may be provided.

When this configuration is adopted, it may be possible to derive a setting guessing element effect that can guess the set win/loss judgment table set (associated with it). For example, the win/loss lottery can be set in six stages from setting 1 to 6, and effects that are more likely to appear as the setting number gets smaller (or larger) may be provided, or effects that can only be derived with a specified setting may be provided.

(cc) In the above embodiment, the first win/loss flag, the second win/loss flag, and the small win flag are configured to be in an on state by overwriting information corresponding to the first win/loss flag, the second win/loss flag, and the small win flag in the win/loss random number memory area of the corresponding holding area of the special variable holding area, but it is also possible to provide the first win/loss flag, the second win/loss flag, and the small win flag separately from the win/loss random number memory area. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the 10RS flag, 4RS flag, and 10RN flag are configured to be in an ON state by overwriting information corresponding to the first win/lose flag, the second win/lose flag, and the small win flag in the winning type random number storage area of the corresponding reserved area of the special variable reserved area, but the 10RS flag, 4RS flag, and 10RN flag may be provided separately from the winning type random number storage area.

When the variable display starts, a corresponding win/loss determination table may be referenced based on the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the win/loss random number storage area to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won. When the variable display starts, a corresponding type determination table may be referenced based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the win type random number storage area to determine the type of jackpot.

In addition, when the variable display is stored in the reserved memory, the configuration for determining whether or not a jackpot will be won and sending that information to the sub-control device 262 may be simplified (the first win/lose flag, second win/lose flag, and small win flag, etc. may be omitted, or instead of being provided in each reserved area, one each of the first win/lose flag, second win/lose flag, and small win flag may be provided separately from the special variable reserved area, and erased when the advance command is sent) or omitted (the win/lose determination process, type determination process, reach determination process, and advance command setting process may be omitted).

(dd; Means F correspondence, alternative performance) In the above first embodiment, when a trouble occurs in a predetermined performance means of the variable display unit 35, that is, the decorative pattern display device 42, the left unit 401, right unit 402, lower unit 403 of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 (for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, each performance passage member 406), the sub display device 48, the light-emitting performance section 47a (and the LED built into the start winning device 33a, 33b), another performance means may be used to cover the performance, and a variable response performance (handover performance) performed in response to the variable display of the identification information in the special display device 43a, 43b may be continued. Below, the processing (performance error processing) when a trouble occurs in the variable display unit 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. Note that the performance error processing is performed periodically in the normal processing of the sub control device 262. Also, in the above first embodiment, etc., the variable response performance is a combination of the handover performance and the guidance display.

In addition, as a means (grasping means) for detecting the occurrence of a trouble (abnormality, error) in the performance means, first, when detecting an error in the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403 (in the case of the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, each performance passage member 406), if a negative judgment is made in step S4610 of the handover performance execution processing in FIG. 52, a process of incrementing an error judgment timer (reset at the start of the handover performance) is performed, and then it is judged whether or not the value of the error judgment timer has exceeded a specific value. Here, if it is judged that the value has exceeded, an error occurrence flag is set to on, and a performance error flag is set to on as an abnormality location storage means indicating that an error has occurred in each of the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, and the lower unit 403. In this case, it is considered that the pseudo ball has not been launched, the pseudo ball is delayed in launch, the ball is jammed, the pseudo ball is blurred in movement, or a combination of these has occurred. Also, for example, if the specific value is set to a value equivalent to 0.5 seconds, any deviation within 0.5 seconds will be eliminated (absorbed) by adjusting the presentation time of another presentation means (in this example, the decorative image is the display device 42), and any deviation exceeding 0.5 seconds will be treated as an error.

Furthermore, in the process of controlling the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-display device 48, and the light-emitting performance unit 47a (as well as the LEDs built into the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b), checks are made to see if a normal state is being derived and if the processing is proceeding normally, and if it is determined that the state is not normal, a performance error flag is set to ON as an abnormality location storage means indicating that an error has occurred in the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-display device 48, and the light-emitting performance unit 47a (as well as the LEDs built into the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b), and an error occurrence flag is set to ON.

Although not shown, in this embodiment, before step S4610 of the handover performance execution process in FIG. 52, or if a negative judgment is made, it is judged whether or not the pseudo ball start flag indicating that the start point detection switch has been detected is on, and if a negative judgment is made, it is judged whether or not the start point detection switch has been detected, and if a positive judgment is made, the pseudo ball start flag is turned on (end point detection switch is on; it is turned off if a positive judgment is made in step S4610), and if a negative judgment is made, the scenario control timer is checked to judge whether or not it is equal to or less than the value corresponding to one second having elapsed since the start, and if a positive judgment is made, the error occurrence flag and the performance error flag are set on. This makes it possible to detect a situation in which the pseudo ball is not launched earlier, and to derive a connecting performance earlier.

In addition, when the process for determining the transition performance pattern in the variable display setting process of FIG. 51 (step S4508) and the process for determining the transition performance pattern in the variable display execution process of FIG. 52 (step S4606) are performed, the performance error flag is referenced, and the transition-compatible performance is set so as not to involve the corresponding performance means.

First, in step S4801 of the performance error processing, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is set to ON. If the result of step S4801 is negative, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the result of step S4801 is positive, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the takeover performance flag is set to ON.

If the result of step S4802 is positive, that is, if a problem with the presentation means is detected during the change display of the identification display of the special display devices 43a and 43b where the handover presentation is performed (during the change-responsive presentation), step S4803 determines whether the presentation error flag corresponding to the presentation means indicated by the value of the handover control counter and the memory contents of the memory area indicated by the pointer of the scenario progression memory area is turned on. For example, if the value of the handover presentation counter is "0", the presentation error flag corresponding to the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub display device 48, and the light-emitting presentation unit 47a is referenced, and if the value of the handover presentation counter is other than "0", the presentation error flag corresponding to any of the first presentation passage 421, the second presentation passage 422, the third presentation passage 423, the fourth presentation passage 424, and the lower unit 403 and the decorative pattern display device 42 stored in the memory area indicated by the pointer of the scenario progression memory area is referenced.

If the result of step S4803 is affirmative, then in step S4804, the next (subsequent) performance means to be performed after the performance means corresponding to the performance error flag identified in step S4803 is identified, and it is determined whether the corresponding performance error flag is off. In other words, it is confirmed whether the performance means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 42) that is scheduled to be performed following the performance of the performance means where the problem occurred (e.g., first performance passage 421) is available for use.

If the answer is NO in step S4804, then in step S4805, it is determined whether the effect error flag corresponding to the next effect means is OFF.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4804 or step S4805, in step S4806, processing is performed in a presentation means that has been confirmed to be usable to perform an alternative presentation to replace the presentation that would have been performed in the presentation means where the problem occurred.

The alternative performance is started immediately when a performance error process is performed. For example, in step S4806 after a positive judgment in step S4804, in the case of a problem with the decorative pattern display device 42, the pseudo-ball performance in the fourth performance passage 424 that was supposed to be performed next is brought forward and started. In addition, in this embodiment, as a countermeasure in the case of a problem with the decorative pattern display device 42, a light-emitting means (preferably a three-color LED corresponding to the color variations of the pseudo-ball) is embedded around the entire frame of the decorative pattern display device 42 and turned on to make it visible from the front, and the behavior of the pseudo-ball performance is continued, and the light-emitting state of the frame guides the line of sight to the sub-display device 48 (connecting performance), and the result is displayed on the sub-display device 48 (completing the change-responsive performance).

On the other hand, in step S4806 after a positive judgment is made in step S4804, if a problem occurs in the pseudo-ball effect device 49, a connecting effect is started in the decorative pattern display device 42.

For example, a movable display means (such as a liquid crystal display device) or a movable prop (electrically driven performance means, movable prop performance means) can be placed in front of the decorative pattern display device 42, and if a problem occurs with the decorative pattern display device 42, an alternative performance can be performed using such a movable display means or prop in front of the location where the performance would have been performed by the decorative pattern display device 42.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4802, step S4803, or step S4805, or after step S4806, the error occurrence flag is turned off in step S4807. In the following step S4808, the error explanation flag is turned on, and then this processing ends. Note that if a negative judgment is made in step S4805, when setting the next connecting performance pattern, a variable-compatible performance is set (by searching for an available performance means) and restarted.

The error explanation flag is used to execute a display to explain to the player that a problem has occurred in the presentation means. In this embodiment, when the decorative pattern variation pattern is set in the display setting process of step S3907 in FIG. 32, when the display setting of the big win state is set, or when the demo screen display is set, it is determined whether the error explanation flag is set to ON or not, and if it is set to ON, an error explanation display such as "XX is broken and currently a presentation that does not use XX is being performed. If you wish to resolve the problem, please call a store clerk. If you wish to play in this state, please operate the presentation button to erase this display" is derived at the bottom of the decorative pattern display device 42 to inform the player that a problem has occurred in the specified presentation means. Then, by operating the presentation button 125 while the error explanation is being displayed, the error explanation flag is turned off and the error explanation display is erased.

When the demo screen display is set, the error explanation display may be derived when the performance error flag is turned on, rather than deriving the error explanation display by referring to the error explanation flag. In this case, when the demo screen display is derived with the performance error flag turned on, the error explanation display can be derived every time, not just once. Therefore, even if the player changes, the error explanation display can be reliably confirmed. In addition, in this embodiment, among the decorative pattern display device 42, the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403 of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 (for the left unit 401 and the right unit 402, each performance passage member 406), the sub-display device 48, and the light-emitting performance unit 47a, which are provided adjacent to each other (abutting or close to each other) and can be derived in conjunction with the performance, one corresponds to the A performance means, and the other constitutes the B performance means. Furthermore, a function for notifying the player and the game hall personnel of an error state that has occurred in the performance means constitutes the error notification means.

As described above, in this embodiment, if a certain trouble occurs in any of the presentation means of the decorative pattern display device 42, the left unit 401, right unit 402, or lower unit 403 of the pseudo-ball presentation device 49 (in the case of the left unit 401 and right unit 402, each presentation passage member 406), the sub-display device 48, or the light-emitting presentation section 47a (as well as the LEDs built into the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b), such as normal behavior not being derived, an alternative presentation is performed in place of the presentation at a certain point of the presentation means, and the change-responsive presentation performed in response to the change in the display of the identification information of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be continued (completed). This makes it possible to prevent the change-responsive presentation from being interrupted or the impact of the change-responsive presentation from decreasing.

In other words, even if a problem occurs with a specified presentation means, the result of the winning/losing lottery does not change, and in a configuration in which special display devices 43a, 43b that display the result of the winning/losing lottery are provided in addition to the presentation means, the presentation is simply interrupted, and there is no need to interrupt the game. However, if the variable-responsive presentation is interrupted, there is a concern that it will cause great confusion for the player. In particular, when multiple presentation means are provided to improve presentation quality and, ultimately, interest, the risk of the presentation means breaking down increases, and there is a concern that, depending on the presentation means that break down, the presentation performance may be greatly reduced, leading to a decrease in interest.

In this regard, by making it possible to derive alternative presentations, the change-responsive presentation will not be interrupted, and the player can play with peace of mind. Furthermore, for example, in a situation where a presentation is being performed using two presentation means, if one of the presentation means breaks down, there is a concern that the impact of the presentation will decrease or a sense of discomfort will arise. However, such concerns can be alleviated, for example, by using the other presentation means to cover up the presentation of one presentation means as much as possible, or by adding (substituting) a presentation with another presentation means. As a result, it is possible to perform relatively large-scale presentations by providing multiple presentation means, etc., to increase interest, while preventing a decrease in interest in the event of a failure of a presentation means, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple performance means are used to perform the change-responsive performance, and the alternative performance is basically performed by the performance means next to the performance means where the problem occurred (the performance means scheduled to perform the performance after the performance by the performance means where the problem occurred). This allows the alternative performance to be connected relatively seamlessly, and the change-responsive performance can proceed without significantly disrupting the flow. Also, while the risk of failure may increase by providing multiple performance means, it reduces the risk that all of them will fail and no performance will be possible.

In addition, a performance error flag indicating that an error has occurred is provided for each of the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, the fourth performance passage 424, the lower unit 403, the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub display device 48, and the light-emitting performance unit 47a (as well as the LEDs built into the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b). This makes it easy to identify the location of the error once an error has been identified. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, after creating a variable response performance or an alternative performance, it is discovered that a specified performance means cannot be used, and the variable response performance or alternative performance must be re-created (by removing the performance means in which the problem is occurring) (this can be avoided except when the performance means in which the problem is occurring is first identified).

Furthermore, if an abnormality in the presentation means is detected, this is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 (an error explanation display is generated). This allows notification that a problem has occurred in the presentation means, providing an opportunity for maintenance, etc.

In addition, the error explanation display can be erased (changing from notification mode to non-notification mode) by the player operating the presentation button 125 as an operating means. This allows the player to recognize that a problem has occurred in the presentation means, and if the player is okay with this, the error explanation display can be erased and the player can continue playing.

In addition, the error explanation display is not displayed during the change-responsive performance (while the special display devices 43a, 43b are displaying changes) when a malfunction in the performance means is detected (when an alternative performance is performed), but is displayed after the change-responsive performance has ended. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which, for example, a malfunction in the performance means is detected in the latter half of a change-responsive performance, and even if an alternative performance manages to liven up the change-responsive performance, the notification becomes distracting and ruins the performance.

(Ee; Variation of dd) The alternative performance may be configured to be capable of being derived not only when an abnormality is detected by the detection means, but also in a normal state where no abnormality is detected. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation where the alternative performance is a special performance when a problem occurs, and is not derived in a normal state, resulting in the performance being poorly utilized. In addition, examples of the performance means include the display means, electrically driven performance means, movable role performance means, light emitting means, etc., as described above.

For example, if a problem occurs in any of the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403, a display simulating the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403 in which the problem occurred may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and an alternative presentation simulating a pseudo-ball presentation may be executed. In this case, if a problem occurs in the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403, which are relatively more likely to malfunction than the decorative pattern display device 42, a display similar to that may be derived on the decorative pattern display device 42, allowing the player to enjoy the presentation. Also, the duration and balance of the presentation may be well maintained.

Furthermore, for example, each effect error flag may be configured to be set in two stages, depending on when the effect error flag corresponding to each effect means is initially set to on, and when it is determined that normal behavior is not occurring again (a problem has occurred) when the effect error flag is on. In other words, when the effect error flag is on in the first stage, processing is executed to once again cause the corresponding effect means to try to perform the effect, and if the effect can be performed without any problems, the effect error flag is turned off, and if the effect still cannot be performed, the effect error flag is turned on in the second stage.

This makes it possible to avoid (automatically recover from) a situation where the error state continues to be maintained, for example, when the pseudo-ball operation just happens to be delayed and is not a mechanical malfunction, and subsequent pseudo-ball effects can be executed without hindrance (when the temporary trouble is naturally resolved). This allows for early and effective use of the effect means that was once determined to be abnormal (but is currently normal), and reduces the hassle for those involved in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

In addition, if a malfunction occurs in the presentation means, the game hall may be notified of this. In this case, various measures can be taken relatively smoothly, such as checking the pachinko machine 10 in question to see if the situation is favorable for the player or the game hall (since this is a problem with the presentation means, it will not generally be a problem), checking whether the game hall can handle the problem or whether to request repairs from the game machine manufacturer, etc. Examples of notifications to the game hall include notifications to the hall computer that manages the game hall, notifications to external devices installed in the place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, notifications at the pachinko machine 10, etc.

Furthermore, when a malfunction occurs in the performance means, the method of notifying the player of the malfunction is not particularly limited. For example, the error explanation display may be displayed at a place other than the lower part of the display unit of the decorative pattern display device 42, or may be scrolled, or multiple lamps that light up when an error occurs may be provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to each performance means, and when an error occurs, the corresponding lamp may be lighted, or each performance means may be provided with a lamp that lights up when an error occurs. In addition, the timing of the notification when a malfunction occurs in the performance means is not limited to after the variable response performance (variable display) in which the malfunction of the performance means is identified, but may be from the time the malfunction of the performance means is identified. In addition, when the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is not being performed, the notification of the malfunction of the performance means in the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to be made (reserved) (it may be notified to the game hall side).

In addition, when at least one of an electrically driven performance means and a mobile prop performance means is provided as a performance means (performing a change-responsive performance in response to the changing display of the special display devices 43a and 43b), the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means may be provided with a locking means capable of locking itself as a reference state. More specifically, for example, the electrically driven performance means may be configured to include a main body portion, a connecting member that connects the main body portion so that it can be displaced relative to the mounting position, and the main body portion may be configured to be unable to be displaced relative to the mounting position (the main body portion and the mounting position may be configured to be unable to be displaced relative to the mounting position by engaging a locking portion provided on one side of the main body portion and the mounting position with a locked portion provided on the other side). Also, for example, the mobile prop may be configured not to be displaced to the corresponding mobile prop area (not to be displaced to the starting point).

In this case, if a problem occurs with the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means, it is possible to avoid situations such as impeding the visibility of other presentation means. It is also possible to avoid situations where the appearance is degraded or players feel uneasy or distrustful by forcibly locking the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means with a member that was not originally provided on the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the gaming machine so that, when the power supply to the gaming machine is on, only the displacement function of the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means can be turned off (the light emitting means mounted on the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means can be made to emit light as appropriate). In this case, it is possible to stabilize the state locked by the locking means.

For example, the left unit 401, right unit 402, and lower unit 403 may be configured to be relatively displaceable from the decorative pattern display device 42, or a presentation means may be provided that can make a predetermined visual state visible in front of each of the left unit 401, right unit 402, lower unit 403, and decorative pattern display device 42 (a transmissive liquid crystal display device or EL display device may be fixed along the glass unit 137, or a movable liquid crystal display device, a movable electrically driven presentation means, or a movable mobile role presentation means may be provided). In this case, the abnormal part where the trouble occurred can be made less noticeable, reducing distraction from the abnormal part.

In the above (dd), the pseudo-ball effect and the pseudo-ball display effect are embodied, but the effect to be applied and the configuration for performing the effect can be set appropriately for each model. In other words, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the multiple configurations for performing a specified effect and the initial effect cannot be executed, it is sufficient that the effect can be completed by covering it with another configuration from the multiple configurations for performing the specified effect. In addition, as a configuration for performing the effect, it is not necessary to adopt multiple performance means adjacent to each other as in the relationship between the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pseudo-ball effect device 49 of the first embodiment. For example, it may be configured to perform a succession of effects using multiple performance means spaced apart from each other, or to perform a succession of effects using one performance means.

In addition, for example, when the first performance passage 421 and the third performance passage 423 of the left unit 401 of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 of the above embodiment become unusable due to a malfunction, the occurrence of the malfunction can be detected, and a pseudo-ball performance can be executed using the first performance passage 421. In other words, even if a part of a specified performance means malfunctions and becomes unusable, if other parts are capable of performance, they can be used in the performance, and a decrease in performance can be suppressed.

(ff; corresponding to means G. Configuration for suppressing the deviation (time) of the performance) In the first embodiment, the deviation between the time (target time) allocated to each pseudo-ball performance in the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, and the fourth performance passage 424 is grasped by a "configuration for grasping the time difference using a scenario control timer and a lap timer" as a remaining time grasping means (grasping means), and the deviation is eliminated by the pseudo-ball display performance by the decorative pattern display device 42 thereafter. However, in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the pseudo-ball performance device 49 (pseudo-ball performance performed in the first performance passage 421, the second performance passage 422, the third performance passage 423, and the fourth performance passage 424) may be configured to change the time of the pseudo-ball performance based on the deviation (so that the deviation is minimized). In other words, it is possible to adjust the time by speeding up or slowing down the launch speed of the pseudo-ball FB by the starting solenoid 413. In this case, measures can be taken such as sharing the work of correcting the discrepancy or preserving important effects without making any changes.

In the above embodiment, the change-responsive performance is divided into several scenes, and the deviation is checked and eliminated for each scene. However, the deviation may be eliminated all at once in the performance performed at the end of the change-responsive performance. However, by sharing the elimination of the deviation, it is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity of the performance that attempts to eliminate the deviation and the deterioration of the performance. It is also possible to prevent the deviation from becoming too large in advance. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the takeover performance (guiding display performance) that constitutes the period-responsive performance (corresponding performance) that is performed in response to the change display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (starting based on the start of the change display and ending based on its end) from being interrupted midway. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a malfunction of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 (left unit, right unit 402, lower unit 403) that constitutes the performance means that is a configuration for performing the period-responsive performance, or the decorative pattern display device 42, etc., causes a great sense of incongruity in the period-responsive performance, leading to a decrease in interest.

Of course, in addition to pachinko machines 10 that perform a performance (variable performance) that combines performances using the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pseudo-ball performance device 49, it is also possible to adopt a configuration that grasps the remaining time and, if there is a discrepancy, eliminates the discrepancy as much as possible in pachinko machines 10 that perform a performance that combines performances using electrically driven performance means and mobile role performance means other than the pseudo-ball performance device 49. Furthermore, it is also applicable to pachinko machines 10 in which the decorative pattern display device 42 is not (may not be) involved in such a performance (variable performance) or which do not have a (liquid crystal) display device.

In the above embodiment, the system is configured to perform a performance (variation-responsive performance) that combines the performances of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pseudo-ball performance device 49 in response to the change period of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, but a performance that combines the performances of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pseudo-ball performance device 49 may also be performed at a different timing. For example, a performance (period-responsive performance) that combines the performances of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pseudo-ball performance device 49 may be performed during the period from the start to the end of a specified jackpot round in the jackpot state, during the remaining four times of the time-saving mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the remaining time of the variable response performance, which is performed by combining (connecting) the performances of multiple performance means (decorative pattern display device 42, left unit 401 (each performance passage member 406), right unit 402 (each performance passage member 406), lower unit 403), is grasped and eliminated as much as possible, but even in a variable response performance (period response performance) that uses only one performance means (or even if there is only one performance means to begin with), the remaining time may be grasped and any discrepancy may be eliminated as much as possible. However, by providing at least one pair of performance means that connect the period response performance, it is possible to divide the work (gain preparation time) such that one of the pair of performance means prepares while the other performs the performance, and the other prepares while the other performs the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the performance means is not prepared in time, causing a malfunction in the period response performance (reducing the cause of the occurrence of discrepancies). Furthermore, in cases where there is a possibility of time lag occurring in the performance means, by using multiple performance means, the lag between each performance means can be kept as small as possible, and recovery (reducing or eliminating the lag) can be performed using the performance means that performs the subsequent performance. In addition, as a period-based performance, multiple performance means can be used to create a grand performance, improving the performance quality, etc.

Furthermore, by including a display means in the performance means that connects the period-based performances, the time adjustment of the performance time can be performed relatively easily or more precisely than in the electrically driven performance means and the moving prop performance means. Therefore, the effect of matching the end timing of the performance period and the end timing of the period-based performance is dramatically improved.

In addition, by having a performance by the display means intervene after the performance by the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means, it becomes easier to return the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means to their standard state at the end of the performance period (period-specific performance) that is set as the period during which the period-specific performance will be performed. Also, by having a performance by the display means intervene before the performance by the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means, even if the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means were not able to be returned to their standard state at the end of the previous performance period, they can be returned to their standard state while the performance by the display means is being performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the order of the performances by each performance means in the variable response performance and the combination of performance means used in the variable response performance are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. Also, although not mentioned in the first embodiment, it is also possible to derive a variable response performance that does not use the decorative pattern display device 42 by providing a means for displaying a performance that connects between each performance passage member 406 and the lower unit 403 or up to the sub-display device 48 (such as incorporating a light-emitting means in the frame of the decorative pattern display device 42, or providing a movable display means or movable role in front of the decorative pattern display device 42).

The configuration may be such that a specific presentation means (which may be one, multiple, or all) is always used, or the order in which the specific presentation means (which may be one, multiple, or all) are used is fixed (if used, they are used in that order).

However, by configuring at least one of the electrically driven performance means and the movable prop performance means that perform the performances that make up the period-based performance to be used in the first performance in the period-based performance or in a different order, it is possible to appropriately change the order of the performances performed by the multiple performance means, change the combination, etc., and create more diverse and interesting performances. On the other hand, if a performance means that was used relatively last in the previous period-based performance is used relatively first in the next period-based performance, concerns such as the performance means not being ready in time become more pronounced, but as described above, such concerns can be dispelled by taking appropriate measures while understanding the remaining time of the period-based performance (performance period).

In addition, for example, at least one of the electrically driven performance means and the movable prop performance means that perform the performances that make up the period-based performance can be configured to be used in the final performance in the period-based performance and in other orders, thereby enabling more diverse and interesting performances to be performed. On the other hand, if the performance means used relatively late in the previous period-based performance is used relatively early in the next period-based performance, concerns such as the performance means not being ready in time become more pronounced, but as described above, such concerns can be dispelled by taking appropriate measures while understanding the remaining time of the period-based performance (performance period).

In the first embodiment, the sub-control device 262 may be provided with a reference state discrimination means that determines the reference state of the performance means (here, a mobile role performance means, but can be applied to electrically driven performance means) such as the left unit 401, the right unit 403, and the lower unit 404, and can discriminate whether the performance means are in the reference state. Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 may be provided with a preparation state storage means that stores information on whether there are performance means that are not in the reference state when discrimination is made by the reference state discrimination means. Then, at least at the timing of the end of the period-based performance (performance period), the preparation state storage means is checked (if there is no preparation state storage means, discrimination is made by the reference state discrimination means) to discriminate whether there are performance means that are not in the reference state.

In other words, electrically driven presentation means and movable prop presentation means that are not in the standard state at the end of the presentation period may not be usable immediately (usually, operation from the standard state is programmed). For this reason, by checking whether there are any presentation means (electrically driven presentation means and movable prop presentation means) that are not in the standard state at the end of the presentation period, appropriate measures can be taken (at least, it is sufficient that the specified presentation means is returned to the standard state when the specified presentation means is next used). Note that, although it is unlikely that the display means will not return to the standard state at the end of the presentation period due to factors other than the occurrence of a specified error, it is also possible to configure it so that it is possible to determine a situation in which it has not returned to a state in which normal processing is performed (standard state) and to store the determination result.

In addition, for example, if a period-compatible performance is to be performed following the period-compatible performance, the electrically driven performance means and the movable prop performance means that are not in the standard state when setting the period-compatible performance can be prevented from being used, or can be postponed to a later time, or the time of the performance performed before can be lengthened, etc., so that the time until use begins is long enough to return to the standard state (processing can also be performed to confirm that the state has been returned).

Furthermore, by providing a preparation state storage means, it is possible to simplify the process of determining whether the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means are in the standard state. Also, for example, even if it is determined that there are electrically driven performance means and movable role performance means that are not in the standard state at the timing of the end of the performance period, but a situation is derived in which the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means will not be used following the period-compatible performance, it is possible to continue monitoring whether the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means have returned to the standard state. Therefore, when the next period-compatible performance starts during the monitoring period, it is possible to reliably perform settings that take into account the timing and order of use of the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means that are not in the standard state.

It is also possible to configure the system as follows: "A plurality of performance patterns are provided for each of the performance means, and the time from performing the first performance pattern until the reference state is reached is different from the time from performing the second performance pattern until the reference state is reached, and the performance pattern by the other performance means of the period-based performance when the first performance pattern is derived in the period-based performance is at least partially different from the performance pattern by the other performance means of the period-based performance when the second performance pattern is derived in the period-based performance." In other words, for example, if it takes time to return a specific performance means to the reference state, a time-based performance that allows enough time (slack) to return the specific performance means to the reference state within the performance period can be set in anticipation of this, thereby preventing a situation in which the performance means cannot be returned to the reference state within the performance period. However, by having a pattern in which the electrically driven performance means and the moving role performance means are driven even just before the end of the period-based performance to perform the performance, the performance and diversity of the performance can be greatly improved.

In addition, in order to ensure that the error state is resolved at the start of the next variable-responsive presentation in which an error has occurred in a specific presentation means, if there is a presentation means that is not in the standard state, it is possible to configure the game to be temporarily suspended as an error state, and to cancel the error state and resume play when the presentation means returns to the standard state. However, this is undesirable, as it requires that the main control device 261 make such a judgment (which would increase the burden on the main control device 261) or that the sub-control device 262 notify the main control device 261 (input from the sub-control device 262 is undesirable in order to prevent as much as possible a situation in which an illegal signal is input to the main control device 261).

(gg; configuration to suppress other deviations in the performance) In addition, in the handover performance, not only the time deviation, but also, for example, depending on the configuration related to the pseudo ball performance, the position and angle of the pseudo ball and the pseudo ball display may be configured to be properly aligned (so that there is no deviation). In addition, it may be configured so that there is no deviation between the content of the handover performance and the content that is planned to be taught (to be taught) in the handover performance, so that even if a deviation occurs, it is eliminated. For example, in the case where the connecting passage 406a of the first embodiment has one entrance (entrance side passage), but multiple exits (exit side passages) (for example, the first to third exit side passages) are provided (a distribution means that distributes the pseudo balls to each exit side passage at a predetermined ratio is provided in the middle of the connecting passage 406a, i.e., at the lower end (branch point) of the entrance side passage), multiple exit detection means (sensors) that can detect the pseudo balls passing through each exit side passage may be provided, and the pseudo ball display of the decorative pattern display device 42 may be created based on the detection information of the exit detection means. Furthermore, for example, if advantages and disadvantages are set for multiple exit-side passages in the current handover performance, it is fine if the pseudo-ball performance progresses according to the results of the win/lose lottery, but if this is not the case (if it seems like it will show a miss even though it's a win, or if it seems like it will show a win even though it's a miss), the pseudo-ball display performance may correct this (correct the trajectory of the pseudo-ball with the pseudo-ball display).

In other words, the handover performance is determined according to the results of a win/lose lottery, and the handover performance (corresponding performance) corresponding to a loss should not indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. For this reason, it is desirable to determine whether there is a discrepancy between the performance content (plan) of the handover performance determined in advance and the handover performance that is actually being performed, and to correct the discrepancy if there is a discrepancy. Furthermore, it is desirable to determine the discrepancy not at the end of the handover performance, but during the handover performance, and more preferably, to perform the determination multiple times. In the first embodiment, the "time discrepancy" of the pseudo-ball performance of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 (performance means) is determined, and the time discrepancy is eliminated by the pseudo-ball display performance of the decorative pattern display device 42 (performance means).

Here, depending on the performance means (structure, etc.) that constitute the handover performance, there is a possibility that deviations other than time may occur, so a configuration that aims to eliminate such deviations may be provided. Since the deviation is grasped during the handover performance, a storage means (check item storage means) that makes it possible to grasp the performance content of the handover performance that has been predetermined at that stage (goals at the checkpoint) is provided. Incidentally, in the first embodiment, a scenario control timer that becomes "0" when the remaining time of each scene of the handover performance becomes "0", and a lap timer that starts measuring at the same time as the scenario control timer but stops measuring when the scene ends are used to calculate the time difference between the two and determine the deviation time of each scene of the handover performance one by one. For example, in a case where the first to third exit side passages are provided corresponding to the first performance passage 421, and the first exit side passage among the first to third exit side passages is approaching a jackpot instruction, the third exit side passage is approaching a miss instruction, and the second exit side passage is in between, and when a jackpot instruction is given, when setting the handover performance, the check item (whether or not the third exit side passage has been passed) of the pseudo ball performance of the first performance passage 421 is stored in the corresponding check item storage means, and after the detection of the start detection switch 415 of the first performance passage 421, it is confirmed whether or not the exit detection means of the first performance passage 421 has detected the first to third exit side passages (after confirmation, the detection confirmation process is turned off), and when the detection confirmation is given, the corresponding check item storage means is referenced to confirm whether or not the third exit side passage has been passed, and when it is confirmed, a pseudo ball display performance may be performed in which the pseudo ball display on the decorative pattern display device 42 moves to the passage corresponding to the first or second exit side passage.

In addition, for example, a configuration in which a first hole, a second hole, and a third hole are provided in the moving role moving area, and a pseudo ball can be launched by appropriately aiming at the first hole, the second hole, and the third hole, for example, at (the start of) a performance in which it is convenient for the pseudo ball to enter the first hole, a performance for when the pseudo ball enters the first hole as intended, and a performance for when the pseudo ball enters the second hole or the third hole may be prepared. Of course, a different configuration may be adopted to prepare a performance that takes into account both the intended development and the unintended development. For example, the pachinko machine 10 pitches a pseudo ball from the pitcher role, and the player operates the batter role with the role button 125, and the performance is changed depending on whether the batting result corresponds to the result of the winning/losing lottery (when the batter hits the pseudo ball in a case corresponding to a big win (there is a pocket where the pseudo ball goes in when the player swings and misses the pseudo ball, and a detection switch is provided there, and the presence or absence of the detection switch determines whether the pseudo ball hits the bat, and the display performance on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed depending on the detection of the detection switch, etc.), a home run performance is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and when the batter swings and misses in a case corresponding to a big win (the batting performance starts with three balls and two strikes), a running home run performance is displayed with some luck, and when the batter hits the pseudo ball in a case corresponding to a miss, a performance is displayed in which the ball is supplied and the player is out, and when the player swings and misses, a performance is displayed in which the player strikes out (note that it is possible to apply it appropriately, such as a soccer penalty kick performance in which the direction of kicking the ball is input).

In order to make it more difficult for an unexpected result to occur, the difficulty of the performance may be increased (for example, the ball thrown by the pitcher becomes faster or its trajectory changes, or visibility is reduced due to light or transparent LCDs, etc.), or obstacles may be introduced, increased, or made stronger (for example, the keeper becomes larger, the goal becomes smaller, defenders are involved, the ground tilts or shakes, etc.).In addition, to make it easier for the expected result to occur, the difficulty of the performance may be lowered (for example, the ball thrown by the pitcher becomes slower or its trajectory becomes straighter, etc.), or obstacles may not appear or may be reduced, or assisting characters may be introduced (for example, the keeper becomes smaller, the goal becomes larger, guides appear on both sides of the goal to guide the ball toward the goal, or the game may be repeated until a goal is scored, etc.).

In addition, it is desirable to configure the operation performance in which the player operates the performance button 125 to move the movable role provided in the movable role moving area 404 of the pseudo-ball performance device 49 provided in the game area so that it is forcibly terminated (a forced termination performance is performed) depending on the remaining time of the operation performance (handover performance). For example, (when there are 10 seconds left in the handover performance and 5 seconds left in the operation performance (preparation is performed from the previous stage)), an electric kicker role and a ball role may appear and a performance in which the ball role is scored in the goal (a 5-second performance, and the decorative pattern display device 42 shows the result for the next 5 seconds) may be performed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation performance from being prolonged and the handover performance from ending, resulting in a decrease in the performance and a negative impact on the progress of the game (particularly a negative impact on the derivation of a display that assists the game method (such as operation guidance in the jackpot state)).

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiments will be described below.

A (connecting effects that connect effects produced by multiple effect means). One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a gaming ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on the gaming board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (see, for example, JP 2006-271480 A).

However, in pachinko machines equipped with variable display means, many players progress through the game simply by continuing to look at the variable display means. This raises concerns that players will quickly become bored, and in the first place, the game of continually looking at the variable display means has become monotonous.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means PA-1. A first presentation means for performing a first presentation and a second presentation means for performing a second presentation at a position visible to a player;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a connecting performance means between the first performance means and the second performance means, the connecting performance being capable of executing a connecting performance between the first performance and the second performance.

According to the means PA-1, a transitional performance is performed in such a way that the first or second performance performed by one of the first and second performance means is taken over and is then handed over to the other of the first and second performance means. Therefore, while preventing the configuration of each performance means from becoming too complicated, it is possible to combine performances by multiple performance means to produce a series of spectacular performances, thereby diversifying the performances, etc.

In addition, for example, even if the first and second performance means are spaced apart (for example, when the first and second performance means are relatively displaceable and the first and second performance means are spaced apart for performance purposes, or when another structure is installed between the first and second performance means, in other words, when the first and second performance means are arranged with another structure in between), the connecting performance means can effectively connect the two performances. Therefore, while improving the freedom of arrangement of the first and second performance means, etc., and diversifying the performances, it is possible to improve the ease of understanding of the performances performed in conjunction with the first and second performance means.

The specific configuration of the first presentation means, the second presentation means, and the connecting presentation means is not particularly limited, and examples include display means such as a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, and a dot display device, an electrically driven presentation means described later, a movable role presentation means described later, and a light emitting means (group; in a predetermined arrangement) consisting of lamps such as LEDs. For example, the first presentation means, the second presentation means, and the connecting presentation means may all be display means (for example, all may be liquid crystal display devices, or the first presentation means and the second presentation means may be liquid crystal display devices and the connecting presentation means may be a dot display device, etc.), or the first presentation means and the second presentation means may be electrically driven presentation means or movable role presentation means, and the connecting presentation means may be a display means.

Also, the first and second performance means may be arranged at a distance from each other with a connecting performance means between them, or the first and second performance means may be arranged adjacent to each other (the first and second performance means and the connecting performance means are arranged so that they can be displaced relative to each other) with the connecting performance means arranged from in front of the first performance means to in front of the second performance means (the position of the connecting performance means may be fixed, or it may be displaceable to a position in front of the first performance means (overlapping in the front-to-back horizontal direction (perpendicular direction to the front of the pachinko machine 10)) but not in front of the second performance means, a position in front of the second performance means but not in front of the first performance means, or a position not in front of the first performance means and the second performance means).

Means PA-2. The gaming machine described in means PA-1, characterized in that at least one of the first presentation means and the second presentation means is composed of an electrically driven presentation means capable of performing an electrically driven presentation using an electrically driven role operated by an electrically driven means, or a mobile role presentation means capable of performing a mobile role presentation using a mobile role that can move based on mechanical energy.

Means PA-2 allows players to enjoy analog-style presentations that are different in style from gaming machines that only display presentations using a display device (such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device). Of course, there is a concern that a presentation using a single presentation means that performs analog presentations may end up being monotonous, but means PA can derive a series of diverse presentations using the first presentation means, second presentation means, and transition presentation means, eliminating such concerns.

In addition, when both the first and second presentation means are electrically driven presentation means or movable gadget presentation means, the presentation means (analog presentation means) performing the analog presentation can be divided into multiple parts to suppress the deviation of each analog presentation means. Furthermore, by inserting a transitional presentation into the analog presentation, it is possible to eliminate the deviation of the analog presentation in the transitional presentation. In addition, for example, when the transitional presentation is a display presentation using a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to derive a bold transitional presentation that is impossible to perform in analog (for example, that is physically impossible), and the range of the series of presentations can be greatly expanded. As a result, the game can proceed smoothly while incorporating analog presentation, and the interest can be increased.

The electrical drive means may be, for example, a configuration that appropriately uses a motor, a solenoid, etc. Furthermore, the electrical drive means may be driven and controlled by a performance control means that controls the performance.

Below, as Means A, we will list the configuration in which the first and second presentation means described in Means PA-1 and PA-2 above are embodied in the mobile prop presentation means described in Means PA-2, but it is also possible to appropriately change (replace) the "mobile prop presentation means" described in Means A below to the "first presentation means and second presentation means", or even to "configurations other than the mobile prop presentation means included in the first presentation means and second presentation means (for example, display means, electrically driven presentation means, etc.)".

Means A-1. A moving role production means is provided that can derive a moving role production that uses a moving role (a mass-bearing object) that can be derived to a position visible from the player side and gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction by the behavior of the moving role,
The moving role production means includes a moving role movement area in which the moving role is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy,
In the moving type reel performance, at least a part of the moving reel moving from the start point to the end point of the moving type reel movement area is visually recognized,
The movable part movement area includes a first movable part movement area and a second movable part movement area,
A gaming machine characterized by having a connecting performance means capable of executing a connecting performance that derives a virtual movement pattern of the movable device between the first movable device movement area and the second movable device movement area.

According to the means A-1, the mobile reel performance using the mobile reel can provide a different performance from that displayed by a display device (such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device). Furthermore, a transition performance is performed in such a way that the behavior of the mobile reel that has been moving in either the first mobile reel movement area or the second mobile reel movement area is taken over, and is taken over by the behavior of the mobile reel in the other of the first mobile reel movement area and the second mobile reel movement area. For this reason, (although the mobile reel performance in each mobile reel movement area may have fewer performance patterns compared to the performance by a display device), it is possible to diversify the performance by combining the mobile reel performance in multiple mobile reel movement areas, and further increase the variety of performances in the transition performance that connects the mobile reel performances in multiple mobile reel movement areas. Therefore, it is possible to derive a series of spectacular effects that combine the moving feature effects in the first moving feature movement area and the second moving feature movement area with transitional effects, while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of each moving feature movement area.

Also, by dividing the moving feature performance into multiple parts, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of each moving feature performance. Furthermore, by inserting a transitional performance into the moving feature performance, it is possible to eliminate the misalignment of the moving feature performance in the transitional performance. In addition, for example, if the transitional performance is a display performance using a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to derive bold transitional performances that are impossible to perform in analog (for example, that are physically impossible), greatly expanding the range of the series of performances. As a result, it is possible to smoothly progress the game while incorporating analog performances, and it is possible to increase interest.

The number of movable feature movement areas is not limited to two, and three or more may be provided, with transitional effects being performed between the movable feature movement areas. The "start point of the movable feature movement area" is the position where the movable feature is placed (put on standby) when the movable feature performance in a specified movable feature movement area begins, and the "end point of the mobile feature movement area" is the position where the mobile feature is located when the mobile feature performance in a specified movable feature movement area ends, and is the position where it is collected from the mobile feature movement area. The start point and end point of the pseudo ball displacement area may be made invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, a "connecting effect that derives the virtual movement pattern of a moving part" is an effect using visual and audio patterns that suggest that the behavior of a moving part in one of the first and second moving part movement areas is continuing, and the virtual movement pattern of the moving part is carried over to the behavior of the moving part in the other of the first and second moving part movement areas. For example, a toy car is used as the mobile prop, and a front-view plate-like blind is provided between the end point of the first mobile prop movement area and the start point of the second mobile prop movement area, and based on detection by the first end point detection means, sounds reminiscent of a car traveling at high speed, sounds reminiscent of slow speed driving, sounds reminiscent of normal driving, sounds reminiscent of driving in bad weather or on a bad road, etc. are randomly derived (the selection rate may vary depending on whether or not the final result is successful) as a transition effect (the blind may be composed of a display means such as a liquid crystal display device or a dot display device, and the toy car may be displayed on the display means), and the mobile prop performance in the second mobile prop movement area is started at a timing suitable for such a transition effect, or at a timing that is intentionally shifted.

In the case of a pachinko machine, a pseudo ball that takes over the behavior of a game ball may be used as a moving accessory. For example,
"A game area to which the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
In a gaming machine having a ball entry means into which a gaming ball moving in the gaming area can enter,
A pseudo-ball effect means is provided for effecting a pseudo-ball device effect that uses a pseudo-ball (having mass) that can be delivered to a position visible to a player, and that gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction based on the behavior of the pseudo-ball;
the pseudo-ball effect means includes a pseudo-ball movement area in which the pseudo-ball is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy,
In the pseudo-ball effect, at least a part of the pseudo-ball moving from a start point to an end point of the pseudo-ball moving area is visually recognized,
The pseudo sphere movement region includes a first pseudo sphere movement region and a second pseudo sphere movement region,
The present invention may further include a transition effect means capable of executing a transition effect for deriving a virtual movement display of the pseudo ball between the first pseudo ball movement region and the second pseudo ball movement region.

In addition, when embodied in a pachinko machine, "the movable accessory movement area is disposed at the rear of the game board that forms the play area on the front side, and at least the part of the game board located in front of the movable accessory movement area has transparency (the movable accessory moving in the movable accessory movement area is configured to be visible)." In this case, it is possible to prevent the play area from being narrowed.

Means A-2. The gaming machine described in means A-1, characterized in that it is equipped with an end point detection means for detecting the end point of the movable accessory movement area or the movable accessory located in the vicinity thereof.

By means of means A-2, it is possible to grasp that the moving part has reached the end of the moving part movement area, and it is possible to more smoothly connect the behavior of the moving part in the moving part movement area with the performance that follows the moving part performance (transition performance). Therefore, it is possible to perform a spectacular performance that combines the moving part performance and the transition performance while carefully adjusting the timing, thereby improving the performance, etc. It is also possible to grasp that the moving part is stuck in the middle of the moving part movement area, etc.

It is preferable that the end point detection means is configured to detect a moving part just before it reaches its end point, or a moving part that is partially approaching its end point, rather than a moving part that has completely reached its end point. Also, it may be configured such that "the second moving part movement area is disposed downstream of the first moving part movement area, and is provided with a first end point detection means that detects the end point of the first moving part movement area or the moving part located in its vicinity, the transition performance is performed based on the detection of the first end point detection means, and after the transition performance is performed, the moving part performance in the second moving part movement area is performed."

Furthermore, it is preferable that the end point detection means is composed of a sensor or the like capable of detecting the pseudo ball without contact. In addition, it is preferable that a buffer means (e.g., using a spring or rubber) is provided at the end point of the movable prop moving area to buffer the pseudo ball that has moved through the movable prop moving area. In this case, damage to the end point of the movable prop moving area can be suppressed, and the collision sound of the pseudo ball can be suppressed. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a movable prop storage means for storing pseudo balls that are not used in the pseudo ball performance, and a storage assistance means (electrically driven and controlled) for guiding the pseudo ball that abuts against the buffer means to the movable prop storage means.

Means A-3. The gaming machine described in means A-1 or A-2, characterized in that the transition performance is configured to be able to reflect changes in the movement pattern of the movable device that occur in the movable device performance.

According to Means A-3, the change in the behavior of the movable props (difference from standard movement) that occurs during the movable prop performance is properly reflected in the transition performance, so that the movable prop performance and the transition performance can be more appropriately connected, resulting in a more interesting performance.

Means A-4. The moving role production and the connecting production constitute a teaching production that teaches or suggests predetermined information,
The duration of the instruction performance is determined in advance,
The gaming machine described in means E-3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the time of the connecting performance depending on the time required for the moving device performance.

By means of method A-4, the time variation of the moving prop performance can be eliminated by adjusting the time of the connecting performance, and the teaching performance can be performed for a set period of time.

Means A-5. A gaming machine described in any one of means A-1 to E-4, characterized in that the moving role presentation is configured to be able to reflect changes in the virtual movement of the moving role that occur in the transition presentation.

By means of means A-5, the link between the transitional performance and the moving role performance can be improved, and the performance quality can be improved. As an example of the form, in the first moving role performance, two moving roles are moved, but in the transitional performance, a display is made in which one moving role (virtual form) is reduced, and then in the second moving role performance, there is only one moving role.

Means A-6. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-5, characterized in that the movable feature used in the first movable feature movement area and the movable feature used in the second movable feature movement area are prepared separately.

By means of Measure A-6, it is possible to simplify the configuration for operating the movable parts in each movable part movement area, shorten the time to circulate the movable parts (the time from when the movable part is used in a movable part performance until it can be set at the starting point), etc. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the movable parts, and improve convenience when the movable part movement area and its related parts need to be replaced, etc.

It may be that the moving parts for the second moving part movement area are the same as the moving parts for the first moving part movement area (at least one of the same parts, or at least all of the same parts, or the number and type of moving parts are the same) or that the moving parts for the second moving part movement area are different from the moving parts for the first moving part movement area (at least one different part, or all different). For example, a white ball (no suggestion), a blue ball (expectation of a specified condition being met: small), and a yellow ball (expectation of a specified condition being met: medium) may be prepared for the first moving part movement area, and a white ball, a yellow ball, and a green ball (expectation of a specified condition being met: high) may be prepared for the second moving part movement area.

Means A-7. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized in that the transition performance means is composed of a display means capable of displaying a virtual moving feature corresponding to the moving feature.

By means of A-7, it is possible to derive bold connecting effects that are impossible to implement in analog (for example, those that are physically impossible to achieve), greatly expanding the range of a series of effects. In addition, it is possible to more appropriately connect moving feature effects, and for example, when there is something that needs to be coordinated as the duration of a moving feature effect, it is possible to eliminate time lags and inconsistencies in the moving feature effect as seamlessly as possible.

The display means may be, for example, various display devices such as liquid crystal display devices, EL display devices, dot display devices, or devices with appropriate arrangements of light-emitting bodies and movable props. When eliminating the time lag of the moving prop performance in the transition performance means (display means), it is necessary to quickly calculate the time lag and generate a "moving prop display" corresponding to the moving prop. For this reason, in order to reduce the burden on display control, the time adjustment may be performed by inserting an almost still image such as a cut-in display.

Means A-8. The first movable accessory movement area is disposed upstream of the second movable accessory movement area;
The transition effect means, in the transition effect,
A basic movement pattern that performs a virtual movement display of the moving part from the first moving part movement area to the second moving part movement area;
The gaming machine described in means A-7 is characterized in that it is capable of deriving an applied movement pattern that displays a virtual movement of the movable device from the second movable device movement area to the first movable device movement area.

By using method A-8, it is possible to derive an effect in which a moving device flows backwards through the play area, which is difficult to achieve with analog effects. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects while taking advantage of the moving device effects, and to prevent a feeling of monotony, etc.

Means A-9. The movable accessory movement area includes the first movable accessory movement area and a third movable accessory movement area provided at a position spaced apart from the second movable accessory movement area;
The first movable accessory movement area is disposed upstream of the second movable accessory movement area, and the second movable accessory movement area is disposed upstream of the third movable accessory movement area,
The transition effect means, in the transition effect,
A basic movement pattern that performs a virtual movement display of the moving part from the first moving part movement area to the second moving part movement area;
A gaming machine described in means A-7 or A-8, characterized in that it is possible to derive an applied movement pattern that displays a virtual movement of the movable device from the first movable device movement area to the third movable device movement area.

According to the method A-9, the transitional performance means (display means) can easily and freely switch (display) the movement path of the moving props. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the performance of the moving props while preventing monotony.

Means A-10. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-9, characterized in that a start assist means is provided for displacing the movable feature located at the starting point corresponding to each of the movable feature movement areas to the connecting passage side, which is a portion of the movable feature movement area that connects the starting point and the end point.

According to Means A-10, in the moving part movement area that is the target of the moving part performance, the moving part can be made to wait at the starting point a little before the start of the moving part performance, and the movement of the moving part (moving part performance) can be started at a timing that matches other performances, etc. Also, compared to a configuration in which the moving part naturally moves to a connecting passage when it reaches the starting point, for example, the initial movement of the moving part in the moving part movement area can be stabilized, and it is also possible to appropriately adjust the movement speed of the moving part to be moved to each moving part movement area.

The connecting passage does not have to be a single road, and it is possible to provide a switching means at the branching point to switch the destination of the pseudo ball. Furthermore, an outlet may be provided in the connecting passage, and a shutter that can open and close the outlet may be opened so that the pseudo ball moving along the connecting passage is discharged from the outlet to the outside of the connecting passage (returned to the storage means that stores the pseudo ball). Also, the orientation (inclination) of the starting point floor that supports the movable prop placed at the starting point may be configured to be changeable. In this case, it is possible to provide variations in the direction in which the movable prop is launched from the starting point.

Means A-11. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-10, characterized in that it is provided with an external force application means that can apply an external force to the movable accessory moving in the movable accessory movement area.

According to the means A-11, it is possible to diversify the performance of the moving role. In addition, when the movement of the moving role is stalled in the moving role movement area, it is possible to resolve the stall of the moving role without the need for the person in charge of the game hall where the game machine is installed to touch it directly with his/her hand. In addition, examples of the external force adding means include a device equipped with a member that uses a solenoid or the like to contact the moving role and change the direction of the moving role, and a device that changes the speed of the moving role or the time of the moving role performance by vibrating the passage of the moving role movement area, changing the inclination, or blowing wind. In addition, the trigger for the operation of the external force adding means to resolve the unexpected stall of the movement of the moving role in the moving role movement area may be automatic or may be a predetermined operation by the person in charge of the game hall (an operation means for resolving errors is provided on the back side of the game machine).

Means A-12. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-11, characterized in that it is provided with a transparent display means arranged in front of the first movable accessory movement area and the second movable accessory movement area, and which allows the movable accessory moving in the first movable accessory movement area and the second movable accessory movement area to be visually recognized while allowing the user to visually recognize the state of the movable accessory from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the method A-12, the behavior of the moving props and the display mode of the transparent display means can be combined (overlapped) to make the moving prop performance more interesting. It is also possible to perform a transition between the moving prop performance in the moving prop movement area and the transition performance in the transition performance means (for example, in front of the frame of the display device as the transition performance means).

Means A-13. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-12, characterized in that the movable device has an RFID tag built in.

According to the means A-13, for example, when a reading means for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to the first movable reel movement area and the second movable reel movement area, it becomes possible to grasp where the movable reel is moving in the movable reel movement area, and when a performance is derived according to a movable reel moving in the movable reel movement area, such a performance can be more accurately matched to the behavior of the movable reel. Also, for example, when there are multiple types of movable reels, when a reading means for reading an RFID tag is provided corresponding to a movable reel storage means for storing multiple types of movable reels, management of multiple types of movable reels can be performed relatively simply and accurately. In other words, it is possible to take out the necessary movable reels without having to associate the room in which the movable reels are stored in the movable reel storage means with the type of the movable reels. It is also possible to derive a complex performance that shows multiple movable reels mixed together.

The application of the technology of providing an "RFID tag" to a movable part is not limited to gaming machines having a first movable part movement area, a second movable part movement area, and a transition performance means, but may also be embodied in gaming machines having only one movable part movement area or having no transition performance means. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to a configuration in which an RFID tag is provided on a movable part, an RFID tag may be provided on a movable part (connected to a drive source via a connection means). For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple movable parts can be overlapped front to back, and each movable part can be individually (or in groups divided into multiple groups) displaced between a first position and a second position, and a reading means capable of reading the combination of movable parts in the first position is provided.

Means A-14. A gaming machine described in any one of means A-1 to A-13, characterized in that at least one of the first movable accessory movement area and the second movable accessory movement area is configured to be displaceable relative to the transition performance means (in a range adjacent to the transition performance means).

Means A-14 derives an innovative effect in which the mobile feature moving area in which the mobile feature moves itself is displaced, and even if the position of the mobile feature moving area is changed, the connecting effect means interposed between the first mobile feature moving area and the second mobile feature moving area can effectively connect the mobile feature effect of the first mobile feature moving area to the mobile feature effect of the second mobile feature moving area.

The "adjacent range" means that the entrance and exit of the first movable feature moving area and the second movable feature moving area are continuous with the transitional performance means when viewed from the player's side (front of the gaming machine), and it is preferable that the entrance and exit sides of the first movable feature moving area and the second movable feature moving area overlap with the transitional performance means, regardless of the relative positions of the first movable feature moving area and the second movable feature moving area with the transitional performance means. It is also possible to move beyond the adjacent range, and in that case, by providing the transparent display means of the above-mentioned means A-12, the transition of the movable feature performance can be performed relatively smoothly.

Means A-15. A gaming machine described in any one of means A-1 to A-14, characterized in that at least one of the movable accessory movement areas is configured to be shape-changeable.

By using method A-15, it is possible to create a bold surprise effect in which the area in which the movable props move changes shape (for example, the direction or width of the passage changes) and the behavior of the movable props also changes completely.

Means A-16. The gaming machine described in any one of means A-1 to A-15, characterized in that the transition performance means is configured to be displaceable relative to the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area in the range adjacent to the entrance and exit of the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area.

By means of means A-16, it is possible to derive effects such as displacing the transition effect means in conjunction with the movement of the movable reel in the movable reel movement area. This makes it possible to further strengthen the linkage between the series of effects consisting of the movable reel effect and the transition effect, and to derive bolder effects.

B (A takeover performance that takes over a specified behavior is performed by connecting performances by multiple performance means). One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a gaming ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on a gaming board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (for example, see JP 2006-271480 A).

However, in pachinko machines equipped with variable display means, many players progress through the game simply by continuing to look at the variable display means. This raises concerns that players will quickly become bored, and in the first place, the game of continually looking at the variable display means has become monotonous.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means PB-1. A takeover performance means that is executed based on the detection of a specific detection means corresponding to a specific means and is capable of deriving a takeover performance that takes over a behavior that is the target of the detection of the specific detection means for the specific means;
The takeover performance means includes an A performance means for performing an A performance and a B performance means for performing a B performance at a position visible from the player side,
A configuration in which a predetermined suggestion or instruction is given by the A performance and the B performance,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to start one of the A performance and the B performance as the handover performance based on detection by the specific detection means, and is configured to be able to start the other performance by taking over from the end of the one performance.

According to the means PB-1, by carrying out a takeover performance in a manner that takes over the detection (behavior related to detection) of a specific detection means that detects as the game progresses, it is possible to more deeply link actual events with virtual performance, and to derive bold performances that would not actually occur. In other words, the takeover performance is merely a performance, and can be set freely. Furthermore, by carrying out multiple patterns of takeover performance based on design, it is possible to carry out a wide variety of predetermined suggestions and instructions. In particular, since the takeover performance is composed of a combination (connection) of performance A of performance means A and performance B of performance means B, it is possible to further diversify the performance based on the innovative performance in which the performance continues in a linked manner through different performance means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance and playability, and ultimately to improve the interest.

The specific configuration of the A and B performance means is not particularly limited, and examples include display means such as a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, and a dot display device, electrically driven performance means described below, movable prop performance means described below, and light emitting means (group; arranged in a predetermined manner) consisting of lamps such as LEDs.

Examples of "detection by a specific detection means" include detection by a start ball entry detection means that detects a gaming ball that has entered the start ball entry means in a pachinko machine, detection by an operation detection means that detects the operation of an operation means that can be operated by a player in a pachinko machine or slot machine, or detection by an approach detection means that can detect the approach or contact of a specific object such as a player's hand. Examples of "behavior that is the subject of detection by a specific detection means" include the behavior of a gaming ball that has entered the start ball entry means, the behavior of the operation means that has been operated, and the behavior of a player's hand approaching the approach detection means.

Means PB-2. The gaming machine described in means PB-1, characterized in that at least one of the presentation means A and the presentation means B is composed of an electrically driven presentation means capable of performing an electrically driven presentation using an electrically driven part operated by an electrically driven means, or a mobile part presentation means capable of performing a mobile part presentation using a mobile part that can move based on mechanical energy.

By using the means PB-2, players can enjoy analogue effects that are different in style from gaming machines that only use a display device (such as a liquid crystal display or a dot display device). Of course, there is a concern that an analogue effect produced by a single presentation means may result in monotony in the presentation, but with this means PA, a series of diverse presentations can be produced by the A presentation means, B presentation means, and connecting presentation means, eliminating such concerns.

The electrical drive means may be, for example, a configuration that appropriately uses a motor, a solenoid, etc. Furthermore, the electrical drive means may be driven and controlled by a performance control means that controls the performance.

Below, as Means B, we will list the configuration in which the A performance means and B performance means described in Means PB-1 and PB-2 above are embodied in the pseudo-ball performance means and display means described in Means PB-2. However, it is also possible to appropriately change (replace) the "pseudo-ball performance means and display means" described in Means B below to "A performance means and B performance means," or even to "configurations other than the mobile prop performance means included in the A performance means and B performance means (for example, a display means, an electrically driven performance means, a pseudo-ball performance means (or the mobile prop performance described in Means A above), etc.)."

Means B-1. A game area to which the game ball launched by the launching means is guided;
In a gaming machine having a ball entry means into which a gaming ball moving in the gaming area can enter,
A takeover performance means is provided for taking over a performance of taking over a behavior of a game ball that has entered a specific ball entry means among the ball entry means,
The handover performance means includes:
A pseudo-ball effect means capable of producing a pseudo-ball effect using a pseudo-ball which is an object that is delivered to a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
A display means capable of deriving a pseudo-ball display effect for displaying a virtual pseudo-ball,
A configuration in which a predetermined suggestion or instruction is given by displaying the behavior of the pseudo ball and the movement of the pseudo ball,
The gaming machine is configured to be capable of starting one of the pseudo ball presentation and the pseudo ball display presentation as the handover presentation based on detection by a specific ball entry detection means which detects a gaming ball that has entered the specific ball entry means, and is configured to be capable of starting the other presentation by taking over from the end of the one presentation.

According to means B-1, a takeover effect (pseudo ball effect and pseudo ball display effect) is performed by displaying a pseudo ball or a virtual pseudo ball in a manner that takes over the behavior of the gaming ball that was moving in the gaming area, making it possible to derive bold effects that cannot be performed with a gaming ball. In other words, since the behavior of the gaming ball (which ball entry means the ball enters) generally changes the advantage or disadvantage in progressing the game (for example, the game value granted to the player differs), it is not possible to arbitrarily apply an external force to the gaming ball after it has been launched by the launching means in order to make it easier to determine that the game is being played fairly.

In this regard, although the takeover effect gives the appearance of the game ball's behavior being taken over, it is still merely a performance, and the behavior of the pseudo ball and the pseudo ball display can be freely set. Furthermore, by using multiple patterns of pseudo ball performance and pseudo ball display performance based on design (for example, by associating a predetermined pattern of pseudo ball performance with a predetermined item), it is possible to provide a wide variety of predetermined suggestions and instructions. This can lead to improved performance and playability, and ultimately to increased interest.

In addition, the pseudo-ball performance uses a physical pseudo-ball, allowing viewers to enjoy an analog performance (the analog performance part of the handover performance) in which they can follow the behavior of the pseudo-ball with their eyes and feel happy or sad. Furthermore, the pseudo-ball display performance allows viewers to enjoy a digital performance (the digital performance part of the handover performance) in which the virtual behavior of the pseudo-ball, which would be physically difficult to achieve, is displayed on the display means, and the behavior of the pseudo-ball is skillfully connected to the pseudo-ball performance (by adjusting time, position, etc.). As a result, a handover performance that combines analog and digital performance can be provided smoothly and easily, and interest can be increased more reliably.

The "display means" may be, for example, various display devices such as liquid crystal display devices, EL display devices, dot display devices, or appropriately arranged light-emitting bodies and movable parts (e.g., continuous or intermittent arrangement of objects shaped to resemble pseudo-balls). The "specific ball entry means" may be configured to eject the game ball from the game area immediately after it enters, or may be configured to form an entrance to a specific area in the game area so that the game ball that entered can remain in the game area (specific area) even when the handover performance starts or ends (or may be a gate equipped with a passage detection means as a specific ball entry detection means that detects a game ball passing through a specified part of the game area). Furthermore, the handover performance may start with either the pseudo-ball performance or the pseudo-ball display performance, and may end with either. In addition, the number of times the pseudo-ball effect and the pseudo-ball display effect are performed in the transition effect is not limited to one each, but can be changed as appropriate (they can be two or more, and the number of times the pseudo-ball effect and the pseudo-ball display effect do not have to be the same), and the two effects can be switched back and forth multiple times. Note that the pseudo-ball in the pseudo-ball effect of this means is not limited to one that moves based on mechanical energy, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is connected to a member that is linked to an electrical drive means, for example.

Means B-2. The gaming machine described in means B-1, characterized in that it is provided with a guidance display means for performing a guidance display that moves a focus area (guiding the player's line of sight) from the specific ball entry means immediately after the game ball enters the ball to the starting point of the takeover performance in the takeover performance means when the takeover performance is performed based on detection by the specific ball entry detection means.

According to means B-2, the connection between the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry means and the takeover performance can be strengthened (even if the specific ball entry means and the start position of the takeover performance are arranged at a distance). Therefore, it is possible to make it clearer that the behavior of the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means is taken over by the takeover performance, making it easier for the player to understand what the takeover performance is. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize the start point and start timing of the takeover performance, allowing the player to enjoy the takeover performance more reliably. Furthermore, since the specific ball entry means and the start point of the takeover performance can be linked even if they are arranged at a distance, the design freedom can be improved with regard to the placement of the specific ball entry means and the start point of the takeover performance.

In addition, by using the guidance display means, it is possible to change (adjust) the time from when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means until the handover performance starts without any sense of incongruity. In that case, the handover performance can be derived at a suitable timing. Also, for example, compared to a case where the handover performance always starts immediately when it is decided to execute the handover performance, it is possible to avoid a situation where the handover performance interferes with other performances (especially in a configuration in which the variable display of the identification information, which will be described in detail later, is reserved and stored). Furthermore, it is possible to select the optimal start timing for the handover performance (taking into account the length of the handover performance, etc.), and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the performance is reduced when the handover performance is unnecessarily extended by waiting for the start of the pseudo-ball performance. In addition, it is also possible to perform a performance that increases the expectation that a certain suggestion or instruction will be given in the handover performance by making the start of the handover performance a daunting one.

In addition, in cases where the time from when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means to when the handover performance starts is extended, the "guidance display" of the guidance display means becomes a "standby display" that instructs the player that the handover performance is waiting to start. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the handover performance is waiting to start.

The guidance display of the guidance display means may be, for example, configured to arrange a light-emitting means between the specific ball-entering means and the start point of the handover performance (on the game board with the game area formed on the front side or on the back side thereof), and to sequentially light up and then turn off the light from the specific ball-entering means to the start point of the handover performance, or to arrange a movable device (on the back side of a transparent game board) between the specific ball-entering means and the start point of the handover performance, and to move the device from the specific ball-entering means to the start point of the handover performance (it is desirable to have the device pass through an invisible area when returning it to the specific ball-entering means side), or to provide guidance display using a transparent display means arranged in front of the game area and allowing the game area to be seen.

Means B-3. The gaming machine described in means B-2, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined suggestion or instruction based on the pattern of the guidance display derived by the guidance display means.

By using method B-3, the presentation value of the guidance display that is triggered by a ball being scored into a specific scoring method can be increased, and the series of handover presentations can be made more spectacular and interesting.

Means B-4. A starting ball entry means capable of entering the ball moving in the game area;
A start ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means;
a main control means for performing a winning/losing lottery based on the detection of the starting ball entry detection means, and for granting a special game state advantageous to the player when the player wins the winning/losing lottery;
The specific goal-scoring means is constituted by the initial goal-scoring means,
The initial goal detection means constitutes the specific goal detection means,
A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3, characterized in that the result of the winning/losing lottery is suggested or instructed by the handover performance.

By using method B-4, it is possible to create greater interest in the handover performance.

Means B-5. A special display means for displaying a variable display of identification information that indicates the result of the winning or losing lottery;
a remaining time measuring means for measuring the remaining time of the variable display of the identification information,
The gaming machine described in means B-4 is characterized in that the presentation mode of at least one of the pseudo ball presentation and the pseudo ball display presentation can be changed based on the remaining time measured by the remaining time measuring means.

According to the means B-5, for example, it is possible to adjust the timing of the end of the variable display of the identification information of the special display means and the timing of the end of the handover performance, for example. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the difference between the end of the variable display of the identification information of the special display means and the end of the handover performance is too large, or a certain handover performance does not make it in time for the end of the variable display of the corresponding identification information and ends some time after the start of the variable display of the next identification information, making it impossible to understand the correspondence between the handover performance and the variable display of the identification information (making it impossible to determine what the handover performance is suggesting or teaching). In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to change the performance mode (length of time) of the "pseudo-ball display performance", which is relatively easy to adjust the time.

Means B-6. The pseudo-ball effect means includes a pseudo-ball moving area in which the pseudo-ball is movable based on mechanical energy,
In the pseudo-ball effect, at least a part of the pseudo-ball moving from a start point to an end point of the pseudo-ball moving area is visually recognized,
The gaming machine described in means B-4 or B-5 is characterized in that it is equipped with an end point detection means for detecting the end point of the pseudo-ball movement area or the moving device located in its vicinity.

By means of means B-6, it is possible to grasp that the pseudo ball has reached the end point, and it is possible to relatively smoothly transition to the effect that follows the pseudo ball effect (for example, a pseudo ball display effect). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance of a spectacular transition effect that combines the behavior of the pseudo ball with the display of a virtual pseudo ball by the display means. It is also possible to grasp that the pseudo ball is stuck in the middle of the pseudo ball movement area.

It is preferable that the end point detection means is configured to be able to detect a pseudo ball just before it reaches the end point, or a pseudo ball that is partially approaching the end point, rather than being able to detect a pseudo ball that has completely reached the end point. The "start point of the pseudo ball movement area" is the position where the pseudo ball is placed (waits) when the pseudo ball performance starts, and the "end point of the pseudo ball movement area" is the position where the pseudo ball is located when the pseudo ball performance ends, and is the position where it is retrieved from the pseudo ball movement area.

Means B-7. A special display means for displaying a variable display of identification information that indicates the result of the winning or losing lottery;
a winning/losing related information acquisition means for acquiring winning/losing related information to be used in the winning/losing lottery when the starting ball entry detection means detects the winning/losing lottery;
In a configuration in which, when a player wins the lottery, the special game state is started after the variable display of the identification information on the special display means is finished,
When the start ball entry detection means detects the start ball entry, it is determined whether or not to execute the takeover performance.
A gaming machine described in any one of means B-4 to B-6, characterized in that the handover performance ends when the variable display of the corresponding identification information ends.

By means of means B-7, the suggestions and instructions given by the handover performance can be reliably matched with the result of the winning/losing lottery (the variable display of the identification information by the special display means which gives the instruction), and the handover performance can be established as a performance which suggests or gives the result of the winning/losing lottery.

It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is no lottery for the handover performance and the handover performance is guaranteed to occur, or a period may be set in which the handover performance is guaranteed to occur or has a high probability of occurring.

Means B-8. A reserve storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the pass/fail related information acquired by the pass/fail related information acquisition means;
a reserve display means capable of deriving a reserve display indicating that the pass/fail related information is stored in the storage area of the reserve storage means;
When the start ball detection means detects a ball during the display of the variation of the identification information on the special display means, the display of the variation of the identification information corresponding to the detection is held in abeyance so as to be displayed after the display of the variation of the identification information being displayed during the execution of the detection.
A pre-reading process is performed to determine whether or not the predetermined winning/losing related information corresponds to the special game state at a stage before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined winning/losing related information stored in the reserved storage means is executed,
The gaming machine described in means B-7 is characterized in that in the pre-reading process, it is also determined whether the takeover performance lottery information obtained together with the win/loss related information will result in a win in the takeover performance lottery.

According to means B-8, for example, even if the winning/losing related information is stored in the reserved storage means (so-called variable display is reserved and stored), the winning/losing of the pseudo-ball effect lottery is also determined at the timing of detection by the starting ball entry detection means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the pseudo-ball effects, make it easier to understand which reserved the pseudo-ball effects correspond to, and improve the performance and convenience.

Means B-9. The gaming machine described in means B-8, characterized in that the takeover performance can be started when the display of the change in the identification information is performed prior to the display of the change in the identification information corresponding to the winning/losing related information acquired together with the takeover performance lottery information that was won in the takeover performance lottery.

According to the method B-9, it is possible to derive a spectacular handover performance using multiple (times of) changing displays. It is also possible to "prohibit the start of another handover performance while the handover performance is being executed," or to "allow another handover performance to be started even while the handover performance is being executed."

Means B-10. The gaming machine described in means B-8 or B-9, characterized in that it is configured to be able to start another takeover performance while the takeover performance is being executed.

By means of means B-10, it is possible to derive novel effects that would not occur by the variable display of the identification information of the special display means, such as starting a handover effect that indicates or suggests the result of a different win/lose lottery during a handover effect that indicates or suggests the result of a specific win/lose lottery (overlapping handover effects). In addition, by overlapping multiple handover effects (for example, the number of pseudo balls during the handover effect increases to two), the presentation becomes more lively, making the handover effect more interesting.

In addition, when multiple takeover effects are being performed simultaneously, if the previous takeover effect corresponds to a variable display that was won in a win/lose lottery and an instruction is given that the previous takeover effect was won in the win/lose lottery, a display may be generated indicating that the subsequent takeover effects will be paused, restarted, combined, or changed in order, or they may not be performed at all. In this case, even if the period in which the variable display is performed based on the win/lose lottery is temporarily suspended, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the takeover effects that have already started are treated as if they never happened, causing discomfort to the player.

Means B-11. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-8 to B-10, characterized in that it is provided with a guidance display means for performing a guidance display that moves a focus area (guiding the player's line of sight) from the reserved display of the reserved display means to the start point of the takeover performance of the takeover performance means.

According to the means B-11, it is possible to perform a handover performance that clearly corresponds to the hold. Therefore, basically, the same effect as the above-mentioned means B-2 is achieved. Furthermore, when the handover performance is put on hold (the start is delayed), the configuration may be such that it is possible to recognize that the handover performance is on hold (for example, the manner of the corresponding hold display of the hold display means changes), or the content of the handover performance may be suggested.

Means B-12. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-11, characterized in that the diameter of the pseudo ball is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

By using method B-12, the artificial ball can be made easier to see, allowing the player to enjoy the artificial ball presentation even more.

Means B-13. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-12, characterized in that it has a plurality of the same type of pseudo balls, and at least one of the pseudo balls of the same type is provided with a mark that is visible when the pseudo ball is viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to means B-13, a predetermined suggestion can be made using the pseudo ball. Furthermore, if the pseudo ball is configured so that the mark cannot be seen when viewed from any direction other than the predetermined direction, even if a marked pseudo ball is introduced to a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, there may be cases where the mark cannot be confirmed (the mark may be on the back side of the pseudo ball as seen by the player, or the pseudo ball is rotating at high speed and cannot be confirmed properly, etc.), so when a type of pseudo ball that may have a mark is introduced, a new fun can be added in that the player can confirm the mark.

The hint given by the "mark" may be a hint or instruction as to the result of a predetermined lottery, along with a handover performance, or a hint or instruction as to the setting of the probability of winning in a predetermined lottery in a configuration in which the probability of winning can be set in multiple stages.

C (Structure of a mobile feature presentation means in which a mobile feature is commonly used in multiple mobile feature movement areas). A pachinko machine is one type of gaming machine. In a pachinko machine, a gaming ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on a gaming board. For example, when a ball enters a starting ball entry means among the ball entry means, a winning or losing lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the winning or losing lottery (see, for example, JP 2006-271480 A).

However, in pachinko machines equipped with variable display means, many players progress through the game simply by continuing to look at the variable display means. This raises concerns that players will quickly become bored, and in the first place, the game of continually looking at the variable display means has become monotonous.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means C-1. A mobile role production means is provided that can produce a mobile role production that uses a mobile role that is an object that can be derived to a position visible from the player side and gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction by the behavior of the mobile role,
The moving role production means includes a moving role movement area in which the moving role is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy,
In the moving type role performance, at least a part of the appearance of the moving role moving from the start point to the end point of the moving type role moving area is visually recognized,
The movable role production means is
A mobile role storage means for storing the mobile role not used in the mobile role performance;
A preparation assistance means for moving the movable reel to be used among the movable reels stored in the movable reel storage means to the starting point;
A storage assistant means for storing the movable accessory that has reached the end point in the movable accessory storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable feature movement areas are provided at a distance from each other, but include a first movable feature movement area and a second movable feature movement area which share the movable feature and the storage assistance means.

According to Measure C-1, a mobile reel performance using a mobile reel can provide a different experience to the performance displayed by a display device. In addition, by providing a mobile reel storage means, a preparation assistance means, and a storage assistance means, a cycle of using the mobile reel can be reliably and relatively smoothly formed, in which the mobile reel used in the mobile reel performance is removed from the mobile reel storage means, and the mobile reel used in the mobile reel performance is stored in the mobile reel storage means. In particular, the existence of a mobile reel storage means that can take in and out the mobile reel makes it possible to use multiple mobile reels, improving convenience and performance.

Furthermore, since multiple mobile feature movement areas are provided in which the mobile feature moves, it is possible to diversify the mobile feature performance, and to prevent the performance from becoming repetitive. In addition, by sharing the mobile feature, mobile feature storage means, preparation assistance means, and storage assistance means in multiple mobile feature movement areas, it is possible to improve the convenience of managing the mobile feature while preventing the mobile feature performance means from becoming larger, the number of parts from increasing, and the manufacturing workability from decreasing.

Means C-2. The movable accessory storage means is configured to be displaceable;
The gaming machine described in means C-1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a displacement means capable of matching a position in the mobile feature storage means from which the mobile feature used in the mobile feature performance can be derived with the start points of the first mobile feature movement area and the second mobile feature movement area, and capable of matching a position in the mobile feature storage means from which the mobile feature used in the mobile feature performance can be received with the end points of the first mobile feature movement area and the second mobile feature movement area.

According to means C-2, by displacing the mobile reel drive means itself, the mobile reel reaches the start of the mobile reel movement area while remaining stored in the mobile reel storage means, and when the mobile reel reaches the end of the mobile reel movement area, it is already stored in the mobile reel storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exchange the mobile reel between the mobile reel storage means and the mobile reel movement area while suppressing the complication of the mobile reel performance means. Furthermore, when this means is adopted, the preparation assistance means and storage assistance means are constituted by the mobile reel storage means and the displacement means.

Means C-3. The gaming machine described in means C-2, characterized in that the mobile feature storage means is provided with a stopping means for blocking at least a part of the passage leading to the end point of one of the first and second mobile feature movement areas when a position in the mobile feature storage means from which the mobile feature used in the mobile feature performance can be derived is aligned with the start point of either the first mobile feature movement area or the second mobile feature movement area, thereby preventing the mobile feature from reaching the end point.

According to Measure C-3, when the mobile reel storage means is located at the start side of the mobile reel movement area, it is possible to avoid a situation where the mobile reel moves through the mobile reel movement area and reaches an end point of the mobile reel movement area where the mobile reel storage means is not yet located, making it impossible to store (recover) the mobile reel in the mobile reel storage means. In addition, since the stop means is provided in the mobile reel storage means, the passage on the end side of the mobile reel movement area can be opened and closed in conjunction with the displacement of the mobile reel storage means, which can simplify the configuration and control, for example, compared to the case where a separate shutter or the like is provided.

Means C-4. The preparation assistance means includes a first movable floor that can be displaced between a receiving position for receiving the movable reel discharged from the movable reel storage means, the first movable reel movement area, and the starting point of the second movable reel movement area;
The gaming machine described in means C-1 is characterized in that the storage assistance means is provided with a second movable floor that can be displaced between at least the end points of the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area and a return position where the movable feature can be returned to the movable feature storage means.

According to means C-4, by using the first and second movable floors, the movable parts can be moved in and out relatively smoothly between each movable part movement area and the movable part storage means, and the movable part performance can proceed relatively smoothly. In addition, for example, as in the case of a single movable floor, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which the movable floor does not arrive in time for the movable part that has started moving from the starting point to reach the end point (or the movable floor needs to be operated quite quickly to make time). Furthermore, the preparation assistance means is also shared between the first movable part movement area and the second movable part movement area, which makes it possible to improve convenience and performance while avoiding a complicated configuration, etc.

It is also possible that "the second movable floor located at the end point is located below the lower edge of the connection with the end point in the connecting passage that connects the start point and the end point in the moving prop movement area." In this case, a step is formed between the second movable floor at the end point and the connecting passage, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent the moving prop that has reached the end point from returning to the connecting passage. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the moving prop that has reached the end point appears to return to the connecting passage, which would cause a poor continuity in the performance, and it is possible to improve the performance of the moving prop performance.

It may also be that "the first movable floor located at the starting point is located above the lower edge of the connection with the starting point in the connecting passage that connects the starting point and the end point of the moving prop movement area." In this case, since the first movable floor at the starting point is set to be located above the connection with the starting point of the connecting passage, for example, when the first movable floor at the starting point and the connection with the starting point of the connecting passage are set to be flat, if an error occurs in the operation of the first movable floor, and the first movable floor is located slightly below the connection with the starting point of the connecting passage, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving prop is damaged or the moving prop at the starting point is unable to move toward the connecting passage.

Means C-5. The moving type reel production means is provided with a communication passage that connects the first moving type reel movement area and the second moving type reel movement area with the moving type reel storage means,
The gaming machine described in means C-4 is characterized in that the first movable floor and the second movable floor are configured to be displaceable in the common connecting passage, and the starting point and the ending point of the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area are located in the connecting passage.

Measure C-5 allows smoother transfer of the movable props between the movable prop storage means and the start and end points of the movable prop movement area. In addition, since the first and second movable floors are provided in a common connecting passage, the first and second movable floors can also be used in common in the first and second movable prop movement areas. This results in a more pronounced effect of improving the convenience of managing the movable props while suppressing the increase in size of the movable prop performance means, the increase in the number of parts, and the decrease in manufacturing workability.

Means C-6. The first movable accessory movement area is provided upstream of the second movable accessory movement area,
The second movable floor is configured to be able to be arranged at the starting point of the second movable prop movement area,
The movable accessory performance means includes a third movable floor that can be displaced between at least the end point of the second movable accessory movement area, the return position, and a retreat position that retreats from the second movable floor located at the end point of the second movable accessory movement area,
The gaming machine described in means C-4 or C-5 is characterized in that the third movable floor is positioned at the end point of the second movable feature movement area when the second movable floor is located at the start point of the second movable feature movement area (when the second movable floor is not positioned at the end point of the second movable feature movement area) (and is positioned at the retreat position when the second movable floor is positioned at the end point of the second movable feature movement area).

According to means C-6, in a configuration with a first movable role moving area and a second movable role moving area downstream of the first movable role moving area, a first movable floor with a movable role placed thereon and a second movable floor are arranged at the start and end points of the first movable role moving area, and after displacing the movable role from the start point to the end point of the first movable role moving area, the second movable floor is displaced to the start point of the second movable role moving area, so that the movable role can be moved as close to the start point as possible in the first movable role moving area and the second movable role moving area. Therefore, for example, a movable role that moves through the first movable role moving area and reaches the end point can be made to have a more diverse presentation than a configuration in which the movable role moves through the movable role storage means once before reaching the start point of the second movable role moving area.

In addition, due to the presence of the third movable floor, even if a movable part placed on the second movable floor located at the start point of the second movable part movement area reaches the end point of the second movable part movement area, the movable part can be received by the third movable floor and reliably returned to the movable part storage means. Furthermore, for example, after a pseudo-ball performance in the second movable part movement area, a pseudo-ball performance in the first movable part movement area can be performed relatively smoothly.

The second movable floor may be arranged at the start point of the first movable prop movement area, the third movable floor may be arranged at the end point of the first movable prop movement area, and the first movable floor may be arranged at an upper retreat position retreated from the start point of the first movable prop movement area to a side different from the end point side. In this case, it is possible to move the movable prop that has moved through the second movable prop movement area to the first movable prop movement area without going through the movable prop storage means.

Means C-7. In at least one of the first movable accessory moving area and the second movable accessory moving area, a performance in which a plurality of the movable accessories pass through continuously can be derived;
The gaming machine described in any of means C-4 to C-6, characterized in that the first movable floor is configured to be able to transport a plurality of the movable features at one time, and is configured to receive the plurality of movable features at the receiving position in the reverse order to the order in which they are passed through the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area.

By means of means C-7, it is possible to perform an effect in which multiple movable props pass successively through the first movable prop movement area and the second movable prop movement area.

Means C-8. A gaming machine as described in any one of means C-1 to C-7, characterized in that a start-up assistance means is provided for displacing the movable features located at the respective starting points of the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area to the side of a connecting passage that is a portion of the movable feature movement area that connects the starting point and the end point.

According to the method C-8, in each moving part movement area, the moving part can be made to wait at the starting point a little before the start of the moving part performance, and the movement of the moving part (moving part performance) can be started at a timing that matches other performances. In particular, even if sufficient measures are taken to prevent the moving part transported to the starting point by the first movable floor from inadvertently moving to the connecting passage side immediately after reaching the starting point (for example, the placement surface (upper surface) of the first movable floor is inclined downward on the opposite side to the connecting passage side), the moving part can be moved accurately to the connecting passage side at the desired timing. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the moving part naturally moves to the connecting passage when it reaches the starting point, for example, the initial movement of the moving part in the moving part movement area can be stabilized, and the moving speed of the moving part to each moving part movement area can also be appropriately adjusted.

In addition, in accordance with the above-mentioned means C-4, the start points of the first movable feature movement area and the second movable feature movement area may be different from the receiving position. In this case, the start assist means can be suitably installed in correspondence with each start point (while avoiding interference with the movable feature storage means, etc.), and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a movable feature ejected from the movable feature storage means passes through the start point of the movable feature movement area and starts moving in the movable feature movement area with the same momentum.

Furthermore, in response to the above-mentioned means C-4, "the first movable floor may be inclined upward toward the connecting passage connecting the start point and the end point of the movable prop movement area, or may be provided with a positioning recess for positioning the movable prop placed on the first movable floor, and the second movable floor may be inclined downward toward the movable prop storage means." By the first movable floor being inclined upward toward the connecting passage of the movable prop movement area, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the movable prop is inadvertently displaced to the connecting passage when the first movable floor moves to the start point. In addition, by the second movable floor being inclined downward toward the movable prop storage means, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a separate drive mechanism is required to move the movable prop placed on the second movable floor toward the storage room when returning the movable prop placed on the second movable floor at the return position to the movable prop storage means.

In addition, the "starting assistance means" may be, for example, a push-out means for pushing the movable prop placed on the first movable floor located at the starting point toward the connecting passage. The push-out means may be configured to be capable of changing the speed at which the movable prop is pushed toward the connecting passage. In this case, it is possible to diversify the performance. The push-out means may be, for example, a mechanism using a DC motor or a solenoid capable of changing the moving speed of a plunger. Furthermore, in order to prevent damage to the movable prop, it is desirable for the movable prop to be pushed out by the push-out means basically at a low speed, and even if it is pushed out at a high speed, it is desirable for the push-out means to gradually change from a low speed to a high speed when pushing out, and it is desirable for the push-out means and the movable prop to be in contact or close proximity when the movable prop is waiting at the starting point.

For example, in a configuration in which the movable prop storage means side and the connecting passage side are on the same side for the movable floor, a configuration may be adopted in which the inclination of the movable floor changes as the movable floor is displaced.

Means C-9. In the moving type role performance, a plurality of types of the moving type role are used,
The movable accessory storage means includes a plurality of storage rooms for storing the movable accessories,
A gaming machine described in any one of means C-1 to C-8, characterized in that each storage room corresponds to a type of the movable device.

According to the means C-9, the mobile role presentation means can manage the mobile roles in an orderly manner, while diversifying the mobile role presentation, and it is possible to make it easier to give specific suggestions and instructions in the mobile role presentation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation while suppressing the use of the wrong type of mobile role and the time required for selection when removing, and the like. In addition, although changing the type of mobile role is not as easy as when it is done with a specific display means such as a liquid crystal display device, it is possible to arouse more interest in the player. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent contact between mobile roles, and it is possible to reduce damage and deterioration of the mobile roles and improve their durability. Incidentally, different types of mobile roles include those that differ in color, pattern, size, shape, material, etc.

Means C-10. The movable accessory storage means is provided with a rotating storage board in which the plurality of storage rooms are arranged in a ring shape and are rotatably configured;
The movable accessory production means is provided with a communication passage (same as the above-mentioned means C-3) that connects the first movable accessory movement area and the second movable accessory movement area with the movable accessory storage means,
The gaming machine described in Means C-9 is characterized in that each of the storage rooms is configured to be displaceable between an ejection position where the movable feature stored in the storage room can be ejected to the communication section, and an acceptance position where the movable feature can be accepted from the communication passage.

According to Measure C-10, in a configuration that handles multiple types of movable props, it is possible to efficiently insert and remove a target movable prop into and from a movable prop storage means that stores multiple movable props, while suppressing the size of the movable prop storage means. For example, when eight storage compartments for movable props are provided, if the storage compartments are arranged in a straight line, the ejection section needs to move relatively across seven storage compartments from one end storage compartment to the other end storage compartment, but if they are arranged in a circle, it only needs to move relatively across four storage compartments.

Means C-11. When the storage room is displaced to the discharge position, the floor surface on which the movable props are placed in the storage room is inclined downward toward the communication passage,
When the storage room is displaced to the receiving position, the floor surface on which the movable props are placed in the storage room is inclined downward toward the side away from the communication passage,
The gaming machine described in means C-10 is characterized in that an ejection prevention shutter capable of restricting the movement of the movable device is provided between the storage room at the ejection position and the connecting passage.

By means of Measure C-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a separate drive mechanism is required to move (e.g., push) the mobile prop stored in the storage chamber displaced to the ejection position to eject the mobile prop from the storage chamber. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a separate shutter is required to regulate the displacement of the mobile prop in order to maintain the storage state of the mobile prop stored in the storage chamber displaced to the receiving position. Therefore, it is possible to execute the mobile prop performance relatively smoothly while simplifying the configuration.

In addition, by providing the discharge prevention shutter, it is possible to prevent situations in which a movable prop stored in a storage room at the discharge position (a movable prop not scheduled for discharge) is inadvertently discharged from the storage room, or the movable prop is displaced from the communication part in a direction in which it is stored in the storage room at the discharge position. Therefore, management control of the movable props can be performed more reliably and smoothly. If it is only necessary to prevent a movable prop discharged from a storage room at the discharge position to the preparation assistance means from returning to the storage room at the discharge position, it is possible to displace the storage means to a position where none of the storage rooms coincide with the discharge position, but in the process of positioning a specified storage room at the discharge position, when a storage room other than the specified one coincides with the discharge position, it is not possible to prevent the movable prop stored in that storage room from being discharged to the preparation assistance means side.

Means C-12. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-11, characterized in that the mobile feature presentation means has a plurality of mobile feature movement area units each having the first mobile feature movement area and the second mobile feature movement area that share the mobile feature, the mobile feature storage means, the preparation assistance means, and the storage assistance means.

According to means C-12, after a mobile reel performance is performed in a first mobile reel movement area of a specified mobile reel movement area unit, while a mobile reel performance is being performed in another mobile reel movement area unit, the second mobile reel movement area of the specified mobile reel movement area unit can be fully prepared for the next mobile reel performance. Therefore, a spectacular mobile reel performance using multiple mobile reel movement area units can be performed relatively smoothly.

Means C-13. The gaming machine described in means C-12, characterized in that the movable accessory movement area unit is configured so that it can be installed in an upside-down orientation.

According to means C-13, when multiple movable prop movement area units are installed, even if the same movable prop movement area units are used, by varying the installation direction, etc., it is possible to arrange the movable prop movement area units in a way that allows for optimal performance of the movable props (without creating a sense of incongruity) while reducing manufacturing costs, etc., and to perform a movable prop movement area unit that is so good that it is hard to believe that the same movable prop movement area units are being used.

Means C-14. The gaming machine described in means C-12 or C-13, characterized in that the moving role presentation means is equipped with a connecting presentation means capable of deriving a connecting presentation that displays the movement of virtual moving roles between a plurality of the moving role movement area units.

According to Means C-14, by using a connecting performance that connects the behavior of the moving parts between multiple moving part movement area units, it is possible to derive a more spectacular moving part performance using multiple moving part movement area units, and it is also possible to smoothly connect the moving part performances by the moving parts in each moving part movement area unit, adjust (balance) the time, etc., and derive a bold display performance that is impossible to perform in analog (for example, that is physically impossible). As a result, it is possible to provide a performance that combines analog and digital performances in an easy-to-understand and smooth manner, which can more reliably increase interest.

The mobile prop performance means may be provided with an end point detection means for detecting the end point of the mobile prop movement area or the mobile prop located in the vicinity thereof. In this case, when the mobile prop performance is linked to other performances, the timing of the performances can be more accurately matched.

Means C-15. A gaming machine described in any one of means C-1 to C-14, characterized in that the start point and the end point of the movable device movement area are configured to be invisible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine.

By means of C-15, the moving props at the start and end points (corresponding to C-4, the first and second movable floors at the start and end points) can be concealed, and it is possible to avoid situations where the performance is degraded by visually observing the behavior of moving props that are stopped before and after the moving prop performance, or moving props that are transported between the start and end points and the moving prop storage means.

Means C-16. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-15, characterized in that the first movable accessory movement area and the second movable accessory movement area are each individually configured to be detachable from the gaming machine body.

Measure C-16 can improve the maintainability (ease of repair, replacement, and other work) of the first movable feature moving area and the second movable feature moving area. Even when the first movable feature moving area and the second movable feature moving area are unitized into one unit (configured as a movable feature moving area unit) as in measure C-12, the first movable feature moving area and the second movable feature moving area can be individually detached while the movable feature moving area unit is attached to the gaming machine, thereby improving convenience, etc.

D (The game ball's progress as it moves through a specific area is taken over and used to add excitement. Finally, the game is returned to a state in which the behavior of a real game ball can be seen.) One type of game machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a game ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on the game board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (see, for example, JP 2006-271480 A).

However, in pachinko machines equipped with variable display means, many players progress through the game simply by continuing to look at the variable display means. This raises concerns that players will quickly become bored, and in the first place, the game of continually looking at the variable display means has become monotonous.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means D-1. A game area to which the game ball launched by the launching means is guided;
A specific area ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific area ball entry means includes:
A first special ball entry section and a second special ball entry section into which a game ball moving through the specific area can enter;
An entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific area upstream of the first special ball entry section and the second special ball entry section;
A first special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special ball entry section;
and a second special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second special ball entry section,
When the first special ball entry detection means detects a game ball, a first award is given,
When a game ball is detected by the second special ball detection means, a second award different from the first award (more advantageous to the player than the first award) is performed,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a take-over performance means that is capable of deriving a take-over performance that takes over the behavior of a gaming ball that has entered the specific area, triggered by detection by the entry detection means, until detection by the first special ball entry detection means and the second special ball entry detection means.

According to means D-1, instead of a gaming ball that has entered a specific area, a takeover effect is derived that takes over the behavior of a gaming ball that has entered a specific area, making it possible to derive bold effects that cannot be performed with a gaming ball. In other words, since the advantage in progressing the game (such as the number of game values awarded to the player) generally differs depending on the behavior of the gaming ball (which ball entry means it enters), it is not possible to apply an external force arbitrarily to the gaming ball after it has been launched by the launching means in order to make it easier to determine whether the game is being played fairly.

In this regard, although the takeover effect gives the appearance of the game ball's behavior being taken over, it is still merely a performance, and the content can be freely set. Furthermore, it becomes possible to provide a wide variety of predetermined suggestions and instructions. This can lead to improved performance and gameplay, and ultimately to increased interest.

In addition, in this method, even if the handover performance is started, the game ball that entered the specific area has not yet entered the first special ball entry section or the second special ball entry section, and the result of whether the first award or the second award will be awarded has not yet been determined. Therefore, by making the time length (end timing) of the handover performance be determined according to the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area, it is possible to eliminate the impression that the handover performance is simply showing behavior corresponding to an already determined result (the so-called feeling of a rigged race). As a result, interest in the handover performance can be further increased.

On the other hand, for the section of the path of the game ball in the specific area through which the game ball passes during the period when the handover effect is derived, even if the shape of the path and therefore the behavior of the game ball passing through that path are simple (for example, a shape that is less likely to become clogged with balls), the handover effect can be used to liven up the game instead of the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately derive an effect that combines the behavior of the game ball in the specific area and the handover effect while suppressing the complexity of the configuration, etc.

It is possible to make the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area while the handover performance is being performed invisible from the front of the gaming machine where the player is located, but it is desirable to configure it so that it can be seen from the front of the gaming machine for players who are concerned about it. Furthermore, the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area is not very noticeable while the corresponding handover performance is being performed, but on the other hand, the visibility of the game ball may be reduced so that the handover performance stands out (for example, a semi-transparent member may be provided in front of the game ball moving through the specific area, a plate-shaped body that refracts or diffuses light forward, a beam splitter may be provided, a transparent display device may be provided, and a display that is relatively difficult to see may be provided in the relevant area).

Means D-2. The gaming machine described in means D-1, characterized in that the handover performance ends before the game ball whose entry into the specific area is the trigger for starting the handover performance is detected by the first special ball entry detection means and the second special ball entry detection means, and the mode of the handover performance can be handed over to the game ball moving through the specific area that is the trigger for starting the handover performance.

According to means D-2, after the pseudo-ball performance, the state is switched to one in which the behavior of the real game ball in the specific area is visually observed as the behavior of the pseudo-ball is taken over. Naturally, the actual result will differ depending on whether the game ball enters the first special ball entry area or the second special ball entry area. This makes it possible to eliminate the sense of a rigged game in the handover performance, and the handover performance can be more interesting.

In addition, the moving distance of the game ball taking over the aspect of the takeover performance from the entrance of the specific area to the point where the game ball taking over the aspect of the takeover performance is visible may be longer than the straight-line distance from the entrance of the specific area to the point where the game ball taking over the aspect of the takeover performance is visible. In this case, the takeover performance can be carried out slowly.

Means D-3. The gaming machine described in means D-1 or D-2, characterized in that the handover performance is configured to be executable until the gaming ball moving through the specific area is detected by the first special ball entry detection means and the second special ball entry detection means, and the result is displayed.

According to means D-3, as a way of showing the performance, the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area as to whether it will enter the first special ball entry area or the second special ball entry area can be shown indirectly until the end by a handover performance means (handover performance) rather than directly showing the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, the performance can be made more spectacular, etc.

Means D-4. The handover performance is
A first presentation state is configured such that the game ball moving through the specific area, the ball entering the specific area being the start trigger of the handover presentation, ends before being detected by the first special ball entry detection means and the second special ball entry detection means, and the mode of the handover presentation is taken over by the game ball moving through the specific area, the ball entering the specific area being the start trigger of the handover presentation;
The gaming machine described in means D-1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to change its state to a second presentation state in which a gaming ball moving through the specific area is detected by the first special ball entry detection means and the second special ball entry detection means, and the state is changed to a second presentation state in which the result is taught.

According to the method D-4, it is possible to switch between a first presentation state (similar to that shown in the above-mentioned method D-2) and a second presentation state (similar to that shown in the above-mentioned method D-3). Therefore, the number of presentation patterns can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

The switching between the first presentation state and the second presentation state may be configured to be performed by the gaming machine based on a predetermined trigger (such as winning the relevant lottery or exceeding a set number of plays), or may be configured to be performed based on the corresponding operation of an operating means that can be operated by the player. Also, for example, instead of a handover presentation, a presentation state may be provided in which the behavior of the gaming ball moving through a specific area can be directly viewed (switchable automatically or manually).

Means D-5. The specific area ball entry means is provided with a progress detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving through the specific area in a takeover performance corresponding section, which is a section through which the game ball passes during the period in which the takeover performance is derived, among the game ball passages in the specific area;
A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that the content of the takeover performance is determined based on the detection information of the progress detection means.

According to means D-5, the game ball moving through a specific area can be more reliably linked to the handover performance, and the handover performance can be developed at any time in accordance with the progress of the game ball. In other words, the progress (speed) of the game ball can be matched with the timing of the start and end of a specific performance of the handover performance, and the result selected by the behavior of the game ball can be matched with the content of the suggestion or instruction given by the handover performance. This makes the handover performance more realistic and interesting.

In addition, in correspondence with the means D-2, "the specific area includes a takeover effect corresponding section, which is a section through which the game ball passes during the period in which the takeover effect is derived, and a settlement section, which is a section between the takeover effect corresponding section, the first special ball entry section, and the second special ball entry section and is visible from the front of the gaming machine. The takeover effect means includes a takeover effect end detection means for detecting a game ball discharged from the takeover effect corresponding section,
The takeover performance may be derived during the period from when the entry detection means detects an entry to when the takeover performance end detection means detects an entry.

In this case, it is easier for players to understand the presentation of the handover effect being handed over to the game ball moving through a specific area.

Means D-6. The specific area ball entry means includes a main passage that guides the game ball to the second special ball entry section in a takeover performance corresponding section, which is a section through which the game ball passes during the period when the takeover performance is derived, a deviation passage that guides the game ball moving on the main passage to the first special ball entry section, and a distribution means that guides the game ball moving on the main passage to one of the main passage and the deviation passage, among the paths of the game ball in the specific area;
A gaming machine described in any one of means D-1 to D-5, characterized in that a progress detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball moving in the specific area is provided so as to be able to determine whether the gaming ball has been guided to the main passage or to the deviating passage by the distribution means.

According to means D-6, by providing a distribution means and a progress detection means in the section corresponding to the handover performance, it is possible to derive a performance as to whether the handover performance will fail (continue). Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the handover performance and further increase interest in the handover performance.

It may also be configured so that "if the game ball enters the branch passage, the handover performance is instructed that the game ball will not reach the second special ball entry section." The passage detection means may be configured to include detection means provided in the part of the main passage immediately downstream of the connection with the branch passage and in the branch passage, or may be configured to include detection means provided in the part of the main passage immediately upstream of the connection with the branch passage and in the branch passage, or may be configured to include detection means provided in the part of the main passage immediately downstream and downstream of the connection with the branch passage and in the branch passage.

Means D-7. The gaming machine described in means D-6, characterized in that the off-path has a first section that extends in parallel (front to back) with the main path, and a second section that guides gaming balls that have moved through the first section to a discharge path that leads to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to means D-7, even if the game ball moving through the main passage and the off-passage is visible to the player, it is possible to make it as difficult as possible for the player to notice that the game ball has entered the off-passage immediately after the game ball has entered the off-passage. In particular, when the branch passage and the main passage are parallel to each other (the off-passage and the game ball passing through the main passage are visible to the player), this effect is more pronounced. As a result, (the announcement of which branch the game ball has moved to can be postponed until a notice is given by a specified instruction means, for example), and the player can be more interested in the instruction of whether the game ball has entered the off-passage, which is given by the handover effect means.

It is also acceptable for the main passage and the off-passage to be transparent. It is also acceptable for the off-passage to be a first section that is set as a section through which the game ball passes while the transition effect is being performed to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the off-passage.

Means D-8. A gaming machine described in any one of means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that when the takeover performance corresponding section, which is a section of the path of the gaming ball in the specific area through which the gaming ball passes during the period when the takeover performance is derived, and the takeover performance means are viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the brightness of the gaming ball moving through the takeover performance corresponding section is darker than the brightness of the takeover performance performed by the takeover performance means.

According to means D-8, the player can concentrate on the takeover performance while it is being derived. Furthermore, even during the takeover performance, a player who wants to understand the behavior of the gaming ball can check the behavior of the gaming ball. A transparent display device or a semi-transparent plate may be provided in front of the takeover performance corresponding section. Furthermore, the viewing section of the takeover performance means for the takeover performance may be disposed in front of the takeover performance corresponding section of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the specific area may be an area between the takeover performance corresponding area and the first and second special ball entry areas, and may include a settlement area visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the brightness of the gaming ball moving through the settlement area is configured to be brighter than the brightness of the gaming ball moving through the takeover performance corresponding area. In this case, the behavior of the gaming ball in the settlement area can be more reliably enjoyed. In addition, a lighting means capable of irradiating light toward the settlement area may be provided. Also, a takeover performance end detection means may be provided that detects a gaming ball that has passed the end point of the takeover performance corresponding area or its vicinity, and the lighting means may be turned on based on the detection by the takeover performance end detection means.

Means D-9. The specific area includes a takeover performance corresponding section, which is a section through which the game ball passes during the period in which the takeover performance is derived, and a decision section between the takeover performance corresponding section, the first special ball entry section, and the second special ball entry section, which is visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-8, characterized in that the takeover performance means is disposed at a position that is off the front position of the takeover performance corresponding section.

According to the method D-9, the player can concentrate on the handover performance while it is being derived. Furthermore, even during the handover performance, a player who wants to understand the behavior of the game ball can check the behavior of the game ball. Furthermore, whether the game ball in the specific area will enter the first special ball entry section or the second special ball entry section can be visually confirmed in the settlement section.

It should be noted that "the settlement section may be located in front of the gaming machine relative to the handover performance corresponding section." In this case, the effect of making it easier to see the behavior of the gaming ball in the settlement section is more reliably achieved. Also, in order to ensure smooth handover between the handover performance corresponding section and the settlement section, "the gaming ball moving through the handover performance corresponding section may be guided from the part of the handover performance means where the handover performance is being performed, toward the front of the gaming machine, to the settlement section."

Means D-10. A starting ball entry means capable of entering the ball moving in the game area;
A start ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means;
a main control means for performing a winning/losing lottery based on the detection of the starting ball entry detection means, and for granting a special game state advantageous to the player when the winning/losing lottery is won;
The main control means is configured to award the special game state as the second award even when the second special ball entry detection means detects the ball,
A gaming machine described in any of means D-1 to D-9, characterized in that the takeover performance can be derived when the starting ball entry detection means detects it, even if there is no detection information from the entry detection means.

According to the means D-10, even if the game ball has not entered the specific area (even if there is no detection information from the entry detection means), the handover effect may be executed, and the opportunities for deriving the handover effect can be increased. In particular, the handover effect that is performed based on the winning or losing lottery can be determined more freely in content, etc., regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the specific area, and a variety of impactful handover effects can be provided. Incidentally, if the handover effect is started as a result of the winning or losing lottery rather than detection by the entry detection means, there is no game ball moving through the specific area in parallel with the progress of the handover effect (the handover effect does not take over the behavior of the game ball that has entered the specific area), so the handover effect teaches the granting of a special game state (the behavior of the game ball moving through the specific area is not taken over from the handover effect as in the case of the means D-2).

Furthermore, by configuring the system so that the handover effect can be derived not only from a win/lose lottery in which the special game state has been won, but also from a win/lose lottery in which the special game state has not been won, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is determined that a special game state will necessarily occur when it is confirmed that the handover effect has started even though the game ball has not entered a specific area.

In addition, "an entrance opening/closing means is provided at the entrance of the specific area and is displaceable between an open position that allows a game ball moving through the game area to enter the specific area and a closed position that restricts the game ball from entering the specific area;
A variable ball entry means is provided, which can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter the game area and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the game area,
The game machine may also be provided with a main control means which at least conducts a win/lose lottery and an open lottery based on the detection of the start ball entry detection means, and if the win/lose lottery is won, grants a special game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened, and if the open lottery is won, sets the entrance opening/closing means to the open position, and if a game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection means, grants the special game state as the second grant.

Means D-11: A special guide passage is provided to guide the game ball moving in the specific area to the second special ball entry section,
A game ball moving through the special guide passage always enters the second special ball entry section,
A game ball entering the second special ball entry section always passes through the special guide passage,
The gaming machine described in means D-1 to D-10 is characterized in that the second special ball entry section and the special guide passage are configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine.

According to the means D-11, the game ball moving in the specific area can be more reliably seen entering the second special ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to have the player clearly recognize the game development of whether the second award will be given or not (avoiding the game progressing without understanding), and when the game ball enters the special guide passage, it is possible to secure time for the player to enjoy watching the game ball moving in the special guide passage. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest, etc. In particular, it is considered that the handover performance is derived in a visual manner that is easier to see than the behavior of the game ball. In the case where the mode of the handover performance is configured to be taken over by the game ball moving in the specific area that is the starting trigger of the handover performance, as in the above-mentioned means D-2, there is a concern that it may be relatively difficult to follow the game ball with one's eyes, but by adopting the configuration of the means D-11, such a concern can be eliminated.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration of means D-11, it may be configured to "include a see-through passage section that is connected to at least one of the first special ball entry section and the second special ball entry section and allows the game ball that has entered the first special ball entry section or the second special ball entry section to be visually confirmed." In this case, it is easier to recognize whether the game ball has entered the second special ball entry section or the first special ball entry section, compared to a configuration in which the game ball becomes invisible the moment it enters the second special ball entry section or the first special ball entry section.

Means D-12. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-11, characterized in that the handover effect is a pseudo-ball effect that uses a pseudo-ball, which is an object that can be guided to a position visible from the player's side, and gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction by the behavior of the pseudo-ball.

Method D-12 makes it easier for players to recognize that the behavior of the game ball and the handover performance are related.

Means D-13. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-12, characterized in that the handover performance means includes a display means, and the handover performance includes at least a pseudo-ball display performance that displays a moving virtual pseudo-ball on the display means.

According to means D-13, the pseudo ball display effect can smoothly transition from the behavior of the gaming ball to the transition effect. In addition, in correspondence with means D-12, it may be configured such that "the pseudo ball display effect is configured to be interposed between the behavior of the gaming ball moving in the specific area and the pseudo ball effect." In this case, it is possible to more smoothly transition between the behavior of the gaming ball and the pseudo ball effect (eliminating misalignment, etc.).

Means D-14. The passage of the game ball in the specific area is provided with an electrically driven device that is configured to be capable of performing a periodic operation and operates at least when the game ball is present in the specific area;
A gaming machine described in any one of means D-1 to D-13, characterized in that the gaming ball moving in the specific area is guided by the electrically driven device and moves downstream of the electrically driven means in the specific area.

According to the method D-14, it is possible to increase the time that the game ball moving through the passage in the specific area stays in the specific area by a method other than extending the distance of the passage in the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to secure sufficient time to perform the handover performance.

Means D-15. The passage of the game ball in the specific area is provided with an electrical drive means configured to be capable of performing a periodic operation and operating at least when the game ball is present in the specific area;
A gaming machine described in any of means D-1 to D-14, characterized in that the gaming ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to move to an evacuation area located to the side of the first special ball entry area and the second special ball entry area, or downstream of the first special ball entry area and the second special ball entry area, and the gaming ball in the evacuation area is configured to be able to reach the first special ball entry area and the second special ball entry area with the assistance of the electrical drive means.

By means of means D-15, it is possible to secure a wider specific area, and it is possible to increase the time that the gaming ball moving through the specific area stays there. In addition, by making the evacuation position a location that is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to allow the player to concentrate more on the handover performance.

Means D-16. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-15, characterized in that the handover performance means is configured to be able to derive the handover performance between the entrance of the gaming ball to the specific area ball entry means, the first special ball entry section, and the second special ball entry section.

Method D-16 allows the transition between the performance and the behavior of the game ball in the specific area ball entry means to continue more smoothly.

Means D-17. Equipped with an operation means operable by a player,
A brightness adjusting means is provided for adjusting the brightness of the game area based on the operation of the operating means,
A gaming machine described in any of means D-1 to D-16, characterized in that the brightness (visibility) of the path of the gaming ball in the specific area ball entry means can be changed by adjusting the brightness adjustment means.

Method D-17 allows for a display mode that meets the needs of players who want to more clearly see the behavior of the gaming ball in the specific area entry means, and players who do not want to be distracted by the behavior of the gaming ball in the specific area entry means.

E (Player's involvement in operating the gadgets in the game area). One type of game machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a game ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on the game board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (for example, see JP 2006-271480 A).

However, in pachinko machines equipped with variable display means, many players progress through the game simply by continuing to look at the variable display means. This raises concerns that players will quickly become bored, and in the first place, the game of continually looking at the variable display means has become monotonous.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase entertainment value.

Means PE-1. The device is provided with at least one of an electrically driven performance means capable of performing an electrically driven performance using an electrically driven role operated by an electrically driven means, and a mobile role performance means capable of performing a mobile role performance using a mobile role that can be moved based on mechanical energy;
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an interlocking means for causing a change in the state of the electrically driven device or the movable device based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the means PE-1, the electrically driven performance or the moving role performance using the electrically driven role or the moving role can allow the player to enjoy a different performance from the performance displayed by the display device. Furthermore, the electrically driven performance or the moving role performance is merely a performance, and the behavior of the electrically driven role or the moving role can be freely set. Here, analog performances that are not displayed are originally performances that tend to involve the player's strength, but this means further allows the player's operation to be reflected in the analog performance. Therefore, the electrically driven performance or the moving role performance can be made more interesting. Furthermore, the operation of the operating means can provide a moderate stress relief, and can be used to aggregate the points at which the player applies external force to the gaming machine. Furthermore, whether an electrically driven performance or a moving accessory performance that gives a specific suggestion or instruction will be successful or not has already been determined, and if the instruction is undesirable for the player, the electrically driven performance or the moving accessory performance cannot be successful, but if the instruction is desirable for the player, the electrically driven performance or the moving accessory performance can be successful. In other words, there are cases where the electrically driven performance or the moving accessory performance can be successful with the player's skill, and in such cases the sense of elation and satisfaction is greater than can be compared to other performances.

Means PE-2. The gaming machine described in means PE-1, characterized in that the interlocking means is configured to be able to physically contact the electrically driven device or the movable device.

By using the PE-2 method, the audience can enjoy a novel presentation in which the interlocking means actually changes the behavior of the electrically driven or movable parts, which can increase the interest, etc.

Means PE-3. The gaming machine described in means PE-1 or PE-2, characterized in that the electrically driven role or the movable role that can be linked to the operation of the operating means by the linking means is arranged in a position that is not accessible to the player but is visible to the player.

According to the means PE-3, the player cannot touch it directly, and the movable parts (electrically driven parts, movable parts) that did not operate in conjunction with the player's operation in the past can be linked to the player's operation, so that the player can enjoy the new effects without fail. In other words, it is possible to eliminate the frustration that has existed in the past, such as not being able to touch something that is right there.

Below, as Means E, we will list the electrically driven presentation means described in Means PE-1 above, and the configuration in which the mobile prop presentation means is embodied in a mobile prop presentation means, but it is also possible to change (replace) the "mobile prop presentation means" described in Means E below to an "electrically driven presentation means or mobile prop presentation means", or even to an "electrically driven presentation means" as appropriate.

Means E-1. A mobile role production means is provided that can produce a mobile role production that uses a mobile role that is an object that can be derived to a position visible from the player side and gives a predetermined suggestion or instruction by the behavior of the mobile role,
The moving role production means includes a moving role movement area in which the moving role is configured to be movable based on mechanical energy,
In the moving type reel performance, at least a part of the moving reel moving from the start point to the end point of the moving type reel movement area is visually recognized,
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a linkage means that can cause a change in the movement pattern of the movable device in the movable device movement area based on the operation of the operating means.

According to the method E-1, the mobile role presentation using the mobile role can provide a different presentation to that shown on the display device. In other words, it is possible to incorporate actions that are different from the routine during normal play, and the reaction actions of the three-dimensional mobile role that are visually unusual can be derived, thereby enhancing the interest.

In addition, since the advantage in progressing the game (such as the number of game values awarded to the player) generally differs depending on the behavior of the game ball (which ball entry means the ball enters), it is not possible to apply any external force to the game ball after it has been launched by the launching means in order to make it easier to determine whether the game is being played fairly.

In this regard, the mobile role presentation is merely a presentation, and the behavior of the mobile role can be freely set. Furthermore, the movement mode of the mobile role moving in the mobile role movement area can be changed based on the player's operation of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to derive a presentation in which the player participates more actively in the presentation, and the occurrence of boredom can be prevented. This can lead to improvements in presentation and playability, and ultimately to increased interest.

In addition, analog-based effects are originally effects that players are likely to exert force into, but with this means, the player's operation is further reflected in the analog effects. This makes the moving accessory effects more interesting. Also, operating the operating means can provide a moderate stress relief, and allows the player to concentrate points at which external force is applied to the gaming machine. Furthermore, for moving accessory effects that give predetermined suggestions or instructions, it has already been determined whether or not the moving accessory effect can be successful, and if instructions that are undesirable to the player are given, it is impossible to make the moving accessory effect successful, but if instructions that are desirable to the player are given, the moving accessory effect can be successful. In other words, there are cases where the moving accessory effect can be successful with the player's skill, and in such cases, the sense of elation and satisfaction is greater than can be compared to other effects.

In addition, there is no particular limit to what is taught or suggested by the moving role performance. For example, the moving role performance may be associated with the result of a predetermined lottery to teach or suggest the result of the predetermined lottery, or the result of the moving role performance may be configured to give (teach or suggest) a predetermined benefit (increase in options (display objects such as characters) available in mobile-linked games, derive a performance that is difficult to derive, etc.). In other words, the moving role performance may be performed as part of a performance to teach or suggest the result of a predetermined lottery, and the moving role performance may not be performed when the performance is not performed. In this case, for example, it is possible to enjoy the moving role performance even when the predetermined lottery performed by progressing the game has not been performed, and it is possible to avoid a situation where the game does not progress.

Means E-2. The gaming machine described in means E-1, characterized in that the linking means can cause a change in the movement pattern of the movable feature while it is moving through the movable feature movement area.

By means of means E-2, the effect of the operation of the operating means on the behavior of the movable role can be made greater and easier to understand, allowing the player to feel even more that their operation is reflected in the presentation. Furthermore, the period during which the behavior of the movable role changes in response to the operation of the operating means can be secured as long as possible. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by the movable role presentation and increasing the interest is further achieved.

Means E-3. There are multiple types of the movable parts,
The gaming machine described in means E-1 or E-2 is characterized in that the linkage means is capable of generating different changes in the movement pattern of the movable device moving within the movable device movement area based on the operation of the operating means, depending on the type of the movable device.

According to means E-3, for example, when the operating means is operated while movable prop A is moving, a propulsive force is applied to displace the movable prop downstream, and when the operating means is operated while movable prop B is moving, a force is applied to suppress the displacement of the movable prop downstream. In this way, by associating the type of movable prop with the operation pattern of the interlocking means, not only the appearance of the movable prop (it can be the same) but also its behavior can be changed, and the development of each movable prop performance can be made more diverse. Therefore, the effect of increasing interest through the movable prop performance is further achieved.

The type of movable prop and the operation pattern of the interlocking means based on the operation of the operating means do not have to correspond one-to-one, and the operation pattern may be selected from a number of types. It is also possible to incorporate an RFID tag in the movable prop, read the information on the RFID tag with a reading means, and drive the interlocking means based on the type information and position information. It is also possible to prepare movable props made of resin and movable props made of metal, which will operate substantially differently.

Means E-4. There are multiple types of moving role effects,
The gaming machine described in any of means E-1 to E-3, characterized in that the linkage means is capable of generating different changes in the movement pattern of the movable feature moving within the movable feature movement area based on the operation of the operation means, depending on the type of the movable feature performance.

By means of means E-4, the mobile prop presentation can be made more diverse. Therefore, the mobile prop presentation can be more effective in increasing the entertainment value.

Means E-5. A display means capable of deriving a moving feature display corresponding to the moving feature;
An end point detection means for detecting the end point of the moving part movement area or the moving part located in the vicinity thereof;
The display means is configured to be capable of deriving a role behavior takeover performance in which the behavior of the movable role that has reached the end point of the movable role movement area is taken over to display the movable role,
A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-4, characterized in that the reel behavior handover performance is configured to be able to reflect changes in the movement pattern of the movable reel by the linkage means.

According to means E-5, the reel behavior takeover performance of the display means can produce effects that are difficult to produce with analog effects (for example, a performance in which the moving reel flows backwards in the play area). This makes it possible to diversify the performance while taking advantage of the moving reel performance, and to prevent a feeling of monotony. In addition, since the degree of the effect on the moving reel by the linking means is properly reflected in the reel behavior takeover performance, the moving reel performance and the reel behavior takeover performance can be more appropriately linked, and more interesting performances can be produced. In particular, in the moving reel performance, since the linking means can cause changes in the movement mode of the moving reel, the action and effect of responding to such changes in the reel behavior takeover performance is more pronounced.

Means E-6. A display means capable of deriving a moving feature display corresponding to the moving feature is provided,
The moving type accessory performance means is configured to be able to derive the moving type accessory performance by taking over the behavior of the moving type accessory display,
A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-5, characterized in that the moving device performance is configured to be able to reflect changes in the state of the moving device display in the display means.

By means of means E-6, the link between the moving role display in the display means and the moving role performance by the moving role performance means can be improved, and the performance can be improved. As an example, in the first moving role performance, two moving roles are moved, but in the moving role display, a display is made in which one moving role is reduced, and then in the second moving role performance, there is only one moving role.

Means E-7. The moving reel performance using the moving reel and the moving reel display on the display means constitute a teaching performance that teaches or suggests predetermined information;
The duration of the instruction performance is determined in advance,
The gaming machine described in means E-5 or E-6 is characterized in that it is configured so that the ratio between the movable feature performance and the movable feature display can be changed by changing the movement pattern of the movable feature by the linkage means.

By means of means E-7, the variation in the time of the moving prop presentation can be eliminated by adjusting the time of the moving prop display, and the teaching presentation can be performed for a set period of time.

Means E-8. A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-7, characterized in that the interlocking means is configured to be able to change between an interlocking state in which the interlocking means operates based on the operation of the operating means, and a non-interlocking state in which the interlocking means does not operate.

Means E-8 can add variety to the game.

Means E-9: A main control means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not to grant a special game state advantageous to a player;
A variable display means for displaying variable information indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery,
A gaming machine described in means E-8, characterized in that the linked state may be established during the varying display of the identifying information and during the period until a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the varying display of the identifying information.

According to the means E-9, for example, by allowing the player to enjoy the pseudo-ball effect using the operation means, the interlocking means, and the movable device at any time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which someone occupies the gaming machine without playing the normal game that proceeds mainly with the win/lose lottery, and a player who wants to play is unable to do so. Note that the possibility of the interlocking state may only occur during the variable display of the identification information.

Means E-10. A performance display means capable of deriving a performance display;
a performance operation means for changing a display on the performance display means based on an operation by a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-9, characterized in that the operation means is composed of the presentation operation means.

According to Measure E-10, by standardizing the operating means used in effects and reducing their number as much as possible (for example, to one), it is possible to suppress the complexity of the configuration on the front side of the gaming machine, lower the hurdle for participating in effects that use operating means, and make such effects easier to understand and familiar. Therefore, it is possible for more players to enjoy effects that use operating means, and it is possible to prevent the stress that can occur when complex operations are required based on quick decisions.

It may also be that "the mounting surface on which the performance operation means is mounted does not have other operation means that can be operated by the player (operation means other than the performance operation means are mounted on a surface other than the mounting surface)." In this case, it is possible to avoid situations in which the hand operating the performance operation means also unintentionally operates the other operation means, resulting in unintended behavior based on the operation of the other operation means, or an increased risk of damage to the other operation means. In particular, in a configuration in which the movement mode of a movable role changes based on the operation of the performance operation means, it is considered that more force will be applied by operating the performance operation means, so the above-mentioned effect is more pronounced. In addition, it becomes easier to take measures for reinforcement, and it is possible to reduce the risk of damage and costs, etc.

Means E-11. A gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-10, characterized in that the attachment portion to which the operating means is attached is a member different from the member to which the movable role-playing means is attached, and a shock-absorbing means for absorbing shock is provided between the attachment portion and the other member.

By means of means E-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the impact caused by operating the operating means reaches the mobile prop presentation means, causing the mobile prop to behave in an unintended manner. In addition, in a configuration in which a vibration detection means is provided for detecting vibrations in the mobile prop presentation means and an error state is generated based on detection by the vibration detection means, it is possible to distinguish as much as possible between operation of the operating means and cases in which the mobile prop presentation means is vibrated in other ways.

The operation direction of the presentation operation means should preferably be up/down or left/right, but should avoid front/rear as much as possible, in order to prevent the force (impact) caused by the operation from acting on the gaming machine main body (control board, etc.).

Means E-12. A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-11, characterized in that it is equipped with a visibility state changing means that can change the state of a part of the movable device movement area between a concealed state in which it is difficult or impossible to see, and an exposed state in which it is visible.

According to the means E-12, it is possible to enhance and diversify the performance effect of the moving reel performance. Furthermore, for example, in the case where the moving reel performance unintentionally develops in an inconvenient manner, it is possible to conceal the visibility state changing means and perform recovery or explanation of the situation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the desired development of the moving reel performance and the desired development from becoming too large, making recovery difficult or causing trouble. In particular, when the specified timing (for example, the end) of the moving reel performance is matched with the specified timing of the separate component, such an action effect is more pronounced. Furthermore, when the visibility state changing means is in the concealed state, the interlocking means may not operate based on the operation of the operating means.

Means E-13. A gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-12, characterized in that it is provided with an excluding means for excluding the movable feature from the movable feature movement area when the stationary state of the movable feature in the movable feature movement area is detected.

By means of means E-13, it is possible to eliminate jamming of the movable props. Also, in cases where the progress of the movable props in the movable prop performance is too slow, the movable props can be actively expelled from the movable prop movement area. This makes it possible to prevent the gap between the desired development of the movable prop performance from becoming too large, and to eliminate the stagnation (jamming) of the movable props. In particular, when the specified timing (e.g., the end) of the movable prop performance is aligned with the specified timing of a separate component, this effect is more pronounced.

The interlocking means may be used as the removal means, or, for example, the floor of the movable prop movement area may be removed (the floor surface of the movable prop movement area may be constructed with a shutter, and the movable props present in the movable prop movement area may be ejected to the outside by opening the shutter).

Means E-14. A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-13, characterized in that it is configured to be able to generate a state in which the movable device is visible inside the operating means.

According to the means E-14, the act of operating the operating means can be made interesting by the novel change in appearance of the operating means itself, and by associating the change in appearance with the expected occurrence rate of a predetermined state, etc., it is possible to improve the performance. In addition, by having a moving part appear on the operating means that the player touches, the player can feel more familiar with the moving part (moving part performance), and can increase the player's interest in the moving part performance. For example, when a special game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, a moving part may appear inside the operating means (a moving part may flow in, a blindfold may be removed to expose a moving part (a dummy that is not actually used) that was installed in advance). In this case, the player can enjoy a new performance in which the occurrence of a special game state can be grasped relatively quietly in a part of the gaming machine that is familiar to the player. In addition, the type of the moving part visible inside the operating means may be configured to instruct or suggest the type of special game state. Furthermore, when the movable prop switches to a state where it can be seen from inside the operating means, a specified vibration (such as a vibration caused by the movable prop entering inside the operating means, or a dedicated vibration means is provided and the movable prop vibrates using the vibration means) may be generated, or a sound or the like may be output.

It is also possible that the mobile role being visible in a specific manner inside the operating means corresponds to the success of the mobile role presentation (one of the success patterns). In this case, the player can look forward to the mobile role being drawn out in his hand, and when it is drawn out, the player can enjoy operating the operating means even more. Incidentally, the success of the mobile role presentation may result in the occurrence of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, or may increase the expectation of the occurrence of the special game state. It is also preferable that the operating means is located at a position outside the gaming machine, or as far outside as possible, from the mounting surface to which the operating means is attached, rather than being visible deep inside the operating means. However, it is preferable to have a configuration that avoids situations such as the mobile prop colliding with the operating means when the operating means is operated (the operating part of the operating means does not come into contact with the mobile prop even when the operating means is operated, and the part where the mobile prop is installed is fixed so that there is no relative displacement between the mobile prop and the operating means, and the mobile prop does not displace even when the operating means is operated, or the operating part of the operating means and the mobile prop displace in the same way when the operating means is operated).

It is preferable that the moving props that appear inside the operating means are real moving props used in moving prop presentations (the moving props can be displaced to the inside of the operating means), but it is also possible to provide a similar effect to this means by preparing a moving prop that is the same as the real thing just for showing inside the operating means, preparing a smaller one than the original, incorporating a display means to display the moving props, or preparing a member with the moving props printed on it. Also, when a presentation is derived in which the moving props are visible inside the operating means, the operation of the operating means may or may not be restricted until they are made visible.

In addition, the configuration of this means for making the movable gadget visible inside the operating means may be embodied in a gaming machine that does not have a linking means. Furthermore, it is also possible to apply this to a configuration in which, for example, an object that is the motif of the gaming machine changes state between being visible inside the operating means and being invisible.

Means E-15: A valid operation period is provided as a period during which the interlocking means is interlocked based on the operation of the operating means;
A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-14, characterized in that a period instruction means is provided for instructing that the operation is valid during the period.

According to means E-15, by setting the operation valid period, it is possible to prevent problems such as the moving device performance being prolonged or the game not progressing. It is also possible to prevent situations such as the operation valid period passing without the player's knowledge, making it impossible to operate the moving device performance.

Means E-16. A start-up assistance means is provided for displacing the movable accessory located at the starting point of the movable accessory movement area to the connecting passage side, which is a portion connecting the starting point and the end point of the movable accessory movement area;
A gaming machine described in any of means E-1 to E-15, characterized in that the interlocking means can cause a change in the operation of the start-up assistance means.

Means E-16 allows the player to feel closer to the handover effect (to (re)start the pseudo-ball effect) with greater anticipation.

Means E-17: The operating means is provided with an operation measuring means capable of measuring the strength with which the operating means is operated or the displacement speed of the operating means,
A gaming machine described in any of means E-1 to E-16, characterized in that the operation pattern of the interlocking means is changed based on the measurement results of the operation measurement means.

According to means E-17, even though the interlocking means is not directly operated, the interlocking means operates in a manner similar to the feeling of operation, making the operation of the operating means more interesting. In addition, the operation measurement means makes it possible to grasp the state of operation of the operating means, and it is possible to take measures to prevent damage to the operating means, such as preventing the handover performance from going wrong if the operating means is hit hard, for example. Examples of operation measurement means include a pressure gauge that can contact a part of the operating means inside the gaming machine that the player cannot touch, and a speed sensor that can detect the passing speed.

Means E-18. In a configuration in which the probability of winning a predetermined lottery can be set by selecting one from a plurality of stages,
A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-17, characterized in that the moving role presentation is configured to be capable of suggesting or instructing the setting of the winning probability.

According to means E-18, the performance of the moving prop can be seen as an opportunity to see through the setting of the winning probability, which can add even more fun and excitement. In particular, when the possibility of suggesting or instructing the setting of the winning probability increases by changing the movement mode of the moving prop using the linking means, it is possible to make the player more interested in operating the linking means. Examples of suggestions or instructions for the setting of the winning probability include those that, when a specific pattern is derived in relation to the pattern of change in the movement mode of the moving prop, ensure that a specific winning probability is set (it is not derived when a setting other than the specific winning probability is set), and those that, when a specific pattern is derived, increase the possibility that a specific winning probability is set (compared to when a setting other than the specific winning probability is set).

Means E-19. A gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to B-18, characterized in that it has a plurality of the movable parts, and a specific one of the movable parts has a mark that is visible when the movable part is viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to means E-19, a predetermined suggestion can be made based on the visibility of the moving part (presence or absence of a mark, type, etc.). Furthermore, if the moving part is configured so that the mark is not visible when viewed from any direction other than the predetermined direction, even if a moving part with a mark is introduced to a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, there may be cases where the mark cannot be confirmed (the mark may be on the back of the moving part as seen by the player, or the moving part is moving at high speed and cannot be confirmed properly), so a new fun can be added by checking the mark when a type of moving part that may have a mark is introduced.

In particular, as described above, the movement of the movable part moving in the movable part movement area can be changed by the player's operation of the operating means through the linking means, which allows for the addition of more interesting effects, such as finding marks by operating the operating means.

It may also be that "the movable feature is introduced into the movable feature movement area with the mark not facing the front of the gaming machine, and the orientation of the movable feature can be changed by the interlocking means so that the mark faces the front of the gaming machine." In this case, the mark becomes visible due to the behavior of the movable feature moving in the movable feature movement area, or the mark becomes visible based on the player's operation of the operation means, so that the player can be sure to be interested in the behavior of the movable feature and the operation of the operation means.

Means E-20. The interlocking means is provided in the movable accessory movement area or adjacent to the movable accessory movement area;
The movable object moving area and the front of the interlocking means are covered by a transparent blocking means,
A gaming machine described in any of means E-1 to E-19, characterized in that it is provided with an approach operation detection means in front of the interlocking means for detecting an object that abuts against or is in close proximity to the blocking means.

Means E-20 allows the interlocking means to be operated intuitively. This makes it easier to synchronize the timing, and when multiple interlocking means are provided, it makes it easier to understand how they work.

In addition, even if the contact with the blocking means is strong, the impact is unlikely to reach the movable props moving through the movable prop movement area, so the blocking means may be configured to have a two-layer structure, with at least one of them being movable back and forth, and a cushioning material that gently regulates the displacement of the blocking means may be added (such as fitting a rubber material to the outer periphery of the plate-shaped blocking means).

Means E-21. A performance display means for performing a performance display is provided,
A gaming machine described in any of means E-1 to E-20, characterized in that the movable device moving area and the performance display means are configured to be relatively displaceable between a first relative arrangement in which the movable device moving area is located in front of the performance display means, and a second relative arrangement in which the movable device moving area is located away from the front of the performance display means.

According to the means E-21, the mobile prop performance can be more easily viewed at a position, and with the support of the performance display means, it is possible to make it more exciting. Furthermore, when the performance display of the performance display means is viewed without using the mobile prop, it is possible to avoid a situation where the mobile prop moving area obstructs the field of view. Note that, as the operation of the mobile prop moving area and the performance display means, for example, the pair of left and right movable prop moving areas can slide left and right, and the performance display means can slide back and forth, and in the first relative arrangement, the pair of left and right movable prop moving areas abut or come close to each other, and in the second relative arrangement, the pair of left and right movable props are separated left and right, and the performance display means is displaced forward and positioned in the space between them.

In addition, with regard to the above means E-1 to E-20, the arrangement of the moving part movement area and the performance display means may be only the first relative arrangement or only the second relative arrangement. In the case of the first relative arrangement, the performance display means can display the background, the character linked to the moving part, the operation content of the operation means, the operation timing, etc.

Means E-22. A gaming machine described in any one of means E-1 to E-21, characterized in that it is equipped with a sensory means that can displace a member that can be operated by a player according to the behavior of the movable accessory in the movable accessory performance.

Measure E-22 allows the audience to feel closer to the moving props and enjoy the moving props even more.

Means E-23. The gaming machine described in means E-1 to E-22, characterized in that in the moving role presentation, the operation presentation performed using the operation means and the linkage means can be forcibly ended (forced termination presentation).

Measure E-23 can prevent the operation presentation from dragging on and the moving device presentation from ending, resulting in a decrease in presentation quality and a negative impact on the progress of the game (particularly, a negative impact on the derivation of displays that assist with the game method, etc.).

F (Performance continues even if a problem occurs in the configuration related to the performance). One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a gaming ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on the gaming board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (for example, see JP 2006-271480 A).

However, if the means for producing the performance breaks down, there is a concern that the performance performance will be greatly reduced, leading to a loss of interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a loss of interest due to malfunctions in the presentation means.

Means F-1. A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special game state advantageous to a player;
A presentation means capable of deriving a presentation capable of instructing or suggesting the result of the winning/losing lottery,
A grasping means for grasping an abnormal part that exhibits a behavior different from a normal behavior during the performance of the performance means;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising an alternative presentation means capable of deriving an alternative presentation to replace the presentation handled by the abnormal part.

According to means F-1, when a specified trouble occurs such as normal behavior not being derived at a specified point in the presentation means, an alternative presentation can be performed in place of the presentation at the specified point in the presentation means, thereby compensating for the presentation. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a presentation with a predetermined derivation period (time) from being interrupted or the impact of the presentation from decreasing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest when a malfunction of the presentation means occurs. It is also possible to avoid a situation in which the gaming machine is shut down due to a malfunction of the presentation means.

The alternative performance may be configured to be capable of being produced not only when an abnormality is detected by the detection means, but also in a normal state where no abnormality is detected. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the alternative performance is a special performance when a problem occurs, and is not produced in a normal state, resulting in the performance being poorly utilized. Examples of the performance means include a display means, an electrically driven performance means, a movable role performance means, a light emitting means, etc.

Means F-2: A lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special game state advantageous to a player;
A special display means is provided for displaying a variation of identification information indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery,
A performance means capable of deriving a performance corresponding to a change that can be started in response to a start of the display of the change of the identification information and can be ended in response to an end of the display of the change of the identification information,
When performing the variation-responsive performance, a grasping means for grasping an abnormal part that is related to the variation-responsive performance among the performance means and exhibits behavior different from normal behavior;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising an alternative presentation means capable of deriving an alternative presentation to replace the presentation handled by the abnormal part.

According to the means F-2, when a specified trouble occurs such as normal behavior not being derived at a specified point of the presentation means, an alternative presentation is performed in place of the presentation at the specified point of the presentation means, and the change-responsive presentation performed in response to the change display of the identification information of the special display means can be continued (completed). This makes it possible to prevent the change-responsive presentation from being interrupted or the impact of the change-responsive presentation from decreasing.

In other words, even if a problem occurs with the presentation means, the result of the lottery does not change, and in a configuration in which a special display means for informing the player of the result of the lottery is provided in addition to the presentation means, the presentation is simply interrupted, and there is no need to interrupt the game. However, if the variable-responsive presentation is interrupted, there is a concern that it will cause great confusion for the player. In particular, when multiple presentation means are provided to improve presentation quality and, ultimately, interest, the risk of the presentation means breaking down increases, and there is a concern that, depending on the presentation means that break down, the presentation performance may be greatly reduced, leading to a decrease in interest.

In this regard, by making it possible to derive alternative presentations, the change-responsive presentation will not be interrupted, and the player can play with peace of mind. Furthermore, for example, in a situation where a presentation is being performed using two presentation means, if one of the presentation means breaks down, there is a concern that the impact of the presentation will decrease or that a sense of discomfort will arise. However, such concerns can be alleviated, for example, by using the other presentation means to cover up the presentation of one presentation means as much as possible, or by adding (substituting) a presentation with another presentation means. As a result, it is possible to perform relatively large-scale presentations by providing multiple presentation means, etc., to increase interest, while preventing a decrease in interest in the event of a failure of a presentation means, etc.

Means F-3. The performance means includes an A performance means for performing an A performance, and a B performance means for performing a B performance, which is provided adjacent to the A performance means;
A gaming machine as described in means F-1 or 2, characterized in that when the grasping means grasps that there is an abnormality in one of the A performance means and the B performance means, the alternative performance is started in the other of the A performance means and the B performance means.

By using method F-3, the alternative effects can be connected relatively naturally, and the change-responsive effects can be progressed without significantly disrupting the flow. In addition, by providing multiple effect means, the risk of malfunction may increase, but the risk of all of them malfunctioning and making it impossible to perform any effects at all can be reduced.

Note that performance means A and performance means B refer to adjacent performance means. For example, if the performance means is composed of three or more performance means, the adjacent performance means may be performance means A and performance means B.

Means F-4. One of the A performance means and the B performance means is composed of an electrically driven performance means capable of performing an electrically driven performance using an electrically driven part operated by an electrically driven means, or a mobile part performance means capable of performing a mobile part performance using a mobile part that can be moved based on mechanical energy;
The other of the first and second performance means is constituted by a display means,
The gaming machine described in means F-3 is characterized in that when it is determined that there is an abnormality in one of the devices, a display simulating the one device can be derived in the other device.

According to means F-4, if a problem occurs in the electrically driven presentation means, which is relatively more likely to break down than the display means, or in the movable accessory presentation means, the display means can display a similar display to entertain the player. For example, if a movable accessory is provided adjacent to the liquid crystal display device, and a problem occurs with the movable accessory, the movable accessory can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Means F-5. An abnormality storage means for storing the abnormality identified by the identification means,
A gaming machine described in any of means F-1 to F-4, characterized in that (in the case of means F-2; the change-responsive performance and) when creating the alternative performance, the abnormality part storage means is referenced.

By means of means F-5, it is possible to easily identify the abnormal part once it has been identified. In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, after a change-responsive effect or an alternative effect has been created, it is discovered that a specified effect means cannot be used, and the change-responsive effect or the alternative effect must be re-created (removing the abnormal part) (this can be avoided except when the abnormal part is identified for the first time).

For example, in the above means F-3, if there is a C performance means adjacent to the B performance means, when a problem occurs in the B performance means, it may be determined whether or not a problem has occurred in one of the A performance means and the C performance means, and if it is determined that a problem has occurred, an alternative performance may be started in the other of the A performance means and the C performance means. Furthermore, when a problem occurs in the A performance means, it may be determined whether or not a problem has occurred in the B performance means, and if it is determined that a problem has occurred, an alternative performance may be started in the C performance means.

Means F-6. The gaming machine described in means F-5, which is configured to be able to try out a performance at the abnormal part during the variation response performance (for means F-1, a performance using the performance means) when information indicating the abnormal part is stored in the abnormal part storage means, and which is characterized in that when normal behavior is exhibited with respect to the attempted performance (when the recognition means does not recognize the abnormal part as the abnormal part), the corresponding information in the abnormal part storage means is erased.

Measure F-6 allows automatic recovery when a temporary problem is naturally resolved, enabling early and effective use of the abnormal part of the presentation means and reducing the hassle for those involved in the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed.

Means F-7. A gaming machine according to any one of means F-1 to F-6, characterized in that it is provided with an error notification means for notifying that the abnormality has been detected by the detection means.

According to the means F-7, it is possible to notify that a problem has occurred in the presentation means, and to obtain an opportunity for maintenance, etc. The error notification means may be configured to notify the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed of the abnormal part of the presentation means. In this case, various measures can be taken relatively smoothly, such as checking the gaming machine in question to see if it is in an advantageous situation for the player or the gaming hall (since it is a problem with the presentation means, such a situation will not generally occur), whether the gaming hall can handle it, or whether to request repairs from the gaming machine manufacturer, etc. Examples of notifications to the gaming hall include notifications to the hall computer that manages the gaming hall, notifications to external devices installed in the place where the gaming machine is installed, notifications on the gaming machine itself, etc.

Means F-8. The error notification means is configured to notify the player of the abnormal part of the performance means,
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
The gaming machine described in means F-7 is characterized in that the mode of the error notification means can be changed from a notification mode to a non-notification mode by operating the operating means.

According to means F-8, the player is made aware that a problem has occurred in the presentation means, and if the player is okay with this, the notification from the error notification means can be turned off and the game can proceed. Examples of ways to notify the player include displaying a notification (in the form of a caption) on a part of the display means, providing light-emitting means for identifying the abnormal part of the presentation means (by providing multiple light-emitting means together in one place, or by providing light-emitting means at each part of the presentation means) and causing the corresponding light-emitting means to emit light. The notification may be made after the variation-responsive presentation in which the abnormal part has been identified by the identification means, or from the point in time when the abnormal part has been identified by the identification means, or after the special display means (corresponding to means F-2) is in a state where no variation display of the identification information is being made.

In addition, in response to the above-mentioned means F-5 (related to means F-2), it is also possible to "set the error notification means to the notification mode when the variable display of the identification information on the special display means is not performed for a specific period of time, or when the power supply of the gaming machine is switched from an off state to an on state, and information indicating the abnormality is stored in the abnormality location storage means." In this case, even if a player who is unaware that a problem has occurred in the presentation means plays a game, the player can be properly informed that a problem has occurred in the presentation means.

Means F-9. The gaming machine described in means F-7 or F-8, characterized in that the notification by the error notification means is performed at least after the change response presentation (for means F-1, a presentation using the presentation means) in which the abnormal part is identified by the identification means.

According to means F-9, for example, the grasping means grasps the abnormal part in the latter half of the change response performance, and even if the change response performance is somehow enlivened by the alternative performance, it is possible to avoid a situation where the notification is distracting and ruins the performance.

Means F-10. The performance means includes at least one of an electrically driven performance means capable of performing an electrically driven performance using an electrically driven role operated by an electrically driven means, and a mobile role performance means capable of performing a mobile role performance using a mobile role that can move based on mechanical energy;
A gaming machine described in any one of means F-1 to F-9, characterized in that the electrically driven performance means and the movable gimmick performance means are equipped with a locking means capable of locking themselves in a reference state.

According to the means F-10, when a problem occurs with the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means, it is possible to avoid situations such as impeding the visibility of other presentation means. In addition, it is possible to avoid situations where the appearance is deteriorated or the player feels uneasy or distrustful by forcibly locking the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means with a member that was not originally provided in the gaming machine. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure so that when the gaming machine is powered on, only the displacement function of the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means can be turned off (the light emitting means mounted on the electrically driven presentation means or the movable accessory presentation means can be appropriately illuminated). In this case, it is possible to stabilize the state locked by the locking means.

Means F-11. A gaming machine described in any one of means F-1 to F-10, characterized in that the presentation means is configured to be able to change shape and is configured to be able to place another presentation means in front of the abnormality.

Measure F-11 makes abnormal areas less noticeable, reducing distraction from the abnormal areas.

G (Suppressing deviations in presentation). One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a gaming ball shot out by a launching means is configured to be able to enter various ball entry means provided on the gaming board. For example, when the ball enters the start ball entry means among the ball entry means, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player will be generated, and a variable display is performed by a variable display means to inform the player of the result of the lottery (see, for example, JP 2006-271480 A).

However, many players place importance on presentation means such as variable display means, and there is concern that unintended discomfort caused by such presentation means could reduce interest.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a loss of interest due to malfunctions in the presentation means.

Means PG-1. A performance means for executing a corresponding performance corresponding to the performance content determined based on a predetermined lottery,
a grasping means for grasping whether the corresponding performance is different from the performance content determined based on the predetermined lottery during the corresponding performance,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the remaining corresponding effects are changeable based on the information grasped by the grasping means.

The means PG-1 can minimize the discrepancy between the predetermined performance content and the corresponding performance that is actually being performed. This prevents problems in the corresponding performance, such as the performance being interrupted, ending too early, or ending too late, and also prevents the performance content determined based on a predetermined lottery, i.e., the matters to be taught in the corresponding performance, from no longer corresponding to the corresponding performance. In particular, because it is possible to determine whether such a discrepancy has occurred midway through the corresponding performance, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the discrepancy has become so large that recovery is impossible even if an attempt is made to balance the books at the end of the corresponding performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a malfunction in the performance means creates a great sense of incongruity in the corresponding performance, leading to a loss of interest.

Means PG-2. The gaming machine described in means PG-1, characterized in that it is provided with a check item storage means for storing check items for corresponding effects at the stage at which the deviation is grasped by the grasping means.

By using the means PG-2, it is possible to reliably check the corresponding performance in the middle of the corresponding performance (at the checkpoint).

Below, as means G, a specific configuration will be listed in which the configuration of the grasping means etc. for grasping the discrepancy in the grasping means of the above means PG-1 is embodied in a configuration for grasping the time discrepancy in a remaining time grasping means, but it is also possible to change (replace) the configuration related to the "remaining time grasping means" described in means G below to a configuration related to the "grasping means" as appropriate. For example, it may be that "the presentation means is configured to be capable of executing, as the corresponding presentation, a period-corresponding presentation corresponding to a presentation period determined based on a predetermined lottery, the grasping means includes remaining time grasping means capable of grasping the remaining time from the start of the presentation period to the end of the presentation period, and is configured to be able to change the period-corresponding presentation based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means."

Means G-1. A performance means for executing a period-corresponding performance corresponding to a performance period determined based on a predetermined lottery is provided;
a remaining time grasping means for grasping the remaining time from the start of the performance period to the end of the performance period,
A gaming machine characterized in that the period-dependent presentation is configured to be changeable based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means.

According to means G-1, by making it possible to change the period-based performance based on the time remaining until the end of a predetermined performance period, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy between the end timing of the predetermined performance period and the end timing of the period-based performance that is actually being performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations where the period-based performance performed in response to the performance period is interrupted, there is too much space between the period-based performance and the performance performed following that period-based performance, or the space is too close, or in some cases, the performance periods overlap. As a result, it is possible to prevent situations where a malfunction of the performance means causes a great sense of discomfort in the period-based performance, leading to a decrease in interest.

Means G-2. The gaming machine described in means G-1, characterized in that a plurality of the presentation means are provided, and the period-based presentation is performed by linking the presentations by the plurality of presentation means.

According to means G-2, for example, a pair of performance means can be divided up (buying time for preparation) so that one of them performs a performance while the other gets ready, and the other performs a performance while the other gets ready. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a performance means is not ready in time, causing problems with the period-based performance (reducing the causes of discrepancies). Furthermore, in cases where there is a possibility of a time discrepancy occurring in the performance means, by using multiple performance means, the discrepancy between each performance means can be kept as small as possible, and recovery (reducing or eliminating the discrepancy) can be performed by the performance means that performs the performance next. Furthermore, multiple performance means can be used for period-based performance, making it possible to perform grandiose performances, improving the performance quality, etc.

Means G-3. The performance means includes at least one of an electrically driven performance means capable of performing an electrically driven performance using an electrically driven part operated by an electrically driven means, and a mobile part performance means capable of performing a mobile part performance using a mobile part that can move based on mechanical energy;
The gaming machine described in means G-1 or G-2 is characterized in that the electrically driven presentation means and the movable device presentation means are configured to be able to adjust the presentation time performed by the electrically driven presentation means and the movable device presentation means based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means.

According to means G-3, even with electrically driven performance means and mobile prop performance means, by changing the performance flexibly, it is possible to reduce or eliminate the discrepancy with the timing of the end of a specific period in the electrically driven performance means and mobile prop performance means.

Means G-4. The performance means includes at least one of an electrically driven performance means capable of performing an electrically driven performance using an electrically driven role operated by an electrically driven means, and a moving role performance means capable of performing a moving role performance using a moving role that can move based on mechanical energy, and a display means;
A gaming machine described in any of means G-1 to G-3, characterized in that the presentation time performed by the display means is adjustable based on the remaining time grasped by the remaining time grasping means.

According to means G-4, by using an electrically driven performance means and a display means that can adjust the time of the performance relatively easily or more precisely than with a moving prop performance means, it is possible to more precisely match the end timing of a specific period. Therefore, the effect of matching the end timing of the performance period with the end timing of the period-based performance is dramatically improved.

In addition, by having the display means perform a performance after the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means, it becomes easier to return the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means to their standard state at the end of the performance period (period-corresponding performance). Also, by having the display means perform a performance before the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means, even if the electrically driven performance means and the mobile prop performance means are not able to be returned to their standard state at the end of the previous performance period, they can be returned to their standard state while the performance by the display means is being performed.

Means G-5. A plurality of the performance means are provided, and the performance by the plurality of the performance means is connected to perform the period-corresponding performance;
The gaming machine described in means G-3 or G-4, characterized in that at least one of the electrically driven performance means and the movable device performance means may be used in the performance that is performed first in the period-based performance, or may be used in a different order.

According to means G-5, it is possible to perform more diverse and interesting performances by appropriately rearranging the order of the performances performed by multiple performance means, changing the combination, etc. On the other hand, if a performance means used relatively late in the previous period-based performance is used relatively early in the next period-based performance, concerns such as the performance means not being ready in time become more pronounced; however, such concerns can be dispelled by taking appropriate measures while grasping the remaining time of the period-based performance (performance period) as in the above-mentioned means G-1.

Means G-6. A plurality of the performance means are provided, and the performance by the plurality of the performance means is connected to perform the period-corresponding performance;
A gaming machine described in any of means G-3 to G-5, characterized in that at least one of the electrically driven performance means and the movable device performance means may be used in the performance that is performed last in the period-based performance, or in an order other than those.

According to means G-6, it is possible to perform more diverse and interesting performances by appropriately rearranging the order of the performances performed by multiple performance means, changing the combination, etc. On the other hand, if a performance means used relatively late in the previous period-based performance is used relatively early in the next period-based performance, concerns such as the performance means not being ready in time become more pronounced; however, such concerns can be dispelled by taking appropriate measures while grasping the remaining time of the period-based performance (performance period) as in the above-mentioned means G-1.

Means G-7. The electrically driven performance means for performing the period-based performance and the standard state determination means for determining whether the moving role performance means are in a standard state or not are provided;
A gaming machine described in any of means G-3 to G-6, characterized in that at least at the timing of the end of the presentation period, it is determined whether or not there are any electrically driven presentation means and any movable gimmick presentation means that are not in the standard state.

According to means G-7, electrically driven performance means and movable prop performance means that are not in the standard state at the timing when the performance period ends may not be usable immediately (usually, operation from the standard state is programmed). Therefore, by checking whether there are electrically driven performance means and movable prop performance means that are not in the standard state at the timing when the performance period ends, appropriate measures can be taken (at least, it is sufficient that the specified performance means is returned to the standard state the next time the specified performance means is used).

That is, for example, when a period-compatible performance is performed following the period-compatible performance, the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means that are not in the standard state can be prevented from being used, or the time until the start of use can be set to a time sufficient for returning to the standard state (processing to confirm that they have returned can also be performed). Also, for example, when a situation is derived in which the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means are not used following the period-compatible performance, it is possible to simply continue the work of setting the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means that are not in the standard state to the standard state (however, it is desirable to take into consideration the timing and order of use of the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means that are not in the standard state when the next period-compatible performance is started in a situation where they are not in the standard state by the standard state determination means).

This means can be applied to a configuration that does not have the remaining time grasping means of the above-mentioned means G-1. Also, in response to the above-mentioned means G-2, "a plurality of performance patterns are provided for each of the performance means, and the time from performing the performance of the first performance pattern to achieving the reference state is different from the time from performing the performance of the second performance pattern to achieving the reference state, and the performance pattern by the other performance means of the period-based performance when the first performance pattern is derived in the period-based performance is at least partially different from the performance pattern by the other performance means of the period-based performance when the second performance pattern is derived in the period-based performance." In other words, for example, if it takes a long time to return a specific performance means to the reference state, a time-based performance that allows enough time (slack) to return the specific performance means to the reference state within the performance period can be set in anticipation of this, thereby preventing a situation in which the performance means cannot be returned to the reference state within the performance period. However, by having a pattern in which the electrically driven performance means and the movable prop performance means are driven to perform a performance even just before the end of the period-based performance, the performance quality and variety of the performance can be greatly improved.

Means G-8. The gaming machine described in means G-7, characterized in that it is provided with a preparation state storage means for storing information indicating whether or not there is a presentation means that is not in the reference state based on the determination of the reference state determination means.

According to the means G-8, it is possible to simplify the process of determining whether the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means are in the standard state. In addition, for example, even if it is determined that there is an electrically driven performance means and a movable role performance means that are not in the standard state at the timing of the end of the performance period, but a situation is derived in which the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means are not used following the period-compatible performance, it is possible to continue monitoring whether the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means have returned to the standard state. Therefore, when the next period-compatible performance starts during the monitoring period, it is possible to reliably perform settings that take into account the timing and order of use of the electrically driven performance means and the movable role performance means that are not in the standard state.

It is also possible to combine and embody any of the means described above as means A (means PA), means B (means PB), means C, means D, means E (means PE), means F, and means G (means PG). The "pseudo ball" is one form of a "mobile prop", and the mobile prop presentation means is one form of the first presentation means, second presentation means, transition presentation means, A presentation means, and B presentation means, and can be substituted for each of the above means as appropriate.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. A more detailed example of the form is "a pinball gaming machine equipped with an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a gaming area to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (general entry port, variable entry device, operating port, etc.) arranged within the gaming area."

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine with a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a pinball gaming machine that includes an operating means (a gaming ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (a launching motor, etc.) that bounces and launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a predetermined gaming area (for example, the gaming area is composed of a gaming board surface, etc.) that extends in a substantially vertical direction and to which the launched gaming balls are guided, and each ball entry means (a general winning port, a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) that are arranged within the gaming area, and that is configured so that the behavior of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area can be visually observed."

c. The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a reel type gaming machine such as a slot machine. A more detailed example of the embodiment is "a reel type gaming machine that is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a reel unit such as a reel unit) that displays a variable display (specifically, the rotation of a reel, etc.) of an identification information string (a pattern string; specifically, a reel, a belt, or other rotating body with patterns) consisting of a plurality of identification information (patterns) and then stops and displays the identification information string, and that is configured so that the variation of the identification information (patterns) is started due to the operation of a start operation means (specifically, a start lever), the variation of the identification information (patterns) is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (specifically, a stop button), and a gaming value is awarded on the condition that the identification information aligned on the pay line at the time of the stop is a specific identification information."

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine (particularly a ball-using rotary gaming machine with slot machine specifications that uses gaming balls as the gaming medium). A more detailed example of the embodiment is a gaming machine that includes "a variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that displays a variable display (specifically, the rotation of a reel, etc.) of an identification information string (a pattern string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or belt with patterns) consisting of a plurality of identification information (patterns) and then stops the identification information string, the variation of the identification information (pattern) is started by operating a start operation means (specifically, a start lever), the variation of the identification information (pattern) is stopped by operating a stop operation means (specifically, a stop button), and a gaming value is awarded on the condition that the identification information aligned on the pay line at the time of the stop is a specific identification information, and further includes a ball receiving tray (upper tray, etc.) and a take-in means that takes in gaming balls from the ball receiving tray and a pay-out means that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving tray, and the start condition of the game is established when the game balls are taken in by the take-in means."

10... Pachinko machine, 32... Variable winning device, 33a... First start winning device, 33b... Second start winning device, 34... Through gate, 35... Variable display device unit, 42... Decorative pattern display device, 43a... First special display device, 43b... Second special display device, 261... Main control device, 262... Sub-control device.

Claims (1)

a game area to which the game ball launched by the launching means is guided;
A specific area means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific area means is
A special ball entry section into which a game ball moving in the specific area can enter;
A special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special ball entry section,
The gaming machine includes:
A special game state advantageous to the player is given based on at least the detection by the special ball detection means;
The specific area means is configured to allow the game ball to enter the specific area based on the establishment of a specific condition, and to allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry section;
A specific effect means is provided for generating a specific effect during a predetermined period from when the specific condition is satisfied until the special ball entry detection means detects the ball,
The specific performance is ended before the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection means in the specific performance means, and the visibility of the specific area is increased, and the behavior of the game ball moving in the specific area is made visible;
A first situation can be derived in which the performance executed in the situation and a performance instructing the occurrence of the special game state can be derived based on the game ball entering the special ball entry section, and a second situation can be derived in which the specific performance by the specific performance means can be continuously executed until the performance instructing the occurrence of the special game state is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect when the effect in the first situation is executed, and the specific effect that continues to be executed until the effect indicating the occurrence of the special game state in the second situation is executed, can derive a common pattern during a specific period from the start of the specific effect to partway through .

Images